M 4172 Ib PDF

Instruction Book
M‑4172 Digital Motor

Bus Transfer System
TRADEMARKS
All brand or product names referenced in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
The content of this Instruction Book is provided for informational use only and is subject to change
without notice. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. has approved only the English version of this document.
SYNCHRONIZING
Digital Motor Bus

Transfer System M‑4172
Integrated Synchronizing System®
• Provides Automatic and Manual transfers of motor bus systems on

Low Voltage Switchgears in power plants and industrial processing
plants to ensure process continuity
• Automatically selects Fast, In-Phase, Residual Voltage, and Fixed
Time motor bus transfers, based on varying system conditions
• Applicable for one way and bi-directional Manual transfers
• Can be expanded to accommodate multiple breaker configurations
• Integrated control, supervisory functions, sequence of events,
and oscillograph recording in one device
• Extensive commissioning tools, including ringdown analysis
Industry Leader Since 1969

Made in the USA
M‑4172 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System – Specification
Standard Features
Automatic Transfer: The digital Motor Bus Transfer Manual Transfer: When a Manual Transfer is initiated
System (MBTS) provides the following Automatic the digital MBTS provides the following:
Transfer logic and features: • Sync check functions with adjustable
• Transfer initiated by protective relay external parameters
to the MBTS • Hot Parallel Transfer if enabled (make-before-
• Automatic Transfer after a loss of the motor bus break)
supply voltage based on the programmable • Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer and Residual
undervoltage element. This provides a Voltage Transfer (if the Hot Parallel Transfer is
selectable backup feature if a protective relay disabled)
transfer is not initiated.
• Programmable load shedding prior to initiating
• Fast Transfer with adjustable phase angle limit, Residual Voltage Transfer
delta voltage limit and delta frequency limit
• Verify the new source (the source to which the
• In-Phase Transfer at the first phase coincidence bus is being transferred) is healthy and within
if Fast Transfer is not possible. acceptable upper and lower voltage limits
• Residual Voltage Transfer at an adjustable
low residual voltage limit if Fast Transfer is not
Circuit Breaker Control: The digital Motor Bus
possible
Transfer System includes the following Circuit Breaker
• Fixed Time Transfer after an adjustable time Control features:
delay
• Control of two circuit breakers with two
• Programmable load shedding prior to initiating individual programmable breaker closing times
In‑Phase Residual Voltage Transfer and Fixed
• Three-breaker configuration can be provided
Time Transfer
by two M‑4172 devices
• Verify the new source (the source to which the
• Breaker status supervision
bus is being transferred) is healthy and within
acceptable upper and lower voltage limits • Breaker failure monitoring
–2–
Additional Standard Features Optional Features

• Sequential or Simultaneous Transfer Mode • 5 A or 1 A models available
• Bus Phase Undervoltage (27B) • 60 Hz or 50 Hz models available
• Frequency (81) and Rate of Change of • Available in vertical panel mount
Frequency (81R) for load shedding
• Redundant Power Supply
• Breaker Failure Source 1 and Source 2
• External TCM and CCM available
• Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection (60FL)
• Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (MODBUS
• Auto Trip over TCP/IP)
• Auto Close • Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (DNP
over TCP/IP)
• Four dry output contacts (two trip and two
close) for Source 1 and Source 2, one lockout/ • Serial Port TIA‑232 with RJ‑45 Connector
blocking output contact, and 3 programmable (DNP)
output contacts (2 Form 'a' and one Form 'c')
• Serial Port TIA‑485 with RJ‑45 Connector
• Two Breaker Status 52b (or 52a) inputs for (DNP)
the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers, four
• Ethernet Port RJ‑45 10/100 Base‑T (IEC 61850
programmable digital inputs
Protocol)
• All functions can be enabled or disabled
• Remote/Local control selection
• Device ON/OFF Control Selection
• M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Module
• M-3976 Status Module
• IRIG-B time synchronization
• Oscillographic recording
• Two RS-232 ports (front and rear) and one
RS‑485 port (rear)
• M-3871 ISScom ® Communications and
Oscillographic Analysis Software
–3–
The M‑4172 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System provides Automatic and Manual Transfers. The Fast Transfer,
In-Phase Transfer, and Residual Voltage Transfer methods are activated at the same time, if enabled. If the
conditions for the Fast Transfer are not met, then the In-Phase Transfer or the Residual Voltage Transfer will be
attempted. The Fixed Time Transfer is also provided if during a transfer operation, it is not possible to monitor
the motor bus voltage (due to Bus VT fuse loss, for example). The Residual Voltage Transfer, and Fixed Time
Transfer methods can be selectively disabled. The Automatic or Manual Transfer operation can be blocked by
control/status input or remote serial communications. See Figure 2 for Typical Application of Motor Bus Transfer
Systems and Figure 3 for Open Transition Transfer methods.
Automatic Transfer
Automatic Transfer can be initiated by an external protection trip signal (86P) or an external undervoltage function
(27) using control/status input to the Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) device or triggered by a sudden loss
of motor bus supply voltage using the internal bus undervoltage relay (27B Function). Automatic Transfer allows
transfer operation in both directions: from Source 1 to Source 2, and vice versa. The Automatic Transfer provides
Fast Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer and Fixed Time Transfer. The Automatic Transfer is
blocked when any lockout/blocking condition occurs. The MBTS will not respond to any transfer command and
will not send the trip command while in the lockout/blocking condition.
Manual Transfer
Manual transfer can be initiated by using the local Human-Machine Interface (HMI), from a control/status input
or through remote serial communications. The Manual Transfer allows transfer operation in either direction: from
Source 1 to Source 2, and vice versa. Manual Transfer provides Hot Parallel Transfer or a combination of Fast
Transfer, In-Phase Transfer, and Residual Voltage Transfer. The Manual Transfer is blocked when any lockout/
blocking condition occurs. The MBTS will not respond to any transfer command and will not send the trip command
while in the lockout/blocking condition.
Transfer Modes
There are two transfer modes, Sequential and Simultaneous, in the open transition transfer operation.
Sequential Transfer Mode

Once a transfer is initiated, and if the Sequential Mode is selected, the old source breaker is tripped within 10
ms and closure of the new source* breaker is attempted only upon confirmation by the breaker status contact
that the old source breaker has opened. Within 4 ms of receipt of this confirmation, Fast In-Phase and Residual
Voltage Transfer methods are enabled to supervise closure of the new source* breaker, and the Fixed Time
Transfer is enabled 30 cycles later. The new source* breaker is then closed by the Fast Transfer Method if the
phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is within the delta phase angle limit immediately after
the old source breaker opens.
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is not within the delta phase angle limit, the old
source breaker is still tripped. When the four methods of transfer are enabled, the new source* breaker then
closes either as a result of a subsequent movement into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time
Window, a movement through a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window or
by a drop in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed time delay of the
Fixed Time Transfer. Transfer is completed and the new source* breaker is closed by any of the above methods
whose criteria is first satisfied.
Refer to Figure 4 for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.
* NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–4–
Simultaneous Transfer Mode

Alternatively, once a transfer is initiated, and if the Simultaneous Mode is selected, within 10 ms of transfer
initiate, Fast, In-Phase, and Residual Voltage Transfer methods are immediately enabled to supervise closure of
the new source* breaker without waiting for the breaker status contact confirmation that the old source breaker
has opened. At the same instant, the commands for the old source breaker to trip and the new source* breaker
to close are sent simultaneously if and only if the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is
within the delta phase angle limit for the Fast Transfer Method immediately upon transfer initiation. However only
the Fixed Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old source breaker has opened.
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the new source* is not within the delta phase angle limit, the old
source breaker is still tripped. When the four methods of transfer are enabled, the new source* breaker then
closes either as a result of a subsequent movement into the delta phase angle limit within the Fast Transfer Time
Window, a movement through a predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase Transfer Time Window or
by a drop in the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or after the fixed time delay of the
Fixed Time Transfer. Transfer is completed and the new source* breaker is closed by any of the above methods
whose criteria is first satisfied.
Refer to Figure 5 for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.
Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection (60FL)

A Bus VT Fuse-Loss condition is detected by comparing either the three-phase voltage of the motor bus to the
three-phase voltage of the connected source (VT's in three-phase connection) or single phase voltage of the
motor bus to a single phase voltages of the connected source (VT's in single phase connection): phase a to
phase a, phase b to phase b, and phase c to phase c.
Auto Trip
If an external operation closes the second breaker while leaving the first one closed, and if the Auto Trip feature
is enabled, there is a breaker trip option: the MBTS will trip the breaker that was originally closed or the breaker
that has just been closed within an adjustable time delay (0 to 50 Cycles in increments of 0.5 Cycle) after the
second breaker is closed. This Auto Trip operates to transfer in either direction. The purpose is to allow external
parallel transfer but prohibits inadvertent parallel operation. It must be noted that the external operation that
closed the second breaker must be supervised by means external to the motor bust transfer system.
Auto Close
If an external operation opens the second breaker while leaving the first one open, and if the Auto Close feature
is selected, the MBTS will close the breaker that was originally opened. The originally opened breaker will be
closed using the Fast Transfer, Residual Voltage Transfer or Fixed Time Transfer method depending upon the
bus voltage decayed condition. This Auto Close operates to transfer in either direction. The purpose is to permit
a transfer when the normally-closed breaker is accidentally/inadvertently tripped resulting in two open breakers.
This operation is very similar to the regular transfer process except it does not send out the trip command, since
the second breaker is already opened.
–5–
Lockout/Blocking
A transfer is blocked when any lockout/blocking condition described below is active:
• Voltage Blocking – If prior to a transfer, the new source* voltage exceeds the Upper or Lower voltage
limits, all transfers are blocked as long as the voltage remains outside these limits.
• External Blocking – When this control input contact is closed, all transfers are blocked.
• Incomplete Transfer Lockout – Blocks any transfer initiated by a protective relay initiate or an automatic
initiated transfer or manual transfer if the last transfer has not been completed within the time delay. A
time delay can be set from 50 to 3000 Cycles. The MBTS remains in the lockout condition until manually
reset.
• Bus VT Fuse Loss Blocking – Transfer is blocked if the Bus VT fuse loss is detected and the customer
has selected to block transfers when this occurs.
• "Both Breakers Same State" Blocking – If both breaker status contacts are in the open state, due to
an external operation that opens the second breaker while leaving the first one open, and if the Auto
Close feature is not selected, no transfer sequence is initiated. Furthermore, any subsequent initiation
of a transfer sequence while the breakers are in this state is inhibited. Also, if both breaker status
contacts are closed due to an external operation that closes the second breaker while leaving the first
one closed, and if the auto trip feature is disabled, no transfer sequence is initiated.
• Transfer in Process Blocking – Once a transfer is in process, any other transfer initiate inputs will be
ignored until the original transfer is complete.
• Blocking After Transfer – After a transfer has been completed, any additional transfers are blocked for
0 to 8160 cycles, as selected by the user.
The Output 8 Lockout/Blocking Output is energized when any Lockout/Blocking condition as mentioned above
is active except Transfer In Process Blocking and Blocking After Transfer.
–6–
TRANSFER SETTINGS
Setpoint
Ranges Increment Accuracy†
Automatic Transfer
Fast Transfer
Delta Phase Angle Limit* 0.0 to 90.0 Degrees 0.1 Degree ±0.5 Degree
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or 5%
Time Window** 1 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Closing Command
Time Delay*** 0 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
* Accuracy defined at a constant frequency with a delta frequency of zero (0).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.
*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous. The trip and close commands are normally issued
at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-before-
make mode of operation (open transition).
In-Phase Transfer
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 2%

Delta Frequency Limit* 0.10 to 15.00 Hz 0.05 Hz 0.02 Hz (0.1 Hz)***
Time Window** 10 to 600 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of
47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz (3-phase); 0.4 Hz(single phase).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.
*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.
For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 15.0 Hz slip
frequency.
Residual Voltage Transfer

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 60 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Load Shedding Time Delay* 0 to 100 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.
* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command
for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.
Fixed Time Transfer

Fixed Time Delay 30 to 1000 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
This method is based on time delay only, and does not use the voltage, phase angle, frequency or current to
supervise the closing of the new source breaker. The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being
transferred.
Enabling the Load Shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.
* The load shedding command is issued when the Fixed Time delay has timed out. The Close command for the
Fixed Time Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.
†
Select the greater of these accuracy values. Accuracy applies to sinusoidal voltage with constant amplitude and frequency.
–7–
TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Manual Transfer
Fast Transfer
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or ±5%
Time Window** 1 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ± 1 Cycle
Closing Command
Time Delay*** 0 to 10 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which a Fast Transfer may be initiated.
*** This time delay is only used for Fast Transfer in Simultaneous mode. The trip and close commands are normally
issued at the same time. This time delay allows the flexibility to delay the closing command to accomplish the break-
before-make mode of operation (open transition).
In-Phase Transfer
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 2%

Delta Frequency Limit* 0.10 to 15.00 Hz 0.05 Hz 0.02 Hz (0.1 Hz)***
Time Window** 10 to 600 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
* The pickup accuracy applies to the 60 Hz model at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to the 50 Hz model at a range of
47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is 0.1 Hz (3-phase); 0.4 Hz(single phase).
** This timer is used to limit the time window during which an in-phase transfer may be initiated.
*** Value in parentheses applies to single phase unit.
For In-Phase Transfer, phase angle accuracy at first phase coincidence is 10.0 degrees with up to 15.0 Hz slip
frequency.

Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 60 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%
* The load shedding command is issued when bus voltage drops below residual voltage limit. The close command
for the Residual Voltage Transfer is sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.
Enabling load shedding option allows the user to assign an output contact to shed load.
Hot Parallel Transfer

Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 0.50 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.01 Hz or ±5%
Time Window 1.0 to 50.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Tripping Command
Time Delay** 0.0 to 30.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
** This time delay is only used in the Manual Transfer to implement a Hot Parallel Transfer (make-before-break).
†
–8–
TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Setpoint
Auto Trip
Trip Originally Closed Enable/Disable – –

Breaker
Trip Breaker Enable/Disable – –
Just Closed
Tripping Command
Time Delay 0.0 to 50.0 Cycles 0.5 Cycle 1 Cycle
Common Function Settings
Upper Voltage Limit 5 to 180 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%

New Source
Lower Voltage Limit 5 to 180 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%
New Source
Breaker Closing Time #1
(Source 1 Breaker)(1) 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Breaker Closing Time #2
(Source 2 Breaker)(1) 0.0 to 12.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Breaker Closing Time
Deviation #1 (2) 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
Deviation #2 (2) 0.0 to 6.0 Cycles 0.1 Cycle 0.3 Cycle
This is the time it takes the breaker to close from the issue of a close command to when the breaker status
(1)
contact closes. The selectable adaptive breaker closing time is also provided.
(2)
An alarm is activated if the actual Breaker Closing Time exceeds the programmed closing time by ± this value.
Incomplete Transfer
Lockout Time(3) 50 to 3000 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle or ±1%
Local Manual Transfer
Initiate Time Delay(4) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Remote Manual Transfer
Initiate Time Delay(6) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Blocking After
Transfer Time(5) 0 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Trip Command
Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
Close Command
Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle ±1 Cycle
This timer is used for situations where the transfer was not completed. Response to a breaker failure is
(3)
considered a complete transfer, and resets this timer.

This time delay is only applicable when the manual transfer is initiated from the local front panel via the HMI or
(4)
Com1 port.
(5)
This timer is used to block any additional transfer after a transfer has been completed.
This time delay is only applicable when manual transfer is initiated from the Control/Status input, Com2 Port,
(6)
Com3 Port or Ethernet Port.
†
–9–
FUNCTIONS
Setpoint
27B Bus Undervoltage
Pickup #1, #2, #3, #4 5 to 120 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%

27B Inhibit Setting** 5 to 120 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%
Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle -1 to +3 Cycles or ±0.5%*
* The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at
a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency
down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is ≤ 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.
** The Voltage Inhibit setting can be enabled or disabled.
27B #1 is the Bus Undervoltage Automatic transfer initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S1 to S2
direction.
27B #2 is the Bus Undervoltage Automatic transfer initiate function that is used for Automatic Transfer from S2 to S1
direction.
27B #3 can be used for load shedding.
27B #4 can be used for alarm or trip function.
The 27B functions are applicable only when the bus voltage input is applied.
50BF-1 Breaker Failure (Source 1)
50 Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

BF1 (0.02 to 2.00 A)* (0.02 A or 2%)
Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
50BF-1 can be initiated from designated M‑4172 output contacts or programmable inputs.
* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating
50BF-2 Breaker Failure (Source 2)
50 Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

BF2 (0.02 to 2.00 A)* (0.02 A or 2%)
Time Delay 1 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle
50BF-2 can be initiated from designated M‑4172 output contacts or programmable inputs.
* Value in parentheses apply to 1A Secondary Rating
Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)
Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only.
The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable time
delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function (50BF) when
current is present.
Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)
Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

The breaker failure time delay is used to monitor breaker failure when using the breaker status inputs only.
The breaker is considered failed when the breaker status has not changed state within this programmable time
delay after a trip command is issued. A separate time delay is provided for breaker failure function (50BF) when
current is present.
†
Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating.
–10–
FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
Setpoint
81 Bus Frequency
Pickup #1, #2 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.02 Hz (±1.0 Hz)**

81
40.00 to 57.00 Hz*
Time Delay #1, #2 5 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle ±3 Cycles or ±1%
The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53
Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is ±0.1 Hz (3-phase); ±0.4 Hz(single phase).
The 81 #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. The 81 Function is automatically disabled when the bus
voltage input is less than 5 to 15 V (Positive Sequence) based on the frequency, or less than 5 V (Single Phase).
* This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency model.
** Value in parentheses applies to single phase bus frequency.
81R Bus Rate of Change of Frequency
Pickup #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec. ±0.05 Hz/Sec. or ±5%

81R Time Delay #1, #2 3 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +20 Cycles
Negative Sequence
Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99% 1% ±0.5%
Increasing ROCOF Enable/Disable
The 81R #1 Function can be used to initiate Load Shedding. 81R function can only be used when the bus voltage
input is three-phase, and for load shedding.
Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection
Delta Pickup* 5 to 25 V 1 V ±.05 V or ±2%

60FL
Time Delay** 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle 3 Cycles or 1%****
Blocking Drop Out
Time Delay*** 1 to 300 Cycles 1 Cycle 3 Cycles or 1%****
* Mismatched voltage of the motor bus in respect to the connected source.
** This time delay is for the programmable alarm output.
*** This is the time it takes to drop out (reset) the block transfer after no Bus VT fuse-loss is detected.
**** The pickup and time delay accuracies apply to 60 HZ models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at
a range of 47 to 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the time delay accuracy is 6 Cycles or 0.75% for the bus frequency
down to 25 Hz. The time delay accuracy is ≤ 20 Cycles or 1% for the bus frequency at a range of 5 to 25 Hz.
If the bus VT fuse-loss is detected, the user must either select block transfer or initiate the Fixed Time Transfer.
Bus VT fuse-loss output is initiated from internally generated logic.
ISSLogic®
ISSLogic uses control/status input status, system status, function status, output contact close signals
ISSL to develop 6 programmable logic schemes.
Time Delay #1-#6 0 to 65500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
Dropout/Reset Time Delay
#1-#6 0 to 65500 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle or 1%
†
–11–
Metering
The Digital Fast Transfer System provides metering of voltage and current of the Source 1 and Source 2, and
Voltage and Frequency of the Motor Bus.
Metering accuracies are:
Voltage: ±0.5 V or ±0.5%, whichever is greater (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for
50 Hz models)
±1.0 V or ±0.75%, whichever is greater (below 57 Hz or beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; below
47 Hz or beyond 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
Current: 5 A rating, ±0.1 A or ±3%, whichever is greater
1 A rating, ±0.02 A or ±3%, whichever is greater
Frequency: ±0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models)
±0.1 Hz (below 57 Hz or beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models; below 47 Hz or beyond 53 Hz for 50
Hz models)
Phase Angle: ±0.5 degree or ±0.5%, whichever is greater
Oscillographic Recorder
The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data recording of all monitored waveforms, and status
inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The
number of samples per cycle used to store the data is user selectable. The number of samples per cycle that
can be selected is 16 or 32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples selected effects the length of the data that can
be saved and its resolution. The lower the number of samples, the longer the record length that can be stored
(but at a lower resolution).
The oscillographic recorder is triggered by a designated control/status input (usually a protective relay initiate
input), an automatically initiated signal, a trip output, a manual transfer signal or from serial communications.
When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data
in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for
a user‑defined, post-trigger delay period. The records may be analyzed using Beckwith Electric ISScom®
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software, and are also available in COMTRADE file format.
Transfer Event Log

A transfer event log is considered complete when one of following occurs:
1. When the breaker from the old source opens and the breaker to the new source* closes.
2. When a breaker failure occurs.
3. When the incomplete transfer timer times out.
Depending on transfer type, up to four transfers will be stored. When 16 events are stored, any subsequent
event will cause the oldest event to be lost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is time stamped with the date
and time in 1 ms increments.
The trigger and complete events are used to define the time frame during which the transfer event log is storing
information. A reset feature is provided to clear this log through the serial communications. The Transfer Event
Log is available for viewing utilizing the M-3871 ISScom Communications Software.
Sequence of Events Recording

In addition to the Transfer Event Log the Digital Fast Transfer System provides Sequence of Events Recording.
The Sequence of Events Recording stores every change in the input status, trip commands, close commands,
any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change in any breaker status, and status reset. Each of these
Running Events are time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments. The Running Event Log stores the
last 512 events, when a new event occurs the oldest event is removed. A reset feature is provided to clear this
log through the serial communications. The events and the associated data are available for viewing utilizing the
M-3871 ISScom® Communications Software.
*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–12–
Calculations
Current and Voltage Values: The Digital Fast Transfer System uses Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and
RMS calculation algorithm on sampled voltage and current signals to extract fundamental amplitude, phase and
frequency for the M‑4172.
Power Input Options

Nominal 110/120/230/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 Vdc. UL Rating 85 Vac to 265 Vac and
from 80 Vdc to 288 Vdc. Burden 20 VA at 120 Vac/125 Vdc. Withstands 315 Vdc or 300 Vac for 1 second.
Nominal 24/48 Vdc, operating range from 18 Vdc to 56 Vdc. Burden 20 VA at 24 Vdc and 20 VA at 48 Vdc.
Withstands 65 Vdc for 1 second.
An optional redundant power supply is available.
Sensing Inputs
Nine Voltage Inputs – Rated for a nominal voltage of 60 Vac to 140 Vac (user configurable) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz.
Will withstand 240 V continuous voltage and 360 V for 10 seconds. Voltage transformer burden is less than 0.2
VA at 120 V. Source voltage may be phase-to ground or phase-to-phase connected. For proper operation of
M‑4172 MBTS, the connections for the Source 1, Source 2 and Bus voltages must match each other. The unit
may have up to three voltage inputs for each of the Source 1, Source 2, and Bus Voltages.
One Source 1 Current Input – Rated for a current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A (optional) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand
4 IR continuous current and 100 IR for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A (5 A
option), or 0.3 VA at 1 A (1 A option).
One Source 2 Current Input – Rated for a current (IR) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A (optional) at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand
4 IR continuous current and 100 IR for 1 second. Current transformer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A (5 A
option), or 0.3 VA at 1 A (1 A option).
Control/Status Inputs
To provide proper operation and breaker status LED indication on the front panel, the 52a or 52b breaker contacts
must be connected to inputs 1 and 4. The default programming of INPUT1 is S1 52a. The default programming of
INPUT4 is S2 52a. The remaining inputs are left unprogrammed and can be programmed to initiate the transfer
or block the transfer operation, trigger the Oscillograph recorder, or to operate one or more outputs.
The four inputs, INPUT2, INPUT3, INPUT5 and INPUT6 are fully programmable to any of the following functions:
• None • 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) • Transfer Block #3
• S1 52 SP (service position) • 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) • External Status Reset
• S2 52 SP (service position) • 27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) • Manual Transfer Initiate
• Automatic Transfer Block • Transfer Block #1 • Manual Transfer Block
• 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) • Transfer Block #2
The control/status inputs are designed to be connected to dry contacts and are internally wetted with a 24 Vdc
power supply. The minimum current value to initiate/pickup an input is ≥ 25 mA.
Output Contacts
Output contacts OUTPUT1 through OUTPUT4 are available to Trip and Close the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers
and are closed for a defined pulse length (pulse length can be programmed from 15 to 30 Cycles). The power
supply alarm output contact (form 'b') and the self-test alarm output contact (form 'c'), and one output contact
for lockout or blocking status (form 'c'). These outputs are predefined.
The three programmable output contacts OUTPUT5 through OUTPUT7 (two form 'a' and one form 'c'), the Lockout/
Block alarm output contact OUTPUT8 (form 'c'), the power supply alarm output contact (form 'b') and the self-test
alarm output contact (form 'c'), are all rated as per IEEE C37.90 (see Tests and Standards section for details).
Any of the MBTS functions can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the programmable
output contacts (Outputs 5 to 7). Any output contact can also be selected as pulsed or latched. ISSLogic can
also be used to activate an output contact.
–13–
Breaker Closing Time and Breaker Failure Monitoring

The Breaker Closing Time Monitoring feature measures the breaker closing time each time a transfer occurs. If
this time varies by more than a selectable breaker closing time deviation of the programmed time, an alarm is
activated. The breaker closing time is measured from the time the close command is sent until the breaker status
indicates that the breaker is closed.
The selectable Adaptive Breaker Closing Time is provided. If it is enabled, a new setpoint of the breaker closing
time will be automatically updated to an average value of 8 breaker closing time's measurements; however the
setpoints of the breaker closing time are not permitted to write and change unless this feature is disabled.
The breaker status inputs are also monitored for breaker failure. The breaker is considered failed when the breaker
status has not changed state within a programmable time after a trip command is issued. When Simultaneous
Transfer mode is selected and a breaker failure occurs on the breaker that should have tripped, the breaker that
was just closed will be tripped. This prevents the new source* from being continuously connected with the failed
breaker, which could have a fault.
Power up Self-Test and Continuous On-Line Testing

The system performs self test verifications when power is first applied to the unit. These include verifying the
operation of the multiplexer, programmable gain amplifier, analog to digital converter, DSP chip, Host processor
and all RAM chips. After the initial self test is complete and the system is operating normally, continuous self
check verification continues to check for correct operation of the system. The continuous self check verification
tests are performed in the background and do not effect the response time of the unit to emergency conditions.
In addition to the background tests, there are tests that can be performed in the diagnostic mode during periodic
off line system testing. These additional tests can exercise the relay outputs, check front panel LED operation,
verify input status operation, check pushbutton operation and communication operation.
Target/Status Indicators and Controls

The SYS OK LED reveals proper cycling of the microcomputer; it can be programmed to flash or to be illuminated
continuously. The SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED and SOURCE 2 BRKR CLOSED red LEDs illuminate when the
breaker is closed (when the 52b contact is open). The SOURCE 1 BRKR OPEN and SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN
green LEDs illuminate when the breaker is open (when the 52b contact is closed). The 52 contact input can be
configured for either "a" or "b" inputs. The appropriate status LED will illuminate when corresponding conditions,
events or unit functions activate.
Pressing and releasing the STATUS RESET pushbutton resets the STATUS LEDs if the conditions causing the
operation have been removed. Pressing and holding the STATUS RESET pushbutton will allow conditions, events
or functions that are picked up to be displayed. The PS1 and PS2 (if a redundant power supply is installed) LEDs
will remain illuminated as long as power is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating properly. TIME
SYNC LED illuminates when a valid IRIG-B signal is applied and time synchronization has been established. The
TRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 and CLOSE SOURCE 2 status indicators are latched
due to the pulsed nature of these commands. To provide information about which outputs were operated during
the last transfer, the appropriate TRIP SOURCE 1, CLOSE SOURCE 1, TRIP SOURCE 2 or CLOSE SOURCE 2
LEDs in the Status module are latched until reset or the next transfer.
Communication
Communication ports include rear RS-232 and RS-485 ports, a front RS-232 port, a rear IRIG-B port, and
an Ethernet port (optional). The communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, asynchronous
communication, providing the following functions when used with the Windows®-compatible M-3871 ISScom®
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software. MODBUS protocol is supported, providing:
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints and configuration
• Time-stamped status information for the 4 most recent Transfer Event logs
• Time-stamped status information for the 512 most recent events in the Sequence of Events log
• Real-time metering of all measured quantities, control status inputs, and outputs
• Downloading of recorded oscillographic data and Sequence of Events recorder data
• Initiate manual transfer and Sequence of Events recorder
*NOTE: The 'new source' is defined as the source to which the bus is being transferred.
–14–
Optional Ethernet Port

The RJ-45 Ethernet port supports 10/100 Base-T fast Ethernet standard with auto negotiable speed. Additionally,
MDI‑X capability is provided to eliminate the need of a crossover cable when two similar devices are connected.
The optional RJ-45 Ethernet port may be purchased with the following communication protocols:
• MODBUS/BECO2200 over TCP/IP
• DNP over TCP/IP
• IEC 61850: up to 4 concurrent sessions, to monitor all metering values, change settings and generate
unsolicited reports. Refer to M‑4172 Instruction Book, Section 4.1 Unit Setup for detailed information.
The M‑3871 ISScom Communications and Oscillographic Analysis Software enables the plotting and printing
of M‑4172 waveform data downloaded from the unit to any Windows® compatible computer. The ISScom
Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software can also be used to analyze the operation of the system,
determine timing of the trip and close commands, breaker times and to evaluate "bus ringdown" test data.
The evaluation of "bus ringdown" data eliminates the requirement for separate recording equipment during
commissioning.
IRIG-B
The M‑4172 accepts either modulated (B‑122) using the BNC Port, or demodulated (B‑002) using the RS-232
Port, IRIG-B time clock synchronization signals. The IRIG-B time synchronization information is used to correct
the local calendar/clock and provide greater system wide synchronization for status and oscillograph time tagging.
HMI Module
Local access to the M‑4172 is provided through the M-3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, allowing
for easy-to-use, menu-driven access to all functions using a 6-pushbutton keyboard and a 2-line by 24 character
alphanumeric display. The M-3931 module includes the following features:
• User-definable access codes providing three levels of security
• Real-time metering of all measured quantities, control status inputs, and outputs
• Initiate Manual Transfer
• Remote/Local control
• Device On/Off control
Status Module
An M-3976 Status Module provides 24 status and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate status LEDs illuminate when the
corresponding M‑4172 conditions, event or function activates. The status indicators can be reset with the STATUS
RESET pushbutton if the activated conditions have been removed. The OUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of
the programmable output contacts.
ISSLogic®
This feature can be programmed utilizing the M-3871 ISScom Communications Software. ISScom takes the
control/status input status, system status and function status, and by employing (OR, AND, NOR and NAND)
boolean logic and timers, can activate an output, change active setting profiles, initiate transfer, or block transfer.
There are six ISSLogic Functions. The ISSLogic Function Diagram is illustrated in Figure 1.
–15–
Tests and Standards

M‑4172 Digital Fast Transfer System complies with the following type tests and standards:
Voltage Withstand
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5 2,000 Vac / 3,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
2,000 Vac / 3,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied to IRIG-B circuit to earth
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit
1,500 Vdc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit
Impulse Voltage
IEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit
1.2 by 50 µs, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds
Insulation Resistance
IEC 60255-5 > 100 Megaohms
Voltage Interruptions Immunity

IEC 60255-11 (AC) 5 cycles, (DC) 30 ms - max
Electrical Environment
Emissions
EN 55022 Class A Limits
Conducted Emissions 150 kHz-30 MHz
Radiated Emissions 30 MHz-1000 MHz
Electrostatic Discharge Test

EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (8 kV)– point contact discharge
EN 60255-22-2 Class 4 (15 kV)– air discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Test

EN 60255-22-4 Class A (4 kV, 2.5 kHz)
Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1-1989 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit
ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth

C37.90.1-2002 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to earth
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied between each independent circuit
 NOTE: The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS‑485, IRIG-B, Ethernet communication
port coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp.
–16–
Radiated Immunity
IEEE C37.90.2 80-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m
EN 60255-22-3
Conducted Immunity
EN 60255-22-6 10 Vemf 150 kHz-80 MHz
Output Contacts
IEEE C37.90 30 A make for 0.2 seconds at 250 Vdc Resistive
UL 508 8 A carry at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

CSA C22.2 No. 14 6 A break at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
0.5 A break at 48 Vdc, 24 VA
0.3 A break at 125 Vdc, 37.5 VA
0.2 A break at 250 Vdc, 50 VA
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold, -20° C (-4° F) Operating
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C (+158° F) Operating
IEC 60068-2-78 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 95%RH Operating
IEC 60068-2-30 Damp High Heat Condensation Cycles +25° C, +55° C (131° F) @ 95%RH Operating
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g
IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1, 5.0 g
Shock Withstand Class 1, 15.0 g
Bump Response Class 1, 10.0 g
Compliance
cULus-Listed per 508 – Industrial Control Equipment
– Industrial Control Equipment Certified for Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
cULus-Listed Component per 508A Table SA1.1 Industrial Control Panels
European Safety - EN 61010-1:2001, CAT II, Pollution Degree 2
Physical
Size: 19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm)
Mounting: The unit is a standard 19", semi flush, 3-unit high, rack-mount panel design, conforming to ANSI/
EIA RS-310C and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Optional mounting is available.
Environmental: For flat surface mounting on a Type 1 enclosure, UL rated to 70°C surrounding air ambient.
Approximate Weight: 17 lbs (7.7 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 25 lbs (11.3 kg)
–17–
Recommended Storage Parameters

Temperature: 5° C to 40° C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 50%
relative humidity at 40° C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew, percolating water,
rain and solar radiation.
See M-4172 Instruction Book, Appendix G, Layup and Storage for additional information.
Disposal and Recycling

Disposal of E-Waste for Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. Products
The customer shall be responsible for and bear the cost of ensuring all governmental regulations within their
jurisdiction are followed when disposing or recycling electronic equipment removed from a fixed installation.
Equipment may also be shipped back to Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. for recycling or disposal. The customer is
responsible for the shipping cost, and Beckwith Electric Co. Inc. shall cover the recycling cost. Contact Beckwith
Electric Co. Inc. for an RMA # to return equipment for recycling.
Patent & Warranty

The M‑4172 Digital Fast Transfer System is covered by U.S. Patent 7,468,593.
The M‑4172 Digital Fast Transfer System is covered by a ten year warranty from date of shipment.
External Connections
M‑4172 external connection points are illustrated in Figure 6 & Figure 7, External Connections.
TRADEMARKS
All brand or product names referenced in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Specification subject to change without notice. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. has approved only the English version
of this document.
–18–
ISSLogic Functions
Initiating Outputs This section of ISSLogic
used to activate the desired Output
This section of ISSLogic initiates
the Function Operation
Outputs
Selectable And/Or Block

Transfer
Initiating Function
Programmable
function(s) Initiate
(Incl. ISSLogic Selectable And/Or
Transfer
and System
Status) Programmed
Time Delay
Selectable And/Or/Nor/Nand
Selectable And/Or 0-65,500 cycles Programmed

(1091sec at Outputs 5-8
60Hz)
ISSLogic # N
–19–
Activated
Initiating Inputs
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input
Selectable And/Or
Figure 1 ISSLogic® Function Diagram

Initiate Via
Communication
Point
Blocking Inputs
This section of ISSLogic is used
to Block the Function Operation
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input
Selectable And/Or
Block Via
Communication
Point
MAIN SOURCE STARTUP SOURCE
UNIT AUXILIARY STATION SERVICE

TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER
VT-M VT-SU
VS1 VS2
M-4172
CT-M IS1 VBus IS2 CT-SU
52 N.O. 52
M N.C. SU
VT-B
STATION BUS SYSTEM
M M
TWO-BREAKER CONFIGURATION
Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)
VS1 VS1
VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4172 M-4172 IS1
IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2
52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2
VT-B1 VT-B2
BUS-TIE
STATION BUS SYSTEM BUS 1 BUS 2
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2
M M M M
THREE-BREAKER CONFIGURATION
 NOTE: Current Transformers are used for the M‑4172's 50BF Function metering and oscillography, they are
not required for transfer operation.
Figure 2 Typical Applications of Motor Bus Transfer Systems
–20–
Fast
0 1 pu
Phase (Degrees)
Voltage
Residual and
180
Fixed Time
In-Phase
0 pu
360
Time
Figure 3 Open Transition Transfer Methods
–21–
Figure 4 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode
–22–
IN-PHASE TRANSFER TIME WINDOW*
IN-PHASE TRANSFER
ENABLE
Figure 5 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode
–23–
1. 8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS

must be connected to inputs (terminals
5 through 10 with 11 common) because
these contact inputs are internally wetted
with 24 Vdc. Application of external
voltage on these inputs may result in
damage to the units.
2. 3 CAUTION: The 52a or 52b Breaker Status

contact can be connected to Input 1 52/S1
and Input 4 52/S2. The M‑4172 must be
programmed to agree with the 52a or 52b
contact connections respectively.
3. 8 WARNING: The protective grounding

terminal must be connected to an earthed
ground any time external connections
have been made to the unit.
 NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-

energized state, and without power
applied to the relay.
 NOTE: The self-test relay is energized when

the relay has performed all self-tests
successfully.
 NOTE: The Lockout Blocking Output is

energized when any Lockout/Blocking
condition occurs. See Lockout/Blocking
section for details.
1&2
QQ NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) is

energized when the power supply is
functioning properly.
3
Figure 6 External Connections (Horizontal Mount)
–24–

must be connected to inputs (terminals
IRIG - B
5 through 10 with 11 common) because
U.S. PATENT 7,468,593
these contact inputs are internally wetted
with 24 Vdc. Application of external
3 35
COM 2
E T HE RNE T
voltage on these inputs may result in
36
damage to the units.
COM 2
37 RS 2 3 2
38 2. 3CAUTION: The 52a or 52b Breaker Status
B EC K W IT H E L ECT R IC C O . INC .
VA
6 19 0 118 t h AV E NO .
L A RG O , F L 3 3 7 7 3
39
VAB S contact can be connected to Input 1 52/S1
O
U
R
and Input 4 52/S2. The M‑4172 must be
40
VB C 1
programmed to agree with the 52a or 52b
VBC E
41 1 2 contact connections respectively.
3
42
-
8 WARNING: The protective grounding
727- 5 4 4 - 23 26
VC RS 4 8 5
COM 3
VCA 4
3.
+
43
R
6
0 44
IN6
5
terminal must be connected to an earthed
A
ground any time external connections
-
T 1 IN5 6
E 4
D 0
V VA
52/S2
a/b IN4
7 have been made to the unit.
V
O VAB
S IN3 8
L 5 O
T 0 U
A
G
/
6
R IN2 9
E 45 C
1
0
E 52/S1
a/b IN1 energized state, and without power
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique
10
H
z 2 &
46
VB 2 applied to the relay.
(
N
O 47
VBC
INPUTS !
M
I
IN
N
A
48
VC RT N 11  NOTE: The self-test relay is energized when
L
49
VCA
the relay has performed all self-tests
(
12
50
P/S
13
successfully.
VA
SELF TEST
VAB 14
51
BUS 15  NOTE: The Lockout Blocking Output is

52
VB
16
energized when any Lockout/Blocking
53
VBC
L B 17
condition occurs. See Lockout/Blocking
54
OL
CO section for details.
VC KC 8 18
OK
VCA U I
55
TN 19
G
1A 56
S
O 20
R
C
U
I S1
U
R
C
7 21
energized when the power supply is
(
MODEL: M-4172
RN
functioning properly.
A 57 E
1
T RO
E E M
5 0 Hz
22
D
(
N S
58 O
T U
I S2 R 23
C
5A 59 E
2
6
6 0 Hz
24
OUT-
60 PUTS
+
25
18- 5 6
85-265 PS 2 5
FIRMWARE: D-0229
61 - 26
62 27
+
18- 5 6
PS 1 4
S E RIA L NO .
85-265 CLOSE
63 - S2
28
29
3
TRIP
30
S2
F3 F1
31
2
PS 2 CLOSE
32
S1
3 A MP,
F4 33
250V, F2
(3A B) 1
TRIP
34
S1
PS 1
Figure 7 External Connections (Vertical Mount)
–25–
17.50 ± .12
.00
[44.5 +.30 - .00]
9.97
[25.32]
19.00
[48.26]
18.31 0.35
[46.51] [0.89]
2.25 5.21
M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR [13.23]
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM [5.72]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1.48
[3.76]
0.40 [1.02] X 0.27
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. [0.68] Slot (4X)
Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis
Figure 8 Horizontal Mounting Dimensions
–26–
5.65
[14.40]
5.59
[14.20] 0.03
Actual [0.076]
2.25 1.67
0.35 [5.72] [4.24] 2.25 1.67
[0.89] [5.72] [4.24]
0.28 [0.71]
Dia. (4X)
STATUS
19.00
[48.26]
OUTPUTS
OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7
18.31
[46.51]
17.5
[44.45]
ACTUAL
17.68
[44.91]
EXIT ENTER
STATU S
R ES ET
PS 2 PS 1
B R KR BRK R
O PE N O PE N
S O URC E SO URC E
1 2
BRKR BRK R
C LO S E D C LO S E D
SY S D IA G /
OK T IM E
SY NC
CO M 1
M-4172 M-4205
DIGITAL MOTOR
BUS
FASTTRANSFER SYSTEM
TRANSFER SYSTEM
RR
Integrated Synchronizing Systems
BEECC K W IIT
TH
CO
O.. I NC .
E
ELL EC T R
RIIC
Ma d e in U .S .A .
Recommended cutout when relay is not used as

standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted.
17.50
[44.45]
9.97 10.20
[25.32] [25.91]
19.00
[48.26]
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.
Figure 9 Vertical Mounting Dimensions
–27–
18.31
[46.51]
0.32
[0.81]
–28–
[0.71]
M-4172 (HORIZONTAL)
Figure 10 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal)

TOLERANCE: .XX ± .015
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121
marketing@beckwithelectric.com
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2015
© 2015 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800-4172-SP-02 01/19

Printed in U.S.A.
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or serious
injury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-
ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-
dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internal
voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-
nal terminals.
DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE
– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you
must never touch it.
PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application,
test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended
use of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith
Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.
Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicing
equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securely
by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.
Do NOT operate in an explosive environment

Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so would
risk a possible fire or explosion.
Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap-
plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt-
ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power and
discharge circuits before working on the unit.
Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures

The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death.
Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per-
sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone.
Do not modify equipment

Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith
Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow
replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONS
Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar
with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a
component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety
features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the
Parts List of the Instruction Book.
Avoid static charge

This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care
should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.
Use caution when measuring resistances

Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise noted
in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
M-4172 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System
Instruction Book
Chapter 1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 1–1

1.1 Instruction Book Contents.................................................................................. 1–1
Chapter 1: Introduction....................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 2: Operation.......................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 3: ISScom............................................................................................. 1–1
Chapter 4: System Setup and Setpoints............................................................. 1–1
Chapter 5: Installation......................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 6: Testing............................................................................................... 1–2
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms.......................................................... 1–2
Appendix B: Communications............................................................................. 1–2
Appendix C: Self‑Test Error Codes..................................................................... 1–2
Appendix D: Transfer Event Log Sample Printout............................................... 1–2
Appendix E: Sequence of Events Sample Printout............................................. 1–2
Appendix F: Transfer Logic Time Sequence....................................................... 1–2
Appendix G: Layup and Storage......................................................................... 1–2
Appendix H: Index.............................................................................................. 1–2
Appendix I: Declaration of Conformity................................................................ 1–2
1.2 M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System................................................................... 1–2

Table 1-1 M‑4172 Transfer Functions........................................................... 1–2
Table 1-2 M‑4172 Device Functions............................................................ 1–3
Communication Ports......................................................................................... 1–3
M‑3871 ISScom Communications and Oscillograph Analysis Software............. 1–4
M‑3976 Status Module....................................................................................... 1–4
Figure 1-1 M‑3976 Status Module............................................................... 1–4
M‑3933/M‑0423 Serial Communication Cables.................................................. 1–4
M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI) Module.............................................. 1–4
Figure 1-2 M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module...................... 1–4
1.3 Application.......................................................................................................... 1–5
Figure 1-3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration............................................. 1–6
Figure 1-4 Unit-Connected Generator Motor Bus Transfer One-line............ 1–6
Figure 1-5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus Transfer One-line..................... 1–7
Figure 1-6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On a Large Induction Motor.... 1–8
Figure 1-7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On a Small Induction Motor..... 1–8
Figure 1-8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM........................................... 1–9
Hot Parallel, Fast, In-Phase, Residual and Fixed Time Transfer Methods.......... 1–9
Hot Parallel Transfer............................................................................................ 1–9
Fast Simultaneous Transfer.............................................................................. 1–10
Fast Sequential Transfer................................................................................... 1–10
i
M-4172 Instruction Book
Chapter 1 Introduction (Cont.'d)

In-Phase Transfer.............................................................................................. 1–10
Residual Voltage Transfer................................................................................. 1–11
Fixed Time Transfer.......................................................................................... 1–11
References....................................................................................................... 1–11
Figure 1-9 Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS................... 1–11
Chapter 2 Operation................................................................................................................ 2–1

2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators................................................................... 2–1
Alphanumeric Display......................................................................................... 2–1
Screen Blanking................................................................................................. 2–1
Arrow Pushbuttons............................................................................................. 2–1
EXIT Pushbutton................................................................................................ 2–1
ENTER Pushbutton............................................................................................ 2–2
System OK LED................................................................................................. 2–2
Diagnostic/Time Sync LED................................................................................. 2–2
Breaker Status LEDs.......................................................................................... 2–2
Table 2-1 Breaker Status LED Input Configurations ................................... 2–2
Power Supply #1 & #2 LED................................................................................ 2–2
M‑3976 Status Module....................................................................................... 2–2
Figure 2-1 M-4172 Horizontal Front Panel................................................... 2–3
Figure 2-2 Screen Message Menu Flow...................................................... 2–3
Figure 2-3 Main Menu Flow......................................................................... 2–4
STATUS RESET Pushbutton.............................................................................. 2–5
COM Port Security.............................................................................................. 2–5
Disabling COM Ports.......................................................................................... 2–5
2.2 Manual Operation............................................................................................... 2–6

Overview of Manual Transfer Methods and Transfer Modes............................... 2–6
Transfer Modes................................................................................................... 2–6
Sequential Transfer Mode................................................................................... 2–6
Simultaneous Transfer Mode.............................................................................. 2–6
Transfer Methods................................................................................................ 2–6
Fast Transfer....................................................................................................... 2–7
In-Phase Transfer................................................................................................ 2–7
Residual Voltage Transfer................................................................................... 2–7
Hot Parallel Transfer............................................................................................ 2–7
Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom®)..................................................................... 2–8
Figure 2-4 Initiate Manual Transfer Confirmation Screen............................ 2–8
Figure 2-5 Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent Confirmation Screen.. 2–8
Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel)...................................................... 2–8
Remote/Local Control......................................................................................... 2–9
Remote/Local Control (ISScom)......................................................................... 2–9
Figure 2-6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen.......................................... 2–10
Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel)...................................................... 2–10
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Device ON/OFF................................................................................................ 2–10
Device ON/OFF (ISScom)................................................................................ 2–11
Figure 2-7 Device On/Off Dialog Box......................................................... 2–11
Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel)............................................................... 2–11
System Error Codes and Output Counters....................................................... 2–12
Reset/View System Error Codes and Output Counters (ISScom®).................. 2–12
Figure 2-8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen....... 2–12
Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel)...................................................... 2–12
Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel)............................................................ 2–13
Switching The Active Setpoint Profile............................................................... 2–14
Figure 2-9 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen.......................................... 2–14
2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering........................................................................ 2–15
System/Monitor/Primary Metering.................................................................... 2–15
System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status............................................. 2–15
Figure 2-10 Primary Metering Screen....................................................... 2–15
Figure 2-11 Secondary Metering and Status Screen................................ 2–16
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and Sync Scope........................................... 2–17
Monitor Status/Metering................................................................................... 2–17
Transfer Event Log............................................................................................ 2–17
Sequence of Events Recorder.......................................................................... 2–18
Oscillograph...................................................................................................... 2–18
Chapter 3 ISScom®.................................................................................................................. 3–1

3.1 ISScom Functional Description.......................................................................... 3–1
Figure 3-1 ISScom Program Icon................................................................ 3–1
Shortcut Command Buttons............................................................................... 3–1
Initiate and Reset Buttons.................................................................................. 3–1
Remote/Local Button.......................................................................................... 3–1
Figure 3-2 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen............................................ 3–1
Figure 3-3 ISScom Main Menu Structure.................................................... 3–2
Device ON/OFF.................................................................................................. 3–3
Figure 3-4 Device On/Off Dialog Box........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3-5 ISScom Main Screen.................................................................. 3–3
File Menu............................................................................................................ 3–4
File/New Command............................................................................................ 3–4
Figure 3-6 New System Dialog Screen....................................................... 3–4
File/Save and Save As Command...................................................................... 3–4
File/Open Command.......................................................................................... 3–4
File/Print and Print Setup Command.................................................................. 3–4
File/Exit Command............................................................................................. 3–4
Comm Menu....................................................................................................... 3–4
Figure 3-7 ISScom Serial Communication Dialog Screen........................... 3–5
Figure 3-8 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet Communication Dialog Screen.......... 3–5
Figure 3-9 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen....... 3–5
iii
Chapter 3 ISScom® (Cont.'d)

System Menu...................................................................................................... 3–6
System/Setup..................................................................................................... 3–6
System/Setup/Setup System.............................................................................. 3–6
Figure 3-10 Setup System Dialog Screen................................................... 3–6
System/Setup/Setpoints..................................................................................... 3–7
System/Setup/Setpoints/Display All.................................................................... 3–7
System/Setup/Setpoints/Configure..................................................................... 3–7
Figure 3-11 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen................................................ 3–8
Figure 3-12 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen................................................. 3–8
Figure 3-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Screen (Partial)............................... 3–9
Figure 3-14 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial)........................................... 3–10
Set Date/Time Command................................................................................. 3–11
Figure 3-15 Date/Time Dialog Screen....................................................... 3–11
System/Monitor................................................................................................. 3–11
System/Monitor/Primary Metering.................................................................... 3–12
System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status............................................. 3–12
Figure 3-16 Primary Metering Screen....................................................... 3–12
Figure 3-17 Secondary Metering and Status Screen................................ 3–13
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram...................................................................... 3–14
System/Monitor/Sync Scope............................................................................ 3–14
System/Monitor/Single Line Diagram............................................................... 3–14
Figure 3-18 Phasor Diagram..................................................................... 3–15
Figure 3-19 Sync Scope Screen................................................................ 3–15
Figure 3-20 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary
Metering) Screen.......................................................................................... 3–16
System/Transfer Event Log............................................................................... 3–17
System/Transfer Event Log/Download.............................................................. 3–18
Figure 3-21 Transfer Event Log Record Download Screen........................ 3–18
System/Transfer Event Log/View...................................................................... 3–18
Figure 3-22 Transfer Event Log Viewer...................................................... 3–18
Figure 3-23 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen.............................. 3–19
Figure 3-24 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen........... 3–19
Figure 3-25 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen........ 3–20
Figure 3-26 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os Status Screen....................... 3–21
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status.......................................................... 3–21
Figure 3-27 Clear Transfer Event Log Status Command Confirmation...... 3–21
Figure 3-28 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared Confirmation Screen....... 3–21
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History......................................................... 3–21
Figure 3-29 Transfer Event Log Clear History Command Confirmation..... 3–21
Figure 3-30 Transfer Event Log History Cleared Confirmation Screen...... 3–21
System/Sequence of Events Recorder............................................................. 3–22
System/Sequence of EventsRecorder/Setup................................................... 3–22
Figure 3-31 Sequence Of Events Setup.................................................... 3–22
System/Sequence of Events Recorder/Download............................................ 3–23
Figure 3-32 Sequence of Events Recorder Download Screen.................. 3–23
iv
Table of Contents
System/Sequence of Events Recorder/View.................................................... 3–23

Figure 3-33 Sequence of Events Viewer................................................... 3–23
Figure 3-34 Sequence of Events Summary Screen.................................. 3–24
Figure 3-35 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen......... 3–24
Figure 3-36 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os Status Screen.................... 3–25
Figure 3-37 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os Status Screen.................. 3–25
System/Sequence of Events/Clear................................................................... 3–25
Figure 3-38 Clear Sequence of Events Record Command Confirmation.. 3–25
Figure 3-39 Sequence of Events Record Cleared Confirmation Screen... 3–25
Figure 3-40 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start
Signal Status Screen.................................................................................... 3–26
System/Oscillograph......................................................................................... 3–27
Figure 3-41 Setup Oscillograph Recorder................................................. 3–27
System/Oscillograph/Setup.............................................................................. 3–28
System/Oscillograph/Retrieve.......................................................................... 3–28
Figure 3-42 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen.................................... 3–28
System/Oscillograph/Trigger............................................................................. 3–29
Figure 3-43 Oscillograph Manual Trigger Command Confirmation............ 3–29
Figure 3-44 Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent Screen......... 3–29
System/Oscillograph/Clear............................................................................... 3–29
Figure 3-45 Clear Oscillograph Records Command Confirmation............ 3–29
Figure 3-46 Oscillograph Records Cleared Screen................................... 3–29
System/Profile.................................................................................................. 3–30
System/Profile/Active Profile............................................................................. 3–30
Figure 3-47 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen........................................ 3–30
System/Profile/Copy Profile.............................................................................. 3–30
Figure 3-48 Copy Profile Dialog Screen.................................................... 3–30
System/Write File To System............................................................................ 3–30
Figure 3-49 ISScom File Written to MBTS Confirmation........................... 3–30
System/Read Data From System..................................................................... 3–31
Figure 3-50 ISScom Data Reading Successful Confirmation Screen....... 3–31
Tools Menu....................................................................................................... 3–31
Tools/System Access Codes............................................................................ 3–31
Tools/System Access Codes/Comm Access.................................................... 3–31
Figure 3-51 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen.............. 3–31
Tools/System Access Codes/User Access....................................................... 3–31
Figure 3-52 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen.............................. 3–32
Tools/Miscellaneous Setup............................................................................... 3–32
User Logo Line................................................................................................. 3–32
User Control Number........................................................................................ 3–32
System OK LED............................................................................................... 3–32
Figure 3-53 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen................................................. 3–32
Tools/System Outputs Test............................................................................... 3–33
Figure 3-54 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen....................................... 3–33
v
Chapter 3 ISScom® (Cont.'d)

Figure 3-55 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen....................... 3–33
Figure 3-56 Ethernet Settings.................................................................... 3–34
Tools/System Firmware Update........................................................................ 3–34
Tools/Calibrate Unit.......................................................................................... 3–34
Tools/System Error Codes / Counters.............................................................. 3–34
Figure 3-57 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen.......... 3–34
Window Menu/Help Menu................................................................................. 3–35
Figure 3-58 About ISScom Dialog Box...................................................... 3–35
3.2 ISSplot.............................................................................................................. 3–36
Figure 3-59 ISSplot Main Screen............................................................... 3–36
Figure 3-60 ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts..................... 3–37
ISSplot File Menu............................................................................................. 3–38
ISSplot View Menu............................................................................................ 3–38
ISSplot Settings Menu...................................................................................... 3–38
ISSplot Select New Source for Delta Angle...................................................... 3–38
ISSplot Select Waveforms................................................................................ 3–38
Figure 3-61 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen........................................... 3–38
ISSplot Change Colors..................................................................................... 3–38
Figure 3-62 Change Colors Dialog Screen................................................ 3–38
Figure 3-63 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data................................. 3–39
ISSplot Change Scale...................................................................................... 3–40
ISSplot Default.................................................................................................. 3–40
ISSplot Auto All................................................................................................. 3–40
Figure 3-64 Change Scale Dialog Screen................................................. 3–40
ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu ................................................................... 3–40
Table 3-1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys................................................................ 3–40
Figure 3-65 ISSplot Toolbar....................................................................... 3–41
Figure 3-66 ISSplot Screen with Callouts.................................................. 3–41
Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints................................................................................. 4–1

4.1 Unit Setup........................................................................................................... 4–1
General Unit Setup............................................................................................. 4–1
Comm Access Code........................................................................................... 4–1
ISScom Comm Access Code Setup................................................................... 4–2
Figure 4-1 Communication Access Code Reset Dialog Screen.................. 4–2
Figure 4-2 Communication Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen.......... 4–2
HMI Comm Access Code Setup......................................................................... 4–2
User Access Codes............................................................................................ 4–3
ISScom User Access Codes Setup.................................................................... 4–3
Figure 4-3 User Access Codes Reset Dialog Screen.................................. 4–3
Figure 4-4 New User Access Code Sent Confirmation Screen................... 4–3
HMI User Access Codes Setup.......................................................................... 4–4
User Logo Line................................................................................................... 4–5
vi
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 System Setup and Setpoints (Cont.'d)

User Control Number.......................................................................................... 4–5
System OK LED................................................................................................. 4–5
ISScom User Logo Line, User control Number and System OK LED Setup...... 4–5
Figure 4-5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen..................................................... 4–5
HMI User Logo Line Setup................................................................................. 4–5
HMI User Control Number Setup........................................................................ 4–6
HMI System OK LED Setup............................................................................... 4–7
System Clock...................................................................................................... 4–8
ISScom Set Date/Time....................................................................................... 4–8
Figure 4-6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen..................................................... 4–8
HMI SET DATE and TIME................................................................................... 4–9
Communication Setup...................................................................................... 4–11
Serial Ports (RS-232)....................................................................................... 4–11
Serial Port (RS-485)......................................................................................... 4–11
Direct Connection............................................................................................. 4–11
Figure 4-7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen......................... 4–11
Device Address................................................................................................. 4–12
Figure 4-8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using
Communications-Line Splitter...................................................................... 4–12
ISScom COM Port Definitions and System’s Communication Address............ 4–13
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time........................................................................ 4–13
Figure 4-9 COM Port Settings Warning Screen......................................... 4–13
Figure 4-10 COM Port Setting Verification Screen.................................... 4–13
HMI COM Port Enable/Disable, Definitions and Device Address..................... 4–14
Ethernet Communication Settings.................................................................... 4–15
DHCP Protocol................................................................................................. 4–15
Ethernet Protocols ........................................................................................... 4–15
IEC 61850........................................................................................................ 4–15
ISScom Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP ......................................................... 4–15
Figure 4-11 Ethernet Setup Screen .......................................................... 4–15
ISScom Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP .................................................... 4–16
HMI Ethernet Port Setup ................................................................................. 4–16
HMI Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board................................................... 4–17
Installing the Modems....................................................................................... 4–18
Connecting the PC Modem.............................................................................. 4–18
Initializing the PC Modem................................................................................. 4–18
Figure 4-12 Communications Dialog Screen............................................. 4–18
Figure 4-13 Expanded Communication Dialog Screen.............................. 4–19
Figure 4-14 Terminal Window.................................................................... 4–19
Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTS...................................................... 4–20
Oscillograph Setup........................................................................................... 4–21
Setup Oscillograph Recorder........................................................................... 4–21
Figure 4-15 Setup Oscillograph Recorder................................................. 4–21
Table 4-2 Recorder Partitions.................................................................... 4–22
Figure 4-16 Oscillograph Setup Sent Confirmation Screen....................... 4–22
vii

Sequence of Events Recorder Setup............................................................... 4–23
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder............................................................... 4–23
Figure 4-17 Sequence of Events Send Changes to Unit Screen............... 4–23
Figure 4-18 Sequence Of Events Setup ................................................... 4–23
4.2 System Setup................................................................................................... 4–24
MBTS Setup System........................................................................................ 4–24
Figure 4-19 Setup System Dialog Screen................................................. 4–24
Figure 4-20 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen.............................. 4–25
Figure 4-21 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen................................. 4–25
Figure 4-22 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection Screen............................. 4–26
Figure 4-23 Latched Outputs Selection Screen......................................... 4–26
Figure 4-24 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen........................................... 4–27
Figure 4-25 Input Active States Selection Screen..................................... 4–28
4.3 System Diagrams............................................................................................. 4–29
Figure 4-26 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram.4–29
Figure 4-27 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary,
One Phase Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram......................... 4–30
Figure 4-28 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line
Connection Diagram..................................................................................... 4–31
Figure 4-29 Single Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line
Figure 4-30 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line
Figure 4-31 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Ground,
Three-Phase Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram............ 4–34
Figure 4-32 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Phase,
Three-Phase Bus Side Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram.......... 4–35
4.4 System Setpoints.............................................................................................. 4–36
Transfer Settings............................................................................................... 4–37
Common Settings (CS)..................................................................................... 4–37
Figure 4-33 System Setpoints Dialog Screen............................................ 4–37
Common Settings/Common Function Settings Tab.......................................... 4–38
Figure 4-34 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen............................ 4–38
Common Settings/Transfer Mode..................................................................... 4–39
Common Settings/Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New Source............................. 4–39
Common Settings/Breaker Closing Time.......................................................... 4–39
Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation.............................. 4–39
Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time....................................... 4–40
Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time Delay........................................ 4–40
Common Settings/Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay.................................... 4–40
Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer Time............................................... 4–40
Common Settings/Trip Command and Close Command Pulse Length............ 4–40
Common Function Settings Inputs Tab............................................................. 4–41
Common Settings/Breaker Status Inputs......................................................... 4–41
viii
Table of Contents

Figure 4-35 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen.................. 4–41
Common Settings/Service Position Inputs........................................................ 4–42
Common Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration................................. 4–42
Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3)................................................... 4–42
Figure 4-36 Transfer Block #1 Input Dialog Screen................................... 4–42
Common Settings/External Status Reset......................................................... 4–42
Figure 4-37 External Status Input Selection Dialog Screen...................... 4–42
Common Settings Outputs Tab......................................................................... 4–43
Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs...................................... 4–43
Figure 4-38 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen.... 4–43
Figure 4-39 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen............... 4–43
Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Outputs...4–44
Figure 4-40 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Output Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–44
Common Settings/Transfer Ready Outputs...................................................... 4–44
Figure 4-41 Transfer Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen.................... 4–44
Common Settings/Transfer Completed Outputs............................................... 4–45
Figure 4-42 Transfer Completed Output Selection Dialog Screen............. 4–45
Common Settings/Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs................................. 4–45
Figure 4-43 Fast Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Screen.......... 4–45
Common Settings/In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs......................... 4–46
Figure 4-44 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Output Selection Screen.. 4–46
Common Settings/Load Shedding Outputs...................................................... 4–47
Figure 4-45 Incomplete Transfer Outputs Selection Dialog Screen........... 4–47
Figure 4-46 Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen.................... 4–47
Automatic Transfer Settings (ATS).................................................................... 4–48
Automatic Transfer Settings
Setup Tab.......................................................................................................... 4–48
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto Transfer Mode............................. 4–48
HMI Auto Transfer Mode Enable/Disable.......................................................... 4–48
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Both S1 & S2 Breakers Open............. 4–49
Figure 4-47 Automatic Transfer Settings Dialog Screen............................ 4–50
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup tab/External Control Inputs Configuration.. 4–51
Automatic Transfer/Auto Transfer Block............................................................ 4–51
Figure 4-48 Automatic Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen......... 4–51
Automatic Transfer/86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2).................................................. 4–51
Automatic Transfer/86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1).................................................. 4–51
Automatic Transfer/27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)..................................................... 4–52
Automatic Transfer/27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) .................................................... 4–52
Automatic Transfer Initiation.............................................................................. 4–52
Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab.................................................. 4–53
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit ............................................ 4–53
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit...................................................... 4–53
Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit................................................ 4–53
ix

Figure 4-49 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Screen........... 4–53
Automatic Fast Transfer/Time Window.............................................................. 4–54
Automatic Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay................................... 4–54
Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................................... 4–54
Automatic Fast Transfer Tab Save/Cancel........................................................ 4–54
Figure 4-50 Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen.......... 4–54
Automatic Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab.......................................... 4–55
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.............................................. 4–55
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit......................................... 4–55
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Time Window...................................................... 4–55
Figure 4-51 Automatic Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Screen.... 4–55
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection.................................... 4–56
Automatic In-Phase Transfer Save/Cancel....................................................... 4–56
Figure 4-52 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer
Tab Dialog Screen........................................................................................ 4–56
Automatic Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab.............................. 4–57
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit............................ 4–57
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay.................... 4–57
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection....................... 4–57
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel........................................... 4–57
Automatic Transfer Settings/Fixed Time Transfer Tab....................................... 4–58
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Time Delay....................................................... 4–58
Figure 4-53 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–58
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay............................. 4–59
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection................................ 4–59
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Save/Cancel.................................................... 4–59
Manual Transfer Settings (MTS)....................................................................... 4–60
HMI Manual Transfer Enable/Disable (MBTS Front Panel)............................... 4–60
Manual Transfer Settings Setup Tab................................................................. 4–61
Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer Mode.............................................. 4–61
Manual Transfer................................................................................................ 4–61
Manual Transfer Settings/External Control Inputs Configuration...................... 4–61
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Block............................................................ 4–61
Figure 4-54 Manual Transfer Block Input Settings Dialog Screen.............. 4–61
Figure 4-55 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen................................ 4–61
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Initiate.......................................................... 4–62
Figure 4-56 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Settings Dialog Screen............ 4–62
Manual Transfer Save/Cancel........................................................................... 4–62
Manual Transfer Settings/Fast Transfer Tab...................................................... 4–62
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit................................................. 4–62
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.......................................................... 4–62
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit..................................................... 4–62
Figure 4-57 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen.... 4–63
x
Table of Contents

Figure 4-58 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Screen......... 4–63
Manual Fast Transfer/Time Window.................................................................. 4–64
Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Delay....................................... 4–64
Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection............................................... 4–64
Manual Fast Transfer Save/Cancel................................................................... 4–64
Manual Transfer Settings/In-Phase Transfer Tab............................................... 4–64
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.................................................. 4–64
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit............................................. 4–64
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Time Window.......................................................... 4–64
Figure 4-59 Manual Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Screen........ 4–65
Figure 4-60 In-Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen... 4–65
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................................ 4–66
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Save/Cancel............................................................ 4–66
Manual Transfer Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer Tab.................................. 4–66
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual Voltage Limit................................ 4–66
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load Shedding Time Delay........................ 4–66
Figure 4-61 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer
Tab Dialog Screen........................................................................................ 4–67
Figure 4-62 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Screen.4–67
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection........................... 4–68
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel............................................... 4–68
Manual Transfer Settings/Hot Parallel Transfer Tab........................................... 4–68
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit..................................... 4–68
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit.............................................. 4–68
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit......................................... 4–68
Figure 4-63 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Screen.... 4–69
Figure 4-64 Hot Parallel Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Screen.......... 4–69
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time Window...................................................... 4–70
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping Command Time Delay........................... 4–70
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs Selection.................................... 4–70
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/Cancel........................................................ 4–70
Auto Trip (AT).................................................................................................... 4–71
Auto Trip/Enable/Disable................................................................................... 4–71
Auto Trip/Breaker Trip Option............................................................................ 4–71
Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay.......................................................... 4–71
Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection................................................................... 4–71
Auto Trip Save/Cancel...................................................................................... 4–71
Figure 4-65 Automatic Trip Settings Dialog Screen ................................. 4–72
Figure 4-66 Main-Tie-Main Application Example....................................... 4–72
Function Settings.............................................................................................. 4–73
27B Bus Phase Undervoltage.......................................................................... 4–73
27#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2).............................. 4–73
27#2 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 to S1).............................. 4–73
27#3 and 27#4 Bus Phase Undervoltage......................................................... 4–73
xi

Figure 4-67 Function Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer
Initiate (S1 to S2) Dialog Screen.................................................................. 4–74
Figure 4-68 27B#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate
Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen....................................................... 4–74
50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure................................................................... 4–75
Figure 4-69 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen................. 4–75
Figure 4-70 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram............................................... 4–76
Figure 4-71 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure I/O Selection Screen....... 4–76
Figure 4-72 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Initiate
Inputs/Initiate Outputs Selection Dialog Screen........................................... 4–76
50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure................................................................... 4–77
S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)............................................ 4–77
S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)............................................ 4–77
Figure 4-73 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen................. 4–77
Figure 4-74 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status)
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–78
I/O Selection Dialog Screen......................................................................... 4–78
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–78
60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss................................................................................... 4–79
Figure 4-77 60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss Function Inputs/Outputs
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–79
Figure 4-78 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog Screen................................. 4–79
81 Bus Voltage Frequency................................................................................ 4–80
Figure 4-79 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Inputs/Outputs
Selection Dialog Screen............................................................................... 4–80
Figure 4-80 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Dialog Screen...... 4–80
81R (Rate Of Change Of Frequency) (Bus Voltage)......................................... 4–81
Figure 4-81 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Function Dialog Screen..... 4–82
Figure 4-82 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Inputs/Outputs Selection
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 4–82
ISSL (ISSLogic®).............................................................................................. 4–83
ISSLogic Settings and Logic Functions............................................................ 4–83
Figure 4-83 ISSLogic Function Dialog Screen........................................... 4–84
ISSLogic Function Setup.................................................................................. 4–85
Figure 4-84 Selection Screen for Initiating Outputs................................... 4–85
Figure 4-85 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout.................... 4–85
Figure 4-86 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup...................... 4–85
Figure 4-87 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status........................ 4–86
Figure 4-88 Selection Screen for Initiating Inputs...................................... 4–87
Figure 4-89 Selection Screen for Blocking Inputs...................................... 4–87
Change Active Profile (ISSLogic)..................................................................... 4–88
Figure 4-90 Selection Screen for Block System Status............................. 4–88
DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature.......................................................... 4–89
xii
Table of Contents

Dropout Delay Timer......................................................................................... 4–89
Reset Delay Timer............................................................................................ 4–89
Figure 4-91 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram...................................... 4–89
Figure 4-92 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram.......................................... 4–89
Figure 4-93 ISSLogic Function Diagram.................................................... 4–90
Chapter 5 Installation.............................................................................................................. 5–1

5.1 General Information............................................................................................ 5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions....................................................................... 5–1
Figure 5-1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions...................... 5–2
Figure 5-2 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)......... 5–3
Figure 5-3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions........................... 5–4
5.3 External Connections......................................................................................... 5–5
Power Supply...................................................................................................... 5–5
Figure 5-4 Power Supply Connection.......................................................... 5–5
Grounding Requirements................................................................................... 5–5
Unit Isolation....................................................................................................... 5–5
Insulation Coordination....................................................................................... 5–5
Torque Requirements......................................................................................... 5–5
MBTS Outputs.................................................................................................... 5–5
Replacement Fuses............................................................................................ 5–5
Figure 5-5 External Connections (Horizontal Mount).................................. 5–6
Figure 5-6 Vertical Unit External Connections............................................. 5–7
Figure 5-7 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram..... 5–8
Figure 5-8 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary,
One Phase Grounded VT Three-Line Connection Diagram........................... 5–9
Figure 5-9 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line
Figure 5-10 Single-Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line
Figure 5-11 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line
Figure 5-12 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase
Bus Side, Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram.................................. 5–13
Figure 5-13 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase
Bus Side, Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram............................... 5–14
5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers................................................................ 5–15
Accessing Switches and Jumpers.................................................................... 5–15
Table 5-1 Jumpers..................................................................................... 5–15
Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1........................................................................ 5–16
Figure 5-14 M-4172 Circuit Board (B-0970)............................................. 5–17
5.5 ISScom Communications and Analysis Software Installation........................... 5–18
ISScom Installation and Setup......................................................................... 5–18
xiii
Chapter 5 Installation (Cont.'d)

Hardware Requirements................................................................................... 5–18
Installing ISScom.............................................................................................. 5–18
Figure 5-15 ISScom Program Icon............................................................ 5–18
5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications........................................................... 5–18
5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout.......................................................................... 5–20
5.8 Initial Setup Procedure..................................................................................... 5–21
Setup Procedure............................................................................................... 5–21
Chapter 6 Testing..................................................................................................................... 6–1

Testing Overview................................................................................................ 6–1
6.1 Power On Self Test ............................................................................................ 6–1

Equipment Required .......................................................................................... 6–1
Figure 6-1 Power Supply Connection ......................................................... 6–1
Torque Requirements......................................................................................... 6–2
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures ............................................................................... 6–3

Overview ............................................................................................................ 6–3
Equipment Required .......................................................................................... 6–3
Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode....................................................................... 6–3
Output Relay Test
(Output Relays 1–8 and Self Test)...................................................................... 6–4
Table 6-1 Output Contacts........................................................................... 6–4
Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1– 6............................................................... 6–5
Table 6-2 Input Contacts.............................................................................. 6–5
Front Panel Status LED Test............................................................................... 6–6
Figure 6-2 Status LED Panel....................................................................... 6–6
Module LED Test................................................................................................ 6–6
Figure 6-3 M-3976 Status Module............................................................... 6–7
Button Test.......................................................................................................... 6–7
Figure 6-4 M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface Module................................ 6–7
Display Test......................................................................................................... 6–8
COM1/COM2 Loopback Test.............................................................................. 6–8
Figure 6-5 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug..................................................... 6–8
COM3 Test (2‑Wire)............................................................................................ 6–9
Figure 6-6 RS‑485 2‑Wire Testing............................................................. 6–10
Clock ON/OFF.................................................................................................. 6–10
SYS OK LED Flash/Illuminated........................................................................ 6–11
6.3 Metering Tests.................................................................................................. 6–12

Equipment Required ........................................................................................ 6–12
Metering Test Setup.......................................................................................... 6–12
Voltage/Current Verification.............................................................................. 6–12
Torque Requirements....................................................................................... 6–13
6.4 Auto Calibration................................................................................................ 6–13

Figure 6-7 Metering Voltage Input Configuration....................................... 6–14
Figure 6-8 Metering Current Input Configuration....................................... 6–14
xiv
Table of Contents
Appendix A Configuration Record Forms............................................................................ A–1

Communication Settings Record Form..........................................................A–2
Setup System Settings Record Form (1 of 2)................................................A–3
System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (1 of 8)............................A–5
Function 27B Setpoints (1 of 2).................................................................A–13
Function 50BF Setpoints..............................................................................A–15
Function 60FL Setpoints..............................................................................A–16
Function 81 Setpoints..................................................................................A–17
Function 81R Setpoints................................................................................A–18
Function ISSLogic Setpoints (1 of 4).........................................................A–19
Sequence of Events Setup...........................................................................A–23
Oscillograph Setup.......................................................................................A–24
Table A-1 M-4271 MBTS Configuration Table (1 of 4).............................A–25
Appendix B Communications................................................................................................ B–1

Serial Ports.........................................................................................................B–1
Optional Ethernet Port........................................................................................B–1
Table B-1 Communication Port Signals ......................................................B–2
Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423.......................................................B–2
Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network......................................................B–3
Figure B-3 RS-485 Network........................................................................B–4
Figure B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal......................B–4
Appendix C Self-Test Error Codes........................................................................................ C–1

Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (1 of 2)..................................................... C–1
Table C‑1 Self-Test Error Codes (2 of 2)..................................................... C–2
Table C‑2 ISScom® Error Messages........................................................... C–3
Appendix D Transfer Event Log Samples............................................................................. D–1

Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)................. D–2
Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 1 of 3)....................... D–4
Appendix E Sequence of Events Sample Printout...............................................................E–1

Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout.....................E–2
Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 1 of 5)......E–3
Appendix F Transfer Logic Time Sequence...........................................................................F–1

Figure F-1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.F–2
Figure F-2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous
Transfer Mode................................................................................................F–3
xv
Appendix G Layup and Storage............................................................................................ G–1

Storage Requirements (Environment)............................................................... G–1
Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance During Storage)......................... G–1
Layup Configuration........................................................................................... G–1
Maintenance Requirements............................................................................... G–2
Appendix H Index.................................................................................................................... H–1
Appendix I Declaration of Conformity.................................................................................... I–1
©2015 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800‑4172‑IB‑02 01/19

Printed in U.S.A. (9.21.01)
xvi
Introduction – 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents........................................................ 1–1
1.2 M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS)............................ 1–2
1.3 Application............................................................................... 1–5
1.1 Instruction Book Contents
This instruction book includes six Chapters and Chapter 4: System Setup and Setpoints
nine Appendices. Chapter Four is designed for the person(s)
responsible for the direct setting and configuration
Chapter 1: Introduction of the system. It describes the procedures for
Chapter One summarizes the devices’ capabilities, entering all required data into the MBTS. Included
introduces the instruction book contents and in this chapter are functional and connection
describes the application of an MBTS. diagrams for a typical application for the system;
and describes the configuration process for the
unit (choosing active functions), output contact
Chapter 2: Operation assignment and input blocking designation. It also
Chapter Two provides the necessary instructions illustrates the definition of system quantities and
regarding manual operation of the MBTS. equipment characteristics required by the MBTS,
Manual operation of the MBTS is accomplished and describes the individual function settings.
by utilizing either the unit’s front panel controls
and indicators, which include the M‑3931 Human Chapter 5: Installation
Machine Interface (HMI) and M‑3976 Status Module
or through the M-3871 ISScom® Communications The person or group responsible for the installation of
and Oscillographic Analysis Software. the MTBS will find herein all mechanical information
required for physical installation, equipment ratings,
and all external connections in this chapter. For
Chapter 3: ISScom reference, the Three‑Line Connection Diagram
Chapter 3 provides a description of each element is repeated from Chapter 4, System Setup and
of the M‑3871 ISScom Communications and Setpoints. Further, a commissioning checkout
Oscillographic Analysis Software. The ISScom menu procedure is outlined to check the external CT and
structure and commands are described in detail for VT connections. Additional tests which may be
each feature and function. desirable at the time of installation are described in
Chapter 6, Testing.
1–1
M‑4172 Instruction Book
Chapter 6: Testing
1.2 M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer
This chapter provides step-by-step test procedures
System
for each function, as well as diagnostic mode and
auto-calibration procedures.
The M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) is
a microprocessor-based unit that uses digital signal
Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms processing technology to provide automatic and
This Appendix supplies a set of forms to record manual transfer modes.
and document the settings required for the proper
operation of the MBTS. The available internal functions of the system are
listed in Table 1‑1. The nomenclature follows the
standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2, Standard
Appendix B: Communications Electric Power Systems Device Function Numbers
This Appendix describes communication port where applicable. The available MBTS Transfer
signals and various topologies and equipment Functions are listed in Table 1-2.
required for remote communication.
Mode Transfer Function
Appendix C: Self‑Test Error Codes AUTO MANUAL
This Appendix lists all the error codes and their X X Fast Transfer
definitions.
X X In-Phase Transfer
Appendix D: Transfer Event Log Sample X X Residual Voltage Transfer
Printout X Fixed Time Transfer
This Appendix provides a sample Transfer Event X Hot Parallel
Log printout.
Table 1-1 M‑4172 Transfer Functions
Appendix E: Sequence of Events Sample
Printout The control/status inputs can be programmed to
This Appendix provides a sample Sequence of block and/or to trigger the oscillograph recorder. Any
Events printout. of the functions or the control/status inputs can be
individually programmed to activate any one or more
Appendix F: Transfer Logic Time Sequence of the programmable outputs, each with a contact.
This Appendix includes the Transfer Logic Time QQ NOTE: See Section 1.3, Application for Transfer
Sequence for each transfer. Function descriptions.
Appendix G: Layup and Storage The M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI)
This Appendix includes the recommended storage Module allows the user to access the following
parameters, periodic surveillance activities and features and functions from the M‑4172 front
layup configuration for the M‑4172 Motor Bus panel using a menu-driven, 2 line by 24 character
Transfer System. alphanumeric display:
Settings
Appendix H: Index
• Enable and Disable Manual Transfer
This Appendix includes the Index for the M-4172
Instruction Book. • Enable and Disable Auto Transfer
• Set MBTS to either Local or Remote
Appendix I: Declaration of Conformity • Enter Comm settings
This Appendix includes the Declaration of • Set Access Codes
Conformity in accordance to ISO/IEC 17050-1:2004. • Set User Control Number
• Set display User Lines 1 and 2
• Set Date/Time
1–2
Introduction – 1
Functions Communication Ports

• Initiate a Manual Transfer There are three physical communication ports
• Clear Alarm Counter provided on the M‑4172. If the optional RJ45
Ethernet port is purchased, then the MBTS shares
• Enter Diagnostic Mode
COM2.
• Clear Error Codes
• COM1, located on the system front
Status panel, is a standard 9-pin RS‑232 DTE-
• Metering of various quantities, including configured port. COM1 is used to locally
voltage, current, frequency and phase- set and interrogate the MBTS using a
angle portable computer.
• I/O Status • COM2, located on the rear of the MBTS, is
a standard 9-pin RS‑232 DTE-configured
• Alarm Counter
port. When the optional RJ45 Ethernet
• MBTS Unit Last Power Up Date and Time Port is enabled, the COM2 port is
• MBTS Unit Firmware Version and Serial disabled for communications. However,
Number the Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used
• Error Codes through the COM2 Port when Ethernet is
• Checksums enabled. When COM2 Port is enabled the
Ethernet Port is not available.
The RJ45 Ethernet port uses a 10Base-T
Function Description type connection that accepts an RJ45
27B Bus Undervoltage connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable.
50BF Breaker Failure The Ethernet port supports MODBUS over
TCP/IP. The IP address can be obtained
Source Breaker Failure Using automatically when using the DHCP
SBF
Breaker Status protocol if enabled, or a static IP address
60FL VT Fuse-Loss Detection can be manually entered, using the HMI.
81 Bus Frequency • COM3, located on the rear terminal
81R Rate of Change of Frequency block of the MBTS, is a 2-wire RS‑485
communications port.
ISSL ISSlogic
Table 1-2 M‑4172 Device Functions QQ NOTE: COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be
disabled for security purposes from the
The MBTS stores time-tagged transfer information Communications HMI menu. A Level 2
for the four most recent transfers. The M‑3976 Status Access Code is required.
Module LEDs are used to provide a detailed visual
indication of function operation for the most recent The system may be remotely set and interrogated
event. utilizing either a hard-wired RS‑232 serial
connection or modem (COM2 when activated as
The MBTS retains up to 248 cycles of oscillograph RS‑232, or COM3), or when purchased, the ethernet
waveform data. This data can be downloaded connection (RJ45 activated).
and analyzed using the M‑3871 ISScom ®
Communications and Oscillograph Analysis
Software.
The unit is powered from one wide input range
switch mode power supply. There is an option for a
redundant power supply.
The MBTS includes self-test, auto calibration, and
diagnostic capabilities, in addition to IRIG-B time-
sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events.
1–3
M‑3871 ISScom Communications and M‑3933/M‑0423 Serial Communication Cables

Oscillograph Analysis Software The M‑3933 cable is a 10-foot RS‑232 cable for
ISScom is shipped with every MBTS. This software use between the MBTS rear panel (COM2) port
runs on a PC-compatible computer operating under and a modem. This cable includes a DB25 (25-pin)
Microsoft Windows® 98 or later. When properly connector (modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the MBTS
connected using either a direct serial connection, end.
modem or ethernet network connection, ISScom
can provide the following functions: The M‑0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS‑232
cable for direct connection between a PC and the
• Setpoint interrogation and modification
MBTS front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2
• Bus, Source 1 and Source 2 status real- port. This cable includes a DB9 (9-pin) connector
time monitoring at each end.
• Recorded oscillograph data downloading
• Display Oscillograph Data M‑3931 Human‑Machine Interface (HMI)
Module
• Initiate Transfer
The HMI module provides the means to interrogate
the MBTS and to input a limited number of settings,
See Chapter 3, ISScom for a detailed description access data, etc. directly from the front of the MBTS.
of all ISScom features. Its operation is described in detail in Section 2.1,
Front Panel Controls and Indications.
M‑3976 Status Module
The status module (Figure 1-1), includes 24
individually labelled STATUS LEDs to indicate
operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
individually labelled OUTPUT LEDs will be lit as long M-4172
as the corresponding output contact is picked up.

STATUS


27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK
FAST TRANS OP DELTA VOLTAGE OK
IN-PHASE TRANS OP DELTA FREQUENCY OK
RES V/FIXED– TIME TRANS OP FAST/PARAL TRANS READY 
PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK
50BF–1/SOURCE 1 BRKR FAIL BUS VT LOSS BLOCK EXIT ENTER
50BF–2/SOURCE 2 BRKR FAIL INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
Figure 1-2 M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface
(HMI) Module
OUTPUTS
Figure 1-1 M‑3976 Status Module
1–4
Introduction – 1
1.3 Application
Typically most power plant and industrial plants have

motors that must remain operational in the event of
a loss of the power source. There are many reasons
to initiate a transfer:
• For fault clearing on the present source
• Interruption of present source
• Planned deliberate transfer to an on-site
source during periods of storms or for rate
savings
• Maintenance
• Normal plant startup/shutdown
• Auxiliary system transfer.
To address this requirement, facilities employ two

power sources to supply these auxiliary systems. In
a power plant these two power sources are normally
the station service transformer and the auxiliary
startup transformer which is usually also connected
to the utility. In a processing plant there are two
independent power sources which power separate
portions of the plant.
The purpose of a Motor Bus Transfer System
(MBTS) is to quickly and safely transfer the bus
motor load from one source to another source in
order to maintain power plant or process plant
continuity. Motor bus transfer systems are used to
perform the transfer of large motors or aggregates
of smaller and larger motors. A typical configuration
is shown in Figure 1-3.
The M-4172 MBTS monitors the Source 1 voltage,
the Motor Bus voltage and the Source 2 voltage. The
M-4172 also controls the Source 1 and Source 2
breakers. In case of abnormal condition, a protective
relay operates and trips an 86 lockout relay which
will trip the Source 1 breaker and also initiate an
automatic transfer to MBTS. After recognizing an
initiate transfer signal, the M-4172 MBTS will issue a
trip command to the Source 1 breaker and then it will
issue a close command to the Source 2 breaker. This
will transfer the Motor Bus load from the troubled
Source 1 to Source 2, keeping the motors on the
bus running and the process continuing to operate.
Figure 1-4 illustrates a conventional unit-connected
generator one-line diagram. This application uses
the unit auxiliary transformer as one source and the
startup transformer as the second source.
1–5
MAIN SOURCE STARTUP SOURCE

VT-M VT-SU
VS1 VS2
M-4172
CT-M IS1 VBus IS2 CT-SU
52 N.O. 52
M N.C. SU
VT-B
STATION BUS SYSTEM
M M
QQ NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M-4172 50BF function, they are not required for transfer
operation.
Figure 1-3 Typical Two Breaker Configuration
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
GENERATOR STEP-UP
TRANSFORMER

52
52
S2
STARTUP SOURCE
S1
GENERATOR BREAKER
AUXILIARY MOTOR BUS
M M M
Figure 1-4 Unit-Connected Generator Motor Bus Transfer One-line
1–6
Introduction – 1
Figure 1-5 illustrates a typical industrial plant one- A three phase fault in the Unit Auxiliary Generator
line diagram. This application has two independent Step-up transformer or on the high voltage bus near
sources, with each half of the processing plant the plant may completely deenergize the motor fields
operated by each source. There is normally an and the resultant voltage will be minimal. However,
open tie breaker between the two motor buses. for all other cases a significant voltage will be
In this application two M-4172 MBTS are used. induced on the motor bus. The induced voltage will
Each system controls a source breaker and the have a dynamic amplitude and phase charateristic
tie breaker. Whichever source fails has its breaker that will depend on the inertia of the motor loads
tripped and the tie breaker is closed, this transfers and the field energy stored in the motors.
the motor bus load to the remaining source which
now supplies power to the entire plant. The charactersistics for synchronous and induction
motors are shown in Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7
In general, the voltage characteristic of a motor bus respectively. Figure 1-6 represents a 6000 hp I.D. fan
during a transfer is governed by the motor loads motor operating at 25% load proior to transfer. This
operating at the time of transfer. The majority of is an example of a characteristic for a large motor
auxiliary system motors are induction motors with driving a high inertia load. The voltage magnitude
few synchronous motors used in isolated cases. requires 42 cycles to drop 50% of it’s initial value and
The types of motors in use will, to a great degree, the angle takes more than 60 cycles to complete a
determine the voltage characteristics of the auxiliary 360 degree rotation. The 960 hp boiler circulating
system buses. When the bus is disconnected from pump motor used for Figure 1-7 data shows a
the source, the motors will maintain a voltage due dramatic variation in characteristics. The voltage
to the energy stored in the motor fields. The intital magnitude drops to 50% within 10 cycles and the
magnitude of the voltage depends on the integrity phase completes a 360 degree rotation in less than
of the power source prior to being disconnected. eight cycles.
VS1 VS1
VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4172 M-4172 IS1
IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2
52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2
VT-B1 VT-B2
BUS-TIE
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2
M M M M
QQ NOTE: Current transformers are used for the M-4172 50BF function, they are not required for transfer
operation.
Figure 1-5 Industrial Processing Plant Bus Transfer One-line
1–7
Referring to Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7, a few These parameters are key to analyzing the motor
generalizations can be made regarding the inertia of bus transfer issue and developing schemes
motor loads, motor size, and the mix of synchronous to accomplish transfers that promote process
and induction motors. continuity while causing no damage to the motors
or the loads.
• Inertia – The higher the inertia of the
aggregate motor loads on the motor bus, An important value to decide the viability of MBT
the more slowly the motor bus frequency is the resultant volts per hertz (V/Hz) across the
will decay during the disconnected breaker. The resultant V/Hz is derived from the V/
coastdown period. That has a direct impact Hz vectors of the motor bus and the new source
on how fast the phase angle changes. Low at the instant just prior to connection and must not
inertia loads will cause the phase angle to exceed 1.33 V/Hz [1]. Pursuant to phase angle and
change quickly, as the frequency of the voltage, and their effect on resultant V/Hz, some
motor bus decays quickly, and the slip generalizations can be made:
frequency between the motor bus and the
new source quickly increases. • Phase Angle – As the phase angle
increases between the two sources,
• Motor Size – The larger the motor size, assuming the two source voltages are the
the longer the time the voltage will take to same, the V/Hz will increase.
decay on an induction motor.
• Voltage – As the voltage difference
• Mix of Synchronous and Induction between the two sources increases,
Motors – Voltage will tend to decay assuming the phase angle between the
much more rapidly on a motor bus with all sources remains the same, the V/Hz will
induction motors. On a motor bus with a increase.
mix of synchronous and induction motors,
the synchronous motors will attempt to
hold up the voltage during the transfer
interval.
• Loading – The higher the load on the
motors, the faster the motor bus frequency
will decay.
6000 HP I.D. Fan 960 HP Boiler Circulating Pump

(Operating at 25% Load Prior to Transfer) (Operating at Full Load)
100 0 100 0
Voltage Magnitude (%)
Voltage Magnitude (%)
Phase Phase (not shown for T>20)

80 -72 80 -72
Phase (Degrees)
Phase (Degrees)
60 -144 60 -144
Voltage
40 Magnitude -216 40 -216
Voltage
20 -288 20 -288
0 -360 0 -360
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Time (Cycles) Time (Cycles)
Figure 1-6 Coastdown of High Inertia Load On Figure 1-7 Coastdown of Low Inertia Load On
a Large Induction Motor a Small Induction Motor
1–8
Introduction – 1
The resultant V/Hz issue is exacerbated when the Hot Parallel, Fast, In-Phase, Residual and
phase angle difference increases and the voltage Fixed Time Transfer Methods
difference increases as shown in Figure 1-8. The MBTs can be categorized as closed or open
following relationship in equation 1 defines this transition [2]. The closed transition involves brief
condition: paralleling of the sources. The closed transition
transfer is commonly referred to as a hot parallel
ER =
2 2
E S + E M − 2 ES EM cos θ transfer. Open transition transfers do not parallel
[1] the sources, and include fast, in-phase, residual and
fixed time. The fast transfer can be subcategorized
where as simultaneous or sequential. All other transfers
ES System equivalent V/Hz are sequential.
EM Motor residual V/Hz (on system base) Hot Parallel Transfer

In a hot parallel transfer, the new source is connected
ER Resultant vectorial V/Hz to the motor bus before the old source is tripped. The
intent is to transfer sources without interruption. The
phase angle, delta voltage and delta frequency from
θ Phase angle between the motor bus
the motor bus and the new source are evaluated
and new source at the instant prior to
prior to the transfer to assure that the motor bus and
connection
the new source are in synchronism. This method has
gained wide acceptance for routine source transfers
because transients on the motor bus are eliminated.
There may be instances where the two sources
may not be derived from the same primary source
E M = 0.81 pu
E and a large standing phase angle may be present

R = between them, precluding a hot parallel transfer.
1.
33 Assuming the two sources’ phase angle relationship
pu
is acceptable, with the two sources paralleled,
@ -95 degree
currents flowing into and through the bus may

violate the interrupt rating for the circuit breakers
and the short term withstand ratings of the source
transformers. A fault occurring either on the bus or
θ on one of the sources during the time the sources
s
are paralleled can overstress the components of the

ES = 1 pu @ 0 degrees bus system. The probability of this happening may
be viewed as small; however, the consequences of
such a fault occurring during the source paralleled
Figure 1-8 V/Hz Resultant Between ES and EM operating interval should be thoroughly understood
before the hot parallel transfer system is used.
1–9
Fast Simultaneous Transfer Fast Sequential Transfer

In a fast simultaneous transfer, a trip command is In a fast sequential transfer, the present source is
issued to the present source breaker and a close tripped, and as soon as the present source breaker
command is issued to the new source breaker at has started to open (typically indicated by an “early
the same instant. The phase angle, delta voltage b” contact), a close command is issued to the new
and delta frequency from the motor bus and the source breaker. The phase angle, delta voltage
new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to and delta frequency from the motor bus and the
assure that the motor bus and the new source are new source are evaluated prior to the transfer to
in synchronism. This is the fastest transfer type assure that the motor bus and the new source are
that does not deliberately parallel the sources. Due in synchronism. This is the second fastest transfer
to breaker operating time variations and control type that does not deliberately parallel the sources.
voltage variations, brief unintentional paralleling of
the sources may occur. A close command used in the fast sequential
transfers can be dynamically blocked, just after
The M-4172 includes settings that allow delaying the present source is disconnected, if any of the
the close command to avoid any paralelling of the following occur:
source.
• A fault occurs on the present or new
Close commands used in the fast simultaneous source, which may affect the phase angle
transfers make certain assumptions about the phase at the instant the transfer sequence starts.
angle and slip frequency between the decelerating • There is a large change in the phase
motors and the new source: angle between the motor bus and new
• The transfer is affected before the phase source once the present source has been
angle between the new source and the disconnected [2].
motor bus increases to an undesirable • Any preconceived notions about the
value. deceleration characteristics of the motor
• A fault occurs on the present source, which bus have changed in that the deceleration
may affect the phase angle at the instant has increased, therefore causing the
the transfer sequence starts. phase angle to change rapidly. This would
occur from a decrease in the inertia of the
• There will be little change in the phase motor loads.
angle between the motor bus and new
source once the present source has been
disconnected. There is a type of sequential transfer that may be
applied if a fast transfer cannot be made, but before
• Any preconceived notions about the a residual or fixed time transfer. It is called an in-
deceleration characteristics of the motor phase transfer and offers an additional opportunity
bus have not changed. Key characteristics to transfer while the motors are still spinning and
would be changes in the combined inertia the likelihood of process interruption is minimized.
of the motor loads and changes in the mix
of synchronous and induction motors.
In-Phase Transfer
An in-phase transfer is defined as connecting a
When Fast Simultaneous Transfer is selected, a
motor bus and the new source that have a slip
breaker failure function is required in the event the
frequency between them at the first (zero degrees)
breaker does not trip. The M-4172 includes two
phase coincidence (the motor bus is coasting down).
Breaker Failure methods (see Section 4.4, System
It is essentially a specialized type of automatic
Setpoints).
synchronizing under high slip frequency (typically
from 0.5 to 10 hertz), and a rapidly decelerating
motor bus frequency (rapidly growing slip frequency).
This requires the use of very fast measurement and
output command techniques. As the slip frequency is
changing rapidly due to the deceleration of the motor
bus, calculation of the rate of change of frequency
may be required in addition to examination of the
instantaneous slip frequency when making the new
source closing command decision [3].
1–10
Introduction – 1
Residual Voltage Transfer fixed time transfer would be initiated. Obviously, the
In a residual voltage transfer, the motor bus is fast transfer offers the greatest chance of process
connected to the new source after the voltage on continuity, as the interruption period to the motors
the coasting motor bus falls to less than 0.33 pu. In is short. The in-phase transfer provides one more
this manner, no matter what the phase angle, the opportunity to transfer with a good possibilty to
resultant V/Hz will not exceed 1.33 V/Hz. This is the keep process continuity. By the time a residual or
third type of transfer type that does not parallel the fixed time transfer is initiated, the motors may have
sources. This type of transfer, however, typically is stopped against low inertia loads, such as positive
not fast enough to maintain process continuity, as displacement pumps or conveyors, and a process
certain motor loads that cause rapid stalling may interruption may occur. In addition, if many motors
necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus. must be started to restart the process, load shedding
and staggered starting of the motors may have to
be undertaken so as not to overload the capacity
Fixed Time Transfer of the new source and cause unacceptable voltage
In a fixed time transfer, the motor bus is connected to sags during the restarting procedure.
the new source after a time delay that would reflect
that the voltage on the coasting motor bus has fallen
References
to less than 0.33 pu. In this manner, no matter what
the phase angle, the resultant V/Hz will not exceed [1] ANSI C50.41-2000, American Nation
1.33 V/Hz. This is the fourth type of transfer type Standard for Polyphase Induction Motors
that does not parallel the sources. This type transfer, for Power generating Stations.
however, will not be able maintain process continuity, [2] A.P. Gabba and D.S. Hill, “Make Automatic
as certain motor loads that cause rapid stalling may Power Source Transfers a Success
necessitate a restart of the motors on the bus. for Your Plants,” IEEE Transactions on
Industry Applications, Vol. 37, No. 2, Mar/
These open transition transfers would be attempted Apr 2001.
in the order they are presented, as shown in Figure
1-9. The first possible transfer would be the fast [3] W.G. Hartmann, “Automatic Synchronizing
transfer which would be made if the phase angle for Generation and Tie Lines,” 18 th
between the motor bus and the new source is met. If Annual Georgia Tech Protective MBTSing
that transfer was not made, an in-phase, residual or Conference, Atlanta, GA, May 1999.
Fast
0 1 pu
Phase (Degrees)
Voltage
Residual and
180
Fixed Time
In-Phase
0 pu
360
Time
Figure 1-9 Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS
1–11
1–12
Operation – 2
2 Operation
2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators......................................... 2–1
2.2 Manual Operation..................................................................... 2–6
2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering............................................. 2–15
This chapter contains information that describes the Screen Blanking

operation of the Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS). The display will automatically blank if there are no
M-4172 operation includes the following: events in the Transfer Event Log after exiting from the
Main Menu, or from any screen after five (5) minutes
• Front Panel Controls and Indicators
of unattended operation. To wake up the display, the
• Initiate Transfer user must press any key except EXIT.
• Remote/Local Control
If there are Transfer Events in the Transfer Event Log,
• Automatic Transfer Enable/Disable they must be cleared (RESET pushbutton) before
• Manual Transfer Enable/Disable the screen will Auto Blank. See Transfer Event Log/
Clear Status in Section 3.1, ISScom Functional
• Status Monitoring/Metering
Description.
• Reset Error Codes
• Reset Alarm Counters Arrow Pushbuttons
• Device On/Off The left and right arrow pushbuttons are used to
choose among the displayed menu selections.
When entering values, the left and right arrow
2.1 Front Panel Controls and pushbuttons are used to select the digit (by moving
Indicators the cursor) of the displayed setpoint that will be
increased or decreased by the use of the up and
This section describes the operation of the M-4172 as down pushbuttons.
a function of the M‑3931 Human Machine Interface
Module (HMI) and the M‑3976 Status module. The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase or
decrease input values or change between upper and
The MBTS can be interrogated locally with the HMI lower case inputs. If the up or down pushbutton is
panel. An integral part of the design is the layout and pressed and held when adjusting numerical values,
function of the front panel indicators and controls, the speed of increment or decrement is increased.
illustrated in Figure 2-1.
EXIT Pushbutton
Alphanumeric Display The EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayed
To assist the operator in operating and interrogating screen and move up the menu tree. Any changed
the MBTS locally, the HMI displays menus which setpoint in the displayed screen will not be saved if
guide the operator to the desired function or status the selection is aborted using the EXIT pushbutton.
value. These menus consist of two lines. The bottom
line lists lower case abbreviations of each menu
selection with the chosen menu selection shown in
uppercase. The top menu line provides a description
of the chosen menu selection.
2–1
ENTER Pushbutton Power Supply #1 & #2 LED

The ENTER pushbutton is used to choose a The Green PS LED indicator will remain illuminated
highlighted menu selection, to replace a setting or for the appropriate power supply whenever power is
other programmable value with the currently displayed applied to the unit and the power supply is operating
value, or to move down within the menu tree. correctly. A second power supply is available as an
option.
System OK LED
The Green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the M‑3976 Status Module
unit's microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM OK LED The Status module includes 24 Status LEDs,
indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also and 8 Output Status LEDs. The 24 Status LEDs
be programmed to be continuously illuminated to are preassigned to provide the status of specific
indicate proper program cycling. functions and features. The Status LEDs provide the
following indication:
Diagnostic/Time Sync LED
The Green DIAG/TIME SYNC LED will illuminate to • When a function is in a "Picked Up"
indicate that the IRIG‑B time signal is received and (exceeded the setpoint value) condition,
the internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG‑B the assigned Status Indicator will illuminate
time signal. IRIG‑B time information is used to when the "Status Reset" pushbutton is
accurately tag target and oscillograph events. depressed and held.
• When a function is in a "Picked Up"
The LED will flash when a self-test error is detected. (exceeded the setpoint value) condition,
The LED will flash the Error Code number; for and the Time Delay timer has timed out the
example, for Error Code 32, the LED will flash 3 assigned Status Indicator will illuminate as
times, followed by a short pause, and then flash 2 well as any assigned Output LEDs.
times, followed by a long pause, then repeat LED
flash sequence. The Error Code number is also • Transfer Conditions
displayed on the M-3931 HMI screen.
When a condition exists that causes the operation
Breaker Status LEDs of Outputs 1 through 8, the assigned STATUS LED
on the M-3976 Status Module will illuminate. Status
The Red SOURCE 1 BRKR CLOSED, SOURCE 2
Module LEDs will remain illuminated until the con‑
BRKR CLOSED LEDs and the Green SOURCE 1
dition causing the trip is cleared, and the operator
BRKR OPEN, SOURCE 2 BRKR OPEN LEDs will
presses the "STATUS RESET" pushbutton.
illuminate when the selected breaker status input
is closed. Table 2-1 presents the available input
configurations for the Breaker Status LEDs.
Source 1 Breaker Status LEDs Red (Closed)

S1 52a Closed S1 52b Open
OR
(Input 1) (Input 1)
Green (Open)
S1 52a Open S1 52b Closed
OR
(Input 1) (Input 1)
Source 2 Breaker Status LEDs Red (Closed)
S2 52a Closed S2 52b Open
OR
(Input 4) (Input 4)
Green (Open)
S2 52a Open S2 52b Closed
OR
(Input 4) (Input 4)
Table 2-1 Breaker Status LED Input

Configurations
2–2
Operation – 2
STATUS
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. 27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK
M-4172 FAST TRANS OP DELTA VOLTAGE OK

RES V/FIXED– TIME TRANS OP FAST/PARAL TRANS READY
r 50BF–1/SOURCE 1 BRKR FAIL
50BF–2/SOURCE 2 BRKR FAIL
BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
r
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM CLOSE SOURCE 1 BRKR
INPUT 2
CLOSE SOURCE 2 BRKR
INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
r OUTPUTS
EXIT ENTER OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7
Figure 2-1 M-4172 Horizontal Front Panel
Power-On Beckwith Electric Co.

Substation Name AUTO FAST TRANSFER
Self Tests
PICKUP ELEMENTS
POWER ON SELFTESTS
Default Message Screens
XXXXXXX
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
A27 #1 AUTO PH UNDERVOLT
LED Test
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
OPERATE ELEMENTS
POWER ON SELFTESTS AUTO FAST TRANSFER

PASS 30-JUN-2015 15:28:38:539
Model Number
AUTO FAST TRANSFER
OUTPUTS
Beckwith Electric Co.
M-4172
AUTO FAST TRANSFER

CT Rating 04 01

CT RATING 5A
Transfer Event
Frequency Rating Screens
FREQ RATING 60Hz
ENTER ACCESS CODE
Firmware Version
5-minute
Beckwith Electric Co. access
D-0229V01.00.03 c4ea ACCESS DENIED!
lockout
Serial Number after
3 tries
Beckwith Electric Co. LEVEL 1 ACCESS
SERIAL NUMBER 137 GRANTED!
System Date and Time Access Screens (optional)

30-JUN-2015 15:24:32
User Logo
INIT TRANSFER
Beckwith Electric Co. INIT rmte_lcal auto_xfer man-xfer stat comm setup
Substation Name
INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?

Power On Self-Test yes NO
and Status Screens
Main Menu Flow
Figure 2-2 Screen Message Menu Flow
2–3
INIT TRANSFER SETUP UNIT

INIT rmte_lcal   stat comm SETUP 
• Software Version
REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL
• Serial Number
init RMTE_LCAL  • Alter Access Codes
• User Control Number
AUTO TRANSFER • User Logo Line 1
• User Logo Line 2
 AUTO_XFER man_xfer 
• Clear Alarm Counter
• Date & Time
MANUAL TRANSFER • Clear Error Codes
 auto_xfer MAN_XFER  • Eth Firmware Version
• Diagnostic Mode 
STATUS
DIAGNOSTIC
 STAT comm setup 
MODE
• Voltage Status
• Current Status • Output Test (Relay)
• Frequency Status • Input Test (Status)
• Phase Angle Status • Status Led Test
• In/Out Status • Module Led Test
• Alarm Counter • Button Test
• Time of Last Power up • Display Test
• Error Codes • Com1 Loopback Test
• Checksums • Com2 Loopback Test
• Com3 Echo Test 2 Wire
• Clock Test
COMMUNICATION
• Flash Sys Ok Led
 stat COMM setup  • Auto Calibration
• Factory Use Only
• Com1 Setup
• Com2 Setup
• Com3 Setup DEVICE ON/OFF
• Communication Address  ON_OFF exit
• Comm Access Code
• Ethernet Setup EXIT LOCAL MODE
• Ethernet IP Address
 on_off EXIT
Figure 2-3 Main Menu Flow
2–4
Operation – 2
STATUS RESET Pushbutton 5. Press ENTER, the following will be

Pressing and holding the STATUS RESET displayed:
pushbutton performs four functions:
C
OM1 SETUP
• Resets all Status LEDs if the condition
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr

causing the condition is no longer present.
• Displays the present pickup status of all 6. Press ENTER and the following is
functions available on the status module. displayed:
This is a valuable diagnostic tool which may
be used during commissioning and testing. P
ORT ACCESS
• Resets Latched Outputs enable
DISABLE
• Resets HMI display of last transfer
7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbutton
as necessary to enable or disable the
COM Port Security
COM port.
COM1, COM2 and COM3 may be disabled for
security purposes from the unit HMI. A Level 2 8. Press ENTER and the following is
Access Code is required. displayed:
Disabling COM Ports COM1 BAUD RATE

1. Press the ENTER pushbutton. b
aud_4800 BAUD_9600
2. If Level Access is active, the following is
displayed: 9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as necessary
for additional COM Ports.
ENTER ACCESS CODE

0
a. Input the required Access Code, then

press ENTER.
b. If the proper Access Code has been
entered, the HMI will return:
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
c. Go to step 4.
3. If Level Access is not active, then the

following is displayed:
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until

the following is displayed:
C
ommunication
stat COMM setup

2–5
voltage below the Residual Voltage Transfer limit, or

2.2 Manual Operation after the fixed time delay of the Fixed Time Transfer.
Transfer is completed and the new source breaker is
Overview of Manual Transfer Methods closed by any of the previously listed methods whose
and Transfer Modes criteria is first satisfied.
A Manual transfer can be initiated utilizing
either: Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Sequence
for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential
• The Human Machine Interface (HMI) Transfer Mode.
• Through Local Serial Connections
• A Control/Status Input Simultaneous Transfer Mode
• Through remote serial communications When a transfer is initiated with Simultaneous
Mode selected, within 10 ms of transfer initiate,
all three methods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and
The Manual Transfer allows transfer operation in Residual Voltage Transfer are immediately enabled to
either direction, from Source 1 to Source 2 or from supervise closure of the new source breaker without
Source 2 to Source 1. waiting for the breaker status contact confirmation
that the old source breaker has opened. At the same
Manual Transfer provides Hot Parallel Transfer or Fast
instant, the commands for the old source breaker to
Transfer, In-Phase Transfer and Residual Voltage
trip and the new source breaker to close are sent
Transfer. The Manual Transfer is blocked when any
simultaneously if the phase angle between the motor
lockout/blocking condition occurs. The MBTS will
bus and the new source is within the delta phase
not respond to any transfer command and will not
angle limit for the Fast Transfer Method immediately
send the trip command while in the lockout/blocking
upon transfer initiation. However only the Fixed Time
condition.
Transfer is enabled 30 cycles after the old source
breaker has opened.
Transfer Modes
There are two transfer modes, Sequential and If the phase angle between the motor bus and the
Simultaneous, in the open transition transfer new source is not within the delta phase angle limit,
operation. the old source breaker is still tripped. Since the four
methods of transfer are enabled, the new source
breaker then closes either as a result of a subsequent
Sequential Transfer Mode movement into the delta phase angle limit within the
When a transfer is initiated with Sequential Mode Fast Transfer Time Window, a movement through
selected, the old source breaker is tripped within a predicted zero phase coincidence within the
10 ms and closure of the new source breaker is In-Phase Transfer Time Window, or by a drop in
attempted only upon confirmation by the breaker the motor bus voltage below the Residual Voltage
status contact that the old source breaker has opened. Transfer limit, or after the fixed time delay of the Fixed
Within 4 ms of receipt of this confirmation, all three Time Transfer. The new source breaker is closed
transfer methods, Fast, In-Phase and Residual by any of the above methods whose criteria is first
Voltage Transfer are enabled to supervise closure of satisfied and the transfer is completed.
the new source breaker. The Fixed Time Transfer is
enabled 30 cycles later. The new source breaker is Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time
then closed by the Fast Transfer Method if the phase Sequence, for Timing Sequence of Transfer Logic,
angle between the motor bus and the new source is in Simultaneous Transfer Mode.
within the delta phase angle limit immediately after
the old source breaker opens. Transfer Methods
If the phase angle between the motor bus and the The type of transfer that occurs when a Manual
new source is not within the delta phase angle limit, Transfer is initiated is determined by the Manual
the old source breaker is still tripped. When the four Transfer settings. Whenever the Hot Parallel Transfer
methods of transfer are enabled, the new source is enabled the Manual Fast, In-phase and Residual
breaker then closes either as a result of a subsequent Voltage Transfers are disabled. Only when the Hot
movement into the delta phase angle limit within the Parallel Transfer is disabled can the Manual Fast,
Fast Transfer Time Window, a movement through a In-phase and Residual Voltage Transfers be enabled.
predicted zero phase coincidence within the In-Phase
Transfer Time Window, or by a drop in the motor bus
2–6
Operation – 2
Fast Transfer • The motor bus voltage decreases to less

The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fast than the Residual Voltage Transfer limit
Transfer are: setting (adjustable from 5 to 60 V) within
the incomplete transfer lockout time limit
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist. setting (50 to 3000 cycles).
• The phase angle between the motor bus
and the new source is within the limit Hot Parallel Transfer
setting. When the transfer operation is from Source 1 to
• The delta voltage between the motor bus Source 2, the close command to the Source 2 circuit
and the new source is within the limit breaker is issued first. Then after receipt of the
setting. (If this setting is enabled) breaker status contact confirmation that the Source 2
• The delta frequency between the motor circuit breaker has closed and the tripping command
bus and the new source is within the limit time delay (0 to 30 cycles), the trip command to the
setting. (If this setting is enabled) Source 1 breaker is issued.
• The transfer must be completed within the When the transfer operation is from Source 2 to
Fast Transfer time window of 1 to 10 cycles. Source 1, the close command to the Source 1 circuit
breaker is issued first. Then after receipt of the
In-Phase Transfer breaker status contact confirmation that the Source 1
circuit breaker has closed and the tripping command
The conditions that are necessary to execute an time delay (0 to 30 cycles), the trip command to the
In-Phase Transfer are: Source 2 breaker is issued.
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
In hot parallel transfer, it is necessary to confirm that
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not
the circuit breaker has been closed after a close
been met. (If this setting is enabled)
command is issued to that circuit breaker. This will
• The delta voltage between the motor bus prevent the motor bus voltage from becoming dead if
and the new source is within the limit the circuit breaker fails to close and the other breaker
setting. (If this setting is enabled) is tripped. This failure of the breaker to close could
• The delta frequency between the motor be caused by electrical or mechanical problems.
bus and the new source is within the limit
In hot parallel transfer, when the Source 1 Breaker
setting.
Failure (S1BF or 50BF#1) and Source 2 Breaker
• The phase angle between the motor bus Failure (S2BF or 50BF#2) functions are enabled,
and the new source is changing and must an auto-decoupling feature is activated to trip
enter the first phase coincidence (first the breaker that was closed by the transfer if the
zero degree crossing) within the In-Phase breaker requested to open has not opened within
Transfer time window (adjustable from 10 the predefined paralleling time.
to 600 cycles).
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Hot
The In-Phase Transfer feature includes two
Parallel Transfer are:
programmable advanced breaker closing
times for Source 1 and Source 2 breakers • No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
to coordinate the closing at the first phase • The phase angle between the motor bus
coincidence. Programmable breaker and the new source is within the limit
closing time is from 0 to 12 cycles. setting.
• The delta voltage between the motor bus
Residual Voltage Transfer and the new source is within the limit
The conditions that are necessary to execute a setting. (If this setting is enabled)
Residual Voltage Transfer are: • The delta frequency between the motor
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist. bus and the new source is within the limit
setting. (If this setting is enabled)
• The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not
been met. (If this setting is enabled) • The Hot Parallel Transfer must be
completed within the time window of 1 to
• The conditions for In-Phase transfer have 50 cycles.
not been met. (If this setting is enabled)
2–7
Initiate Manual Transfer (ISScom®) 7. If the Manual Transfer cannot be

To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Bus utilizing completed the Incomplete Transfer
ISScom perform the following: Blocked indicator will be illuminated
(System Status).
 NOTE: Communication must be established with
The MBTS is blocked from issuing
the target MBTS for this procedure.
operation commands.
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar 8. If the MBTS completes the Manual
select Monitor. ISScom will display the Transfer successfully, then the following
Secondary Metering and Status screen will be indicated in the System Status
Figure 2-11. section of the Secondary Metering and
2. Verify that the MBTS is in Remote by Status screen:
observing the Remote Mode/Local Mode • Transfer Completed
status indicator (System Status).
• What type of transfer was completed
3. Verify that the Transfer Ready (System • Close S1(S2) Breaker Command
Status) indicator is Green.
• Trip S2(S1) Breaker Command
4. If the Transfer Ready (System Status) • S1(S2) Breaker Closed
indicator is not Green, then clear the
condition(s) blocking the transfer. • S2(S1) Breaker Opened
• Source 1(S2) (New Source)
5. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
select Initiate. ISScom will display the 9. Select the RESET button from the
Initiate Manual Transfer Confirmation ISScom command bar or locally press
screen Figure 2-4. and release the Status Reset pushbutton
to reset the status indicators.
Initiate Manual Transfer (MBTS Front Panel)

To initiate a Manual Transfer of the Motor Bus from
the MBTS Front Panel perform the following:
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
Figure 2-4 Initiate Manual Transfer 2. If Level Access is active, the following is
displayed:
Confirmation Screen
6. Select YES, ISScom will display the ENTER ACCESS CODE

Initiate Manual Transfer Command Sent 0
confirmation screen Figure 2-5.
press ENTER.
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
Figure 2-5 Initiate Manual Transfer Command

I
NIT TRANSFER
Sent Confirmation Screen
INIT rmte_lcal
The MBTS will start the Manual Transfer
based on the system parameters present c. Go to Step 4.
and MBTS settings.
2–8
Operation – 2
3. If Level Access is not active, then the HMI will display (scroll) the following
following is displayed: screens:
I
NIT TRANSFER MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

INIT rmte_lcal
30-JUN-2015 10:11:49.948
4. Verify that the Fast/Paral Trans Ready

MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

(Status Module) indicator is Green.
-
-OUTPUTS--
5. If the Fast/Paral Trans Ready (Status
Module) indicator is not Green, then clear
the condition(s) blocking the transfer. MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

6. Verify the HMI display indicates the 04 01
following:
I
NIT TRANSFER MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

INIT rmte_lcal -
-PICKUP ELEMENTS--
7. Press ENTER, the following will be MANUAL FAST TRANSFER

displayed:
-
-OPERATE ELEMENTS--
INIT MANUAL TRANSFER?

12. Press and release the Status Reset
y
es NO pushbutton to reset the status indicators.
8. Press the Left arrow pushbutton once to

select YES. Remote/Local Control
The Remote/Local selection feature provides control
9. Initiate a Manual transfer by pressing
of the MBTS from Local mode (COM1 or HMI) and
ENTER. The following will be displayed:
remote mode (COM2, RS485, Ethernet or external
input). Remote/Local feature is configured from Local
I
NIT TRANSFER mode (COM1 or HMI) only.
INIT rmte_lcal
When Local mode is selected manually, initiated
10. If the Manual Transfer cannot be transfers or settings changes through the COM1
completed, then INCOMP TRANS or HMI are allowed. Any Remote manually initiated
BLOCK will be illuminated on the Status transfers or settings changes of the MBTS is blocked.
Module.
When Remote mode is selected manually, initiated
The MBTS is blocked from performing transfers or settings changes through the COM1,
another transfer until reset. HMI, COM2, RS485, Ethernet or external input is
11. If the MBTS completes the Manual allowed.
Transfer successfully, then the following
will be indicated: Remote/Local Control (ISScom)
Status Module To switch Control Method utilizing ISScom® perform
the following:
• What type of transfer was completed
• Close S1(S2) Breaker  NOTE: Communication must be established with
• Trip S2(S1) Breaker
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu bar
Front Panel LEDs select Remote/Local. ISScom will display
• S2(S1) Breaker Closed LED the Remote/Local Mode dialog screen
Figure 2-6.
• S1(S2) Breaker Opened LED
2–9

R
EMOTE/LOCAL CONTORL
i
nit RMTE_LCAL
5. Press ENTER, the following will be

displayed:
C
ONTROL METHOD
Figure 2-6 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen L
OCAL remote
2. Select the desired control mode, then
6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton
select Save.
as necessary to select the desired Control
3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desired Mode (upper case).
mode by observing the Remote Mode/
7. Press ENTER. The following will be
Local Mode status indicator on the
displayed:
Secondary Metering and Status screen
(System Status).
R
EMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL
i
nit RMTE_LCAL
Remote/Local Control (MBTS Front Panel)
To switch Control Method from the MBTS Front Panel 8. The MBTS is now in the selected Control
perform the following: Method. Press EXIT as necessary to
return to the Main Menu.
displayed: Device ON/OFF
The Device ON/OFF feature allows the operator
ENTER ACCESS CODE
to place the MBTS in a lockout condition. When
"Device OFF" is selected, no automatic or manual
0 transfers can be executed either through Local
mode or Remote mode and all output relays are
a. Input the required Access Code, then deactivated. The "Device ON" selection returns
press ENTER. the MBTS back to normal operation.
entered, the HMI will return: When selecting Device ON/OFF feature through
Local mode (COM1 or HMI) the MBTS Local mode
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
must be selected. Any Remote attempt is blocked.
A
ccess Granted! When selecting Device ON/OFF feature through
Remote mode (COM2, RS485 or Ethernet), the
I
NIT TRANSFER MBTS Remote mode must be selected. Any Local
attempt is blocked.
INIT rmte_lcal
Upon saving the "Device OFF" selection, the Self-Test
c. Go to Step 4. relay contact terminals 15 & 16 close, the front panel
System OK and Fast/Paral Trans Ready Status LED
3. If Level Access is not active, then the indicators extinguish. All output relays are deactivated.
Upon saving the "Device ON" selection, the Self-Test
relay contact terminals 15 & 16 open, front panel
I
NIT TRANSFER
System OK and Fast/Paral Trans Ready Status LED
INIT rmte_lcal indicators illuminate for normal operation. All output
relays return to activated states.
2–10
Operation – 2
Device ON/OFF (ISScom) c. Go to Step 4.

To switch the MBTS ON or OFF utilizing ISScom
perform the following: 3. If Level Access is not active, then the
the target MBTS for this procedure. I
NIT TRANSFER
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu INIT rmte_lcal
bar select Device ON/OFF. ISScom will
display the Device On/OFF dialog screen 4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until
Figure 2-7. the following is displayed:
D
EVICE ON/OFF
O
N_OFF exit

displayed:
D
EVICE MODE
O
N off
Figure 2-7 Device On/Off Dialog Box 6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton
as necessary to select the desired Device
2. Select either Device ON or Device OFF, Mode (upper case).
then select Save. 7. Press ENTER. The following will be
3. Verify that the MBTS is in the desired displayed:
mode by observing the Device On/Off
Mode status indicator on the Secondary D
EVICE ON/OFF
Metering and Status screen (System O
N_OFF exit
Status).
8. The MBTS is now in the selected Device
Device ON/OFF (MBTS Front Panel) Mode. Press EXIT as necessary to return
to the Main Menu.
To switch the MBTS On or OFF from the Front Panel
perform the following:
displayed:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

press ENTER.
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
2–11
System Error Codes and Output Counters Clear Alarm Counters (MBTS Front Panel)
The System Error Codes and Output Counters To reset Alarm Counters from the Front Panel
feature provides the user with the ability to view and perform the following:
clear system Error Codes, Processor Resets, Alarm
Counters, Power Loss Counter and Output Counters. 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
Also, Checksums can be viewed for Calibration and 2. If Level Access is active, the following is
Setpoints. displayed:
Reset/View System Error Codes and Output ENTER ACCESS CODE

Counters (ISScom®) 0
To view and/or Reset System Error Codes and Output
Counters utilizing ISScom perform the following: a. Input the required Access Code, then
press ENTER.
the target MBTS for this procedure. b. If the proper Access Code has been
bar select Tools/System Error Codes/ LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

Counters. ISScom will display the A
ccess Granted!
System Error Codes and Output Counters
dialog screen Figure 2-8.
I
NIT TRANSFER
2. Select the desired System Error Code,
Processor Reset, Alarm Counter, Power INIT rmte_lcal
Loss Counter to be reset, then select OK.
ISScom will return to the Main Menu. c. Go to Step 4.
Figure 2-8 System Error Codes and Output Counters Dialog Screen
2–12
Operation – 2
3. If Level Access is not active, then the Clear Error Codes (MBTS Front Panel)
following is displayed: To clear Error Codes from the Front Panel perform
the following:
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until displayed:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

S
ETUP UNIT 0
stat comm SETUP

5. Press ENTER, the following will be press ENTER.
displayed: b. If the proper Access Code has been
S
OFTWARE VERSION
VERS sn access number
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
I
NIT TRANSFER
CLEAR ALARM COUNTER
INIT rmte_lcal
logo1 logo2 ALARM

c. Go to Step 4.
displayed:
CLEAR ALARM COUNTER

I
NIT TRANSFER
PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR

INIT rmte_lcal
displayed:
CLEAR ALARM COUNTER

S
ETUP UNIT
-ALARM COUNTER CLEARED-

stat comm SETUP

9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the
Main Menu.
displayed:
S
OFTWARE VERSION


CLEAR ERROR CODES

time ERROR eth diag

2–13
7. Press ENTER, the following will be Switching The Active Setpoint Profile
displayed: The Active Profile may be chosen utilizing ISScom®
through remote communications or through the
CLEAR ERROR CODES
ISSLogic elements. See Chapter 3, ISScom for
PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR
additional information.
To manually select the Active Setpoint Profile
proceed as follows:
displayed:
1. Open the M-3871 ISScom Communications
CLEAR ERROR CODES
and Analysis software.
-ERROR CODES CLEARED-
2. Establish communications with the target
All Error codes have been cleared. M-4172.
3. Select System/Profile/Active Profile.
9. Press EXIT as necessary to return to the ISScom will display the "Select Active
Main Menu. Profile" dialog screen Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen
 NOTE: During profile switching, relay operation

is disabled for approximately 1 second.
▲ CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the

MBTS is on-line may cause unexpected operation if
the wrong profile is selected.
4. Select the desired Profile, then select OK.

ISScom will return to the main screen
2–14
Operation – 2
phase voltages are applied. When Single-phase is

2.3 Status Monitoring and Metering selected for S1, S2 and Bus the screen will display
values for the Single-phase. The currents portion
ISScom of the metering screen displays the single phase
System/Monitor/Primary Metering currents flowing through the Source 1 and Source 2
breakers. The current is used for the Breaker Failure
The Primary Metering screen Figure 2-10, includes (50BF) feature only. The displayed Frequency is the
the Source 1 and Source 2, Primary Voltage, Primary frequency of the bus. The Bus-New Source portion
Current, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus Frequency, displays the difference in phase angle, frequency and
Positive and Negative Sequence. voltage across the open breaker between the Bus
and the New Source. The Source that is presently
System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and defined as the New Source is also displayed. The
Status remainder of the screen presents the Input/Output,
The Secondary Metering and Status screen Figure Function, Oscillograph Trigger and System status.
2-11, includes the Source 1 and Source 2, Secondary
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle
Voltage, Secondary Current and Bus Frequency.
OK, Delta Voltage OK or Delta Frequency OK status
The Secondary Metering section also displays Bus indicators of the ISScom® software to determine
New Source information that includes Delta Phase when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient
Angle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and the delay in the communications between the MBTS
New Source identity (Source 1 or Source 2). The and the ISScom such that these indications do not
Secondary Metering and Status screen also includes provide "live" information.
the individual sections for Input/Output Status,
Always use the status indicators of the MBTS front
Function Status, Oscillograph Triggered Status,
panel. These indicators use the manual transfer
Transfer Event Log Stored Status, Sequence of Event
settings to determine when a parameter is OK.
Stored Status and System Status information.
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate of
The Voltages portion of the metering screen displays
ISScom when Delta Phase Angle and Delta Voltage
the Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to the
are constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate of
MBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence
the MBTS Front Panel.
(VPS) and Bus Negative Sequence (VNS) when three
Path: System / Setup / Monitor / Primary Metering

Figure 2-10 Primary Metering Screen
2–15
Path: System / Setup / Monitor / Secondary Metering and Status

Figure 2-11 Secondary Metering and Status Screen
2–16
Operation – 2
The Function Status window displays the status of To access the STATUS menu and begin monitoring,
various functions, with "T" representing the function proceed as follows:
which has timed out, and "P" representing the
function which has picked up and is timing. 1. Press the ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram and Sync I

NIT TRANSFER
Scope
INIT rmte_lcal
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle,
Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or Sync Scope
Pointer of the ISScom Sync Scope screen to the following is displayed:
determine when to manually initiate a transfer. There
is sufficient delay in the communications between the
S
TATUS
MBTS and the ISScom such that these indications
do not provide "live" information. STAT comm setup

▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Manual Initiate of 3. Press the ENTER, the following will be
ISScom when Delta Phase Angle and Delta Voltage displayed:
are constantly changing. Use the Manual Initiate of
the MBTS Front Panel. V
OLTAGE STATUS
The Phasor Diagram (Figure 3-18) provides selected VOLT curr freq phang

reference Phase Angle to Phase Angle data from
other sources. The Phasor Diagram also includes a 4. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton
Freeze capability to freeze the data displayed on the until the desired parameter is selected
Phasor Diagram. (upper case), then press ENTER. The
MBTS will display the selected parameter.
The Sync Scope screen (Figure 3-19) provides the
Delta Frequency relationship between the Bus and 5. Press the ENTER pushbutton to move
down within the STATUS menu to the
the New Source, illustrated in a Fast or Slow direction
desired category. To exit a specific
based on Delta Frequency.
category and continue to the next menu
category, press the EXIT pushbutton.
MBTS Front Panel
Transfer Event Log
Monitor Status/Metering
The initiating event that starts the Transfer Event Log
The HMI menu categories for monitored values are: is the "Start" signal for any transfer. A Transfer Event
• Voltage Status – S1, S2 and Bus phase Log is considered complete when one of following
voltages, Bus positive sequence voltage, occurs:
Bus negative sequence voltage, delta
voltage (referenced to new source) • When the breaker from the Old Source trips
and the breaker to the New Source closes.
• Current Status – S1 and S2 phase
currents (single-phase A, B or C / a, b or c)

• When a breaker failure occurs.
• Frequency Status – Bus Frequency • When the incomplete transfer timer times out.
and Delta Frequency (referenced to new
source) The trigger and complete events are used to define
the time frame during which the transfer event log
• Phase Angle Status
is storing information. One transfer can have up to
• I/O Status – Status of input and output 4 records. After 16 records have been stored, any
contacts new record will cause the oldest existing record to
• Alarm Counter be lost. Each Transfer Event Log parameter is time
stamped with the date and time in 1 ms increments.
• Time of Last Power up
• Error Codes A reset feature is provided to clear this log through
the serial communications. See Chapter 3, ISScom®,
• Checksums – setpoints, calibration, ROM
subsection System/Transfer Event Log for Transfer
Event Log Download, View, Clear Status and Clear
History selections.
2–17
Sequence of Events Recorder

The Sequence of Events Recorder stores every change
in the input status, trip commands, close commands,
any signal to initiate a transfer, type of transfer, change
in any breaker status, and status reset.
Each of these Running Events are time stamped with
the date and time in 1 ms increments. The Running
Event Log stores the last 512 events, when a new
event occurs the oldest event is removed.
A reset feature is provided to clear this log through
the serial communications. See Chapter 3, ISScom,
subsection System/Sequence of Events for
Sequence of Events Recorder Download, View and
Clear selections.
Oscillograph
The Oscillographic Recorder provides comprehensive
data recording of all monitored waveforms, and
status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data.
The Oscillographic Recorder is triggered by a
designated control/status input (usually a MBTS
initiate input), an automatically initiated signal, a
trip output, a manual transfer signal or from serial
communications. The Oscillograph Recorder settings
are not considered to be part of the Setpoint Profile
and should be recorded manually. Recorder settings
are common to all profiles.
See Chapter 3, ISScom®, subsection System/
Oscillograph for Oscillograph Recorder Retrieve,
Trigger and Clear selections.
2–18
ISScom – 3
3 ISScom®
3.1 ISScom Functional Description................................................ 3–1

3.2 ISSplot................................................................................... 3–36
This chapter is designed for the person or group Shortcut Command Buttons
responsible for the operation and setup of the When the ISScom software opens, there are also
MBTS. The M‑3871 ISScom Communications and 8 shortcut command buttons for the most common
Oscillographic Analysis Software is required to operations performed by ISScom. The three buttons,
successfully communicate system settings and Monitor, Setup System and System Setpoints
operational commands to the MBTS as well as are also found under the System drop down menu.
access the extensive monitoring and status reporting
features. Figure 3-3, represents the ISScom Main Initiate and Reset Buttons
Screen menu structure. This chapter provides a The Initiate and Reset buttons are used to control the
general description of each ISScom menu selection MBTS. The Initiate button is used to initiate a Manual
and command in the same order as they are Transfer and the Reset Button Resets the Output
displayed in the software program. Those ISScom Status of Latched Outputs, Timed Out Function
features and functions that are covered in other Statuses that are Latched, the System Status and
sections of this Instruction Book will be noted and Latched Lockout indicators (if the condition is no
referenced. longer present).
Remote/Local Button
3.1 ISScom Functional Description The Remote/Local button opens a dialog screen
(Figure 3-2), that provides a selection between
The ISScom installation and establishing initial local Remote and Local control of the MBTS. If Local
communications are covered in Section 5.5, ISScom is selected only locally initiated transfers will be
Communications and Oscillographic Analysis performed, then Remote Control (manual initiate
Software Installation, and Section 5.6, Activating transfer) of the MBTS is blocked. Local mode also
Initial Local Communications. blocks remote setpoint changes. Remote Control
is defined as those manual transfers that initiate
Selecting the ISScom Program from the Becoware through any serial port (except for the RS-232 port
Folder or selecting the ISScom Program Icon (Figure on the front panel) and any externally connected
3-1), from the Desktop will open the program and manual initiate command through inputs; blocking
display the ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5). inputs are still allowed.
Figure 3-1 ISScom Program Icon
Figure 3-2 Remote/Local Mode Dialog Screen
3–1
Figure 3-3 ISScom® Main Menu Structure
3–2
ISScom – 3
Local is defined as originating from the HMI of the Device ON/OFF

MBTS or the RS-232 port COM1 on the front panel. The Device ON/OFF button opens a dialog screen
This setting prevents a transfer from being initiated (Figure 3-4), that provides a selection between
remotely when personnel are on-site "Locally" "Device ON" and "Device OFF". If "Device OFF"
operating the MBTS. Remote communications is still is selected, then the MBTS is placed in a lockout
possible and all the status information can still be condition and no transfers can be executed
read, only manual transfer initiate control and settings either remotely, locally, automatically or manually.
changes are blocked. When in Local control the Monitoring of all status conditions with ISScom is still
state of this selection cannot be changed remotely, possible, either locally (HMI or COM1) or remotely
this means someone cannot remotely change back in "Device OFF" state. The "Device ON" selection
to Remote Control. However, the Remote/Local allows normal operation.
selection can always be changed locally, personnel
on-site have priority. If Remote Control is selected,
then manual transfers can be initiated either remotely
or locally. This applies to manually initiated transfers.
The Automatic Transfer can still be initiated by
internal undervoltage initiate, ISSlogic®, 86P-S1
Initiate, 86P-S2 Initiate, 27-S1 or 27-S2 initiates.
The Automatic Transfer operates independently from
Remote/Local control.
Figure 3-4 Device On/Off Dialog Box
Figure 3-5 ISScom® Main Screen
3–3
File Menu File/Save and Save As Command

The Save and Save As... commands allow saving a
file or renaming a file, respectively.
File/Open Command
The open command allows opening a previously
created data file. With an opened data file, use the
System... Setup... menu items to access the setpoint
windows.
If communication can be established with a MBTS,
The File menu enables the user to create a new it is always preferred to use the Read Data From
data file, open a previously created data file, close, System command in the System menu to update
save, save as, print preview, print and printer setup. the PC’s data file with the MBTS data. This file
The ISScom® program can also be exited through now contains the proper system type information,
the File menu. eliminating the need to set the information manually.
File/New Command File/Print and Print Setup Command

When not connected to the MBTS, using the New The Print and Printer Setup commands allow user
command, a new file is established with the New to select printer options and print out setpoint data
System dialog screen (Figure 3-6). Selecting Save from the open data file or directly from the MBTS, if
allows the new data file to be named by using the an MBTS is communicating with the PC.
Save or Save As... commands. File/Exit Command
The Exit command quits the ISScom program.
 NOTE: By choosing the NEW command, unit
and setpoint configuration values are
based on factory settings specified for Comm Menu
the profiled MBTS. The Communication dialog screens allow selection
of the ISScom communication parameters to
coordinate with the MBTS. Selecting "Serial COM
Port" displays the PC Comm Port Settings section
(Figure 3-7). Selecting "TCP/IP" displays the PC
TCP/IP Settings section (Figure 3-8) for Ethernet
communication. Selecting "Modem" displays an
expanded Communication Dialog screen (Figure
3-9), to establish contact with remote locations.
The expanded Communication Dialog screen also
includes a "Bring up terminal window after dialing"
option. When selected ISScom will open a terminal
window to allow modem commands to be sent to
Path: File menu / New command
the target modem. When communicating by way of a
Figure 3-6 New System Dialog Screen fiber optic loop network, echo cancelling is available
by checking the Echo Cancel box. This command
masks the sender’s returned echo.
COMMAND BUTTONS
Save Saves the currently displayed information.
If the modem was not used to establish communication
(direct connection), select Open COM to start. If
Cancel Returns to the ISScom main screen; any the MBTS has a default communication access
changes to the displayed information are code of 9999, a message window will be displayed
lost.
showing Access Level #3 was granted. Otherwise,
another dialog screen will be displayed to prompt
the user to enter the access code in order to
establish communication. Close COM discontinues
communication.
3–4
ISScom – 3
Figure 3-7 ISScom® Serial Communication Figure 3-8 ISScom TCP/IP Ethernet
Dialog Screen Communication Dialog Screen
Figure 3-9 ISScom Modem Expanded Communication Dialog Screen
3–5
System Menu System/Setup/Setup System

The Setup System selection displays the Setup
System dialog screen (Figure 3-10) allowing the
user to input the pertinent information regarding
the system on which the MBTS is applied (see
Section 4.2, System Setup, for detailed information
regarding the specific elements of the Setup System
dialog screen).
 NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active

Input Open parameter designates the
"operated" state established by an
opening rather than a closing external
contact.
The System menu provides access to the screens
used to set, monitor, or interrogate the MBTS. Six
submenus are provided: Setup, Monitor, Transfer COMMAND BUTTONS
Event Log , Sequence of Event Recorder, Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the
Oscillograph and Profile as well as two commands, currently displayed information to the unit.
Write File to System, and Read Data From System. Otherwise, saves the currently displayed
information to file and returns to the
System/Setup ISScom Main screen.
The Setup submenu includes the Setup System, Cancel Returns to the ISScom® Main screen; any
Setpoints, and Set Date/Time selections. changes to the displayed information are
lost.
Figure 3-10 Setup System Dialog Screen
3–6
ISScom – 3
System/Setup/Setpoints DISPLAY ALL JUMP COMMAND BUTTONS

The Setpoints menu selection displays the M-4172 This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that
System Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 3-11) from take the user to the corresponding MBTS dialog
which the individual Transfer Setting and Function screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any
Setting dialog screens can be accessed. Selecting of these dialog screens will return the user to the All
a Transfer Setting or Function Setting button will Setpoints Table dialog screen.
display the corresponding function dialog screen
(See Figure 3-12 as an example).
System/Setup/Setpoints/Configure
Selecting the Configure button displays the
COMMAND BUTTONS Configure dialog screen (Figure 3-14), which
contains a chart of programmed input and output
Display All Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog screen
for the specified range of functions. contacts, in order to allow scrolling through all MBTS
output and blocking input configurations.
Configure Opens the Configure dialog screen.
Exit Exits the screen and returns to the ISScom®
Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and
main screen. Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons which
allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen
to an individual MBTS function dialog screen and
COMMAND BUTTONS return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available
parameters can be reviewed or changed when
Save When connected to a MBTS, sends the jumping to a MBTS configuration dialog screen from
currently displayed information to the unit.
Otherwise, saves the currently displayed
either scrolling dialog screen.
information and returns to the System
Setpoints screen or All Setpoints Table.
CONFIGURE JUMP COMMAND BUTTONS
Cancel Returns to the System Setpoints screen
or All Setpoints Table; any changes to the This screen includes Jump Command Buttons, that
displayed information are lost. take the user to the corresponding MBTS dialog
screen or Setup System dialog screen. Exiting any
FEATURE AND FUNCTION SELECTION BUTTONS of these dialog screens will return the user to the
The individual Feature and Function selection Configure dialog screen.
buttons are described in the applicable sections.
System/Setup/Setpoints/Display All
Selecting the Display All button displays the All
Setpoints Table dialog screen (Figure 3-13). This
dialog screen contains the settings for each MBTS
function within a single window to allow scrolling
through all MBTS setpoint and configuration values.
Both dialog screens (All Setpoint Table and
Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons which
allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen
to an individual MBTS function dialog screen and
return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available
parameters can be reviewed or changed when
jumping to an MBTS configuration dialog screen
from either scrolling dialog screen.
3–7
Figure 3-11 MBTS Setpoints Dialog Screen
Path: System / Setup / System Setpoints / ATS command button OR ATS jump hotspot within All Setpoints Table
Figure 3-12 Typical Setpoint Dialog Screen
3–8
ISScom – 3
Path: System menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen/ Display All button
Figure 3-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Screen (Partial)
3–9
Path: System / Setup submenu / Setpoints screen / Configure button
Figure 3-14 Configure Dialog Screen (Partial)
3–10
ISScom – 3
Set Date/Time Command SET DATE AND TIME COMMAND BUTTONS

The Set Date/Time command (Figure 3-15) allows Relay Time When selected displays the current date
the system date and time to be set manually by and time at the instant that "Relay Time"
entering the desired time and date or set to the is selected.
displayed PC time. The system clock can also be PC Time When selected initiates the writing of the
stopped or restarted. This dialog screen also displays PC time and date to the relay.
an LED mimic to identify when the Time Sync is in

Start/Stop This toggles between start/stop, the MBTS
use (preventing the time from being changed by Real Time clock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’ resumes.
user). Clock
The time field in the dialog box is not updated Save Saves Time and Date settings to the MBTS
continuously. The time at which the dialog box was when applicable.
opened is the time that is displayed and remains as
Cancel Returns to the ISScom main window. Any
such. This is true whether the MBTS is synchronized changes to the displayed information is lost.
with the IRIGB signal or not.
There is a green Time Sync LED mimic in this dialog System/Monitor
box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a
The Monitor submenu provides the user with access
monochrome monitor). When this LED is green, the
to the present status of the MBTS measured and
MBTS is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and
calculated values, other real-time parameters and
the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field
conditions. The Monitor submenu provides four
can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed
commands:
(by editing and selecting Save).
• Primary Metering
When the LED is grayed out, the MBTS is not time-
synchronized and therefore, both the Date and Time • Secondary Metering/Function/System
fields can be changed. Status
• Phasor Diagram
• Sync Scope
 NOTE: Displayed parameters in monitor/status

screens will vary depending on unit
configuration.
Path: System/ Setup / Set Date/Time
Figure 3-15 Date/Time Dialog Screen
3–11
System/Monitor/Primary Metering The Voltages portion of the metering screen displays

The Primary Metering screen (Figure 3-16) allows the the Phase Voltages for the three voltage inputs to the
user to review the Source 1 and Source 2, Primary MBTS. It also displays the Bus Positive Sequence
Voltage, Primary Current, Bus Primary Voltage, Bus (VPS) and Bus Negative Sequence (VNS) when three
Frequency, Positive and Negative Sequence. phase voltages are applied. S1V, S2V, and Bus V
for the selected single phase will be displayed. The
currents portion of the Secondary Metering and
System/Monitor/Secondary Metering and Status screen displays the single phase currents
Status
flowing through the Source 1 and Source 2 breakers.
The Secondary Metering and Status screen (Figure The current is used for the Breaker Failure (50BF)
3-17) allows the user to review the Source 1 and feature only. The displayed Frequency is the
Source 2, Secondary Voltage, Secondary Current frequency of the bus. The Bus-New Source portion
Bus Frequency and Bus Voltage. displays the difference in phase angle, frequency and
voltage across the open breaker between the Bus
The Secondary Metering section also displays
and the New Source. The Source that is presently
Bus‑New Source information that includes Delta
defined as the New Source is also displayed. The
Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, Delta Voltage and
remainder of the screen presents the Input/Output,
the New Source identity (Source 1 or Source 2).
Function, Oscillograph Trigger and System status.
The Secondary Metering and Status screen also
includes the individual sections for Input/Output
Status, Function Status, Oscillograph Trigger Status
and System Status information.
Path: System / Monitor / Primary Metering
Figure 3-16 Primary Metering Screen
3–12
ISScom – 3
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle

OK, Delta Voltage OK or Delta Frequency OK status
indicators of the ISScom® software to determine
when to manually initiate a transfer. There is sufficient
delay in the communications between the MBTS
and the ISScom such that these indications do not
provide "live" information. Always use the status
indicators of the MBTS front panel. These indicators
use the manual transfer settings to determine when
a parameter is OK. If manual transfer is disabled a
warning message "Manual Transfer Blocked" will be
displayed and no transfer will occur.
The Function Status window displays the status of
various functions, with "T" representing the function
which has timed out, and "P" representing the
function which has picked up and is timing.
Path: System / Monitor / Secondary Metering and Status
Figure 3-17 Secondary Metering and Status Screen
3–13
System/Monitor/Phasor Diagram In addition the screen displays the status of Source

The Phasor Diagram (Figure 3-18) provides the user 1 and Source 2 breakers. The CB-S1 and CB-S2
with the ability to evaluate a source reference Phase indicators display RED color when the Source 1
Angle to Phase Angle data from other sources. breaker (CB-S1) or Source 2 breaker is in the closed
The Phasor Diagram also includes a menu that is position. The CB-S1 and CB-S2 indicators display
accessed by executing a right mouse click which GREEN color when the Source 1 breaker (CB-S1)
allows the user to select/deselect sources to be or Source 2 breaker (CB-S2) is in the open position.
displayed and Freeze capability to freeze the data
In the M-4172 MBT System portion of the screen the
displayed on the Phasor Diagram.
52-S1 In-Service and 52-S2 In-Service indicators
display GREEN color when the Source 1 or Source
System/Monitor/Sync Scope 2 breakers are in the service position; the 52-S1
The Sync Scope screen (Figure 3-19) provides the In‑Service and 52-S2 In-Service indicators will not be
user with the ability to observe the Delta Frequency illuminated when the Source 1 or Source 2 breakers
relationship between the Bus and the New Source, are not in service or in test position. These indicators
illustrated in a Fast or Slow direction based on Delta will be set to In-Service when no inputs are selected
Frequency. for this function.
▲ CAUTION: Do not use the Delta Phase Angle, The M-4172 MBT System portion of the screen also
Delta Voltage, Delta Frequency or Sync Scope displays the Manual Transfer Ready status, Lockout/
Pointer of the ISScom® Sync Scope screen to Blocking status, the Remote/Local control status and
determine when to manually initiate a transfer. There the Device ON/Device OFF status.
is sufficient delay in the communications between the
The Manual Transfer Ready indicator displays
MBTS and the ISScom such that these indications
GREEN color when the Manual Fast Transfer Ready
do not provide "live" information.
or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is
met.
System/Monitor/Single Line Diagram
The Single Line Diagram screen (Figure 3-20) is The Manual Transfer Ready indicator is not
a mimic display that allows the user to observe illuminated when the Manual Fast Transfer Ready
the Source 1 (S1) and Source 2 (S2)’s Secondary or Manual Hot Parallel Transfer Ready condition is
Voltage, Current and Bus Secondary Voltage. All of not met.
these metering values can be selected to be primary The Lockout/Blocking indicator displays RED color
or secondary values. when the Lockout/Blocking condition occurs. The
The screen displays the Phase Voltages for the Lockout/Blocking indicator is not illuminated when
three voltage inputs to the M-4172 MBT System. no Lockout/Blocking condition occurs.
The voltages of S1, S2 and Bus for the selected The Remote indicator displays GREEN color and
single phase will be displayed. The screen displays Local indicator is not illuminated when the Remote/
the single phase currents flowing through the Source Local control is selected to the Remote position.
1 and Source 2 breakers. The current is used for
the Breaker Failure (50BF) feature only. If the S1/ The Remote indicator is not illuminated and Local
S2 CT Configuration is set to "No" (S1 & S2 CT indicator displays GREEN color when the Remote/
not connected to the rear terminals) (Figure 4-22), Local control is selected to Local position.
then the Single Line Diagram will not display current
values. The Device ON indicator displays GREEN color
and Device OFF indicator is not illuminated when
The Single Line Diagram screen also displays Delta the Device On/Off control is selected to Device On
Phase Angle, Delta Frequency and Delta Voltage position.
between the motor bus and the new source (the new
source is defined as the source to which the bus is The Device ON indicator is not illuminated and
being transferred). Device OFF indicator displays RED color when
the Device On/Off control is selected to Device Off
position.
3–14
ISScom – 3
Path: System / Monitor / Phasor Diagram
Figure 3-18 Phasor Diagram
Path: System / Monitor / Sync Scope
Figure 3-19 Sync Scope Screen
3–15
 NOTES:
1. If the S1/S2 CT Configuration is set to "No" (S1 & S2 not connected to the rear terminals)
(Figure 4-22), then the Single Line Diagram will not display current values.
2. The user may select either the primary or secondary values on the Single Line Diagram.
Path: System / Monitor / Single Line Diagram
Figure 3-20 Single Line Diagram (Primary Metering) or (Secondary Metering) Screen
3–16
ISScom – 3
System/Transfer Event Log • Open transition time (the time period from
The Transfer Event Log feature captures the following when the old source breaker status contact
parameters: opens to when the new source breaker
status contact closes)
• Start signal. The signals that trigger a • Close transition time in Hot Parallel Transfer
transfer are an external protective relay only (the time period from when the new
initiate, external undervoltage relay initiate, source breaker status contact closes to
internal automatic bus undervoltage relay when the old source breaker status contact
initiate, and manual initiate (either local, opens)
remote or through serial communications).
• Transfer completed: Fast, In-Phase,
• Source 1 voltage and current at time of trip Residual Voltage, Fixed Time or Hot
(or close) Parallel
• Source 2 voltage and current at time of
close (or trip)
A transfer can have up to four records. After 16
• Bus voltage at time of close (or trip) records have been stored, any new record will cause
• Delta Voltage between bus and new the oldest existing record to be lost. Each Transfer
source at time of close command (or trip Event Log parameter is time stamped with the date
command) and time in 1 ms increments.
• Delta Voltage between bus and new source The initiating event that starts the Transfer Event Log is
at the time of actual breaker close (or the "Start" signal for any transfer. A Transfer Event Log
breaker open) is considered complete when one of following occurs:
• Bus frequency, at time of close (or trip)
• When the breaker from the Old Source trips
• Bus rate of change of frequency at time of and the breaker to the New Source closes.
close (or trip)
• When a breaker failure occurs.
• Resultant Volts/Hertz at time of actual
• When the incomplete transfer timer times
breaker close
out.
• Element(s) Timed Out, for example: 27B,
81, 81R and 50BF Functions
The trigger and complete events are used to define
• Element(s) picked up, for example: 27B, the time frame during which the transfer event log is
81, 81R and 50BF Functions storing information. The Secondary Metering and
• Input/output contact status changes Status Screen (Figure 3-17) will display a status
when a complete Transfer Event Log has been
• Trip and close commands
stored. A reset feature is provided to clear this log
• Delta phase angle between bus and new through the serial communications. The Transfer
source at time of close command (or trip Event Log is available for viewing utilizing the M-3871
command) ISScom® Communications and Oscillograph Analysis
• Delta phase angle between bus and new Software.
source at time of actual breaker close (or
The Transfer Event Log menu selection opens a
breaker open)
submenu that includes the Download, View, Clear
• Delta frequency between bus and new Status and Clear History selections.
source at time of close command (or trip
command)
• Delta frequency between bus and new
source at time of actual breaker close (or
breaker open)
• Breaker closing time (the time period from
when the close command is issued to when
the new source’s breaker status contact
closes
• Breaker Opening Time
3–17
System/Transfer Event Log/Download 5. Select Details. ISScom will expand the

To download available Transfer Event Logs perform Transfer Event Log Viewer screen to
the following: include the Details section (Figure 3-24)
which includes additional Transfer Event
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu information.
select System/Transfer Event Log/
Download. ISScom® will display the
Transfer Event Log Record Download
screen (Figure 3-21) and indicate the
number of Transfer Events available for
download.
Figure 3-21 Transfer Event Log Record

Download Screen
2. Select Download. The Transfer Event Log Figure 3-22 Transfer Event Log Viewer
Record Download screen will display a
bar indicating the status of the download. 6. To print the Transfer Event Log Summary
When the download is complete the Save information select Print Summary.
As screen will be displayed with a default ISScom will print the Summary information
".log" file extension. to the default printer connected to the
3. Select the destination folder and name the computer. See Appendix D, Transfer
file, then select Save to save the Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.
Event Log Record or Cancel. 7. To print the Transfer Event Log Detail
information select Print Detail. ISScom
will print both the Summary and Detail
System/Transfer Event Log/View
information to the default printer
To view available Transfer Event Log Records connected to the computer. See Appendix
perform the following: D, Transfer Event Log Printout Sample.
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu 8. To view the System Status and Transfer
select System/Transfer Event Log/ Start Signal information select System
View. ISScom will display the Transfer Status and Transfer Start Signal.
Event Log Viewer screen (Figure 3-22). ISScom will display the System Status
and Transfer Start Signal Status screen
2. Select Open. ISScom will display the (Figure 3-25).
Open screen with a default ".log" file
extension. 9. To view the Transfer Event Log Pickup
Input and Output information, select
3. Select the location of the ".log" files, then Pickup I/Os. ISScom® will display the
select the file to be viewed. Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-26).
4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target
file in the Transfer Event Log Viewer
Summary screen (Figure 3-23).
3–18
ISScom – 3
Figure 3-23 Transfer Event Log File Summary Screen
Figure 3-24 Transfer Event Log File Summary and Details Screen
3–19
Figure 3-25 System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen
3–20
ISScom – 3
Figure 3-28 Transfer Event Log Status Cleared

Confirmation Screen
3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the

ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5).
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear History

The Clear History feature clears all Transfer Event
Logs stored on the MBTS.
To Clear the Transfer Event Log perform the following:
Figure 3-26 Transfer Event Log Pickup I/Os
Status Screen 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
System/Transfer Event Log/Clear Status Clear History. ISScom will display the
Clear Sequence of Events Records
The Clear Status feature resets the Transfer Event confirmation screen (Figure 3-29).
Log status.
To Clear the Transfer Event Log Status perform the
following:
Clear Status. ISScom will display
the Clear Transfer Event Log Status
confirmation screen (Figure 3-27). Figure 3-29 Transfer Event Log Clear History
Command Confirmation Screen
2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with

the Transfer Event Log Clear History
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-30).
Figure 3-27 Clear Transfer Event Log Status

2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the

Clear Transfer Event Log Status Cleared
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-28). Figure 3-30 Transfer Event Log History Cleared
Confirmation Screen

3–21
System/Sequence of Events Recorder The Sequence of Events Recorder submenu

The Sequence of Events Recorder stores every allows the user to Setup the events that trigger the
change in the input status, trip commands, close Sequence of Events Recorder, Download events
commands, any signal to initiate a transfer, type from the MBTS, View the parameters captured at
of transfer, change in any breaker status, and the time of the event and Clear the event recorder.
status reset. Each of these Running Events are System/Sequence of EventsRecorder/Setup
time stamped with the date and time in 1 ms
increments. The Running Event Log stores the last The Setup menu item displays the Sequence of
512 events, when a new event occurs the oldest Events Setup screen (Figure 3-31). See Section 4.1,
event is removed. The Secondary Metering and Unit Setup for detailed setup instructions.
Status Screen (Figure 3-17) will display a status Protective function Pickup, Time Out, Dropout and/
when a Sequence of Events recorded event has or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected to
been stored. A reset feature is provided to clear this trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder. Selecting
log through the serial communications. The events Save transmits the Sequence of Event settings to the
and the associated data are available for viewing MBTS. When not connected to the MBTS the Send
utilizing the M-3871 ISScom® Communications and selection saves the Sequence of Event settings to
Oscillographic Analysis Software. the open file.
Path: System / Sequence of Events Recorder / Setup
Figure 3-31 Sequence Of Events Setup
3–22
ISScom – 3
System/Sequence of Events Recorder/ System/Sequence of Events Recorder/View

Download The Sequence of Events viewer screen includes the
The Download selection downloads the events commands Open, Close, Print Summary, and Print
from the currently connected MBTS (events must Detail. Open opens a saved sequence of events file.
be retrieved from the MBTS and stored in a file in Close closes the print file. Print Summary prints an
order to view them). event summary, and Print Detail prints the detailed
event report. Clear deletes event history from the
To download available Sequence of Events perform control.
the following:
1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu To view available Sequence of Events Records
select System/Sequence of Events perform the following:
Recorder/Download. ISScom will
display the Sequence of Events Recorder 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
Download screen (Figure 3-32) and select System/Sequence of Events/
indicate the number of Sequence of View. ISScom will display the Sequence
Events Recorder Events available for of Events Viewer screen (Figure 3-33).
download.
Figure 3-32 Sequence of Events Recorder

Download Screen
2. Select Download, The Sequence of

Events Recorder Download screen
will display a bar indicating the status
of the download. When the download Figure 3-33 Sequence of Events Viewer
is complete the Save As screen will
be displayed with a default ".evt" file 2. Select Open. ISScom will display the
extension. Open screen with a default ".evt" file
extension.
3. Select the destination folder and name
the file, then select Save to save the 3. Select the location of the ".evt" files, then
Sequence of Events Record or Cancel. select the file to be viewed.
4. Select Open. ISScom will Open the target
file in the Sequence of Events Viewer
Summary screen (Figure 3-34).
5. Select Details. ISScom® will expand the
Sequence of Events Viewer screen to
include the Details section (Figure 3-35)
which includes additional Sequence of
Events information.
6. To print the Sequence of Events Summary
information select Print Summary.
ISScom will print the Summary information
to the default printer connected to the
computer. See Appendix E, Sequence
of Events Printout Sample.
3–23
Figure 3-34 Sequence of Events Summary Screen
Figure 3-35 Sequence of Events File Summary and Details Screen
3–24
ISScom – 3
7. To print the Sequence of Events 10. To view the System Status and Transfer
Detail information select Print Detail. Start Signal information select System
ISScom will print both the Summary Status and Transfer Start Signal.
and Detail information to the default ISScom will display the System Status
printer connected to the computer. and Transfer Start Signal Status screen
See Appendix E, Sequence of Events (Figure 3-40).
Printout Sample.
8. To view the Sequence of Events Pickup System/Sequence of Events/Clear
Input and Output information select The Clear feature clears all Sequence of Events
Pickup I/Os. ISScom will display the Records stored on the MBTS.
Pickup I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-36).
To Clear all Sequence of Events Records perform
the following:
select System/Sequence of Events/
Clear. ISScom will display the Clear
Sequence of Events Records confirmation
screen (Figure 3-38).
Figure 3-38 Clear Sequence of Events Record

Figure 3-36 Sequence of Events Pickup I/Os 2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with
Status Screen the Sequence of Events Records Cleared
confirmation Screen (Figure 3-39).
9. To view the Sequence of Events Dropout
Input and Output information select
Dropout I/Os. ISScom® will display the
Dropout I/Os Status screen (Figure 3-37).
Figure 3-39 Sequence of Events Record Cleared

Confirmation Screen

Figure 3-37 Sequence of Events Dropout I/Os

Status Screen
3–25
Figure 3-40 Sequence of Events System Status and Transfer Start Signal Status Screen
3–26
ISScom – 3
System/Oscillograph The following parameters are captured by the

The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive Oscillographic Recorder:
data recording of all monitored waveforms, and
• MBTS start (initiate) signal. It can be
status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The
manual transfer initiate, protective relay
total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16
initiate, or bus phase undervoltage initiate.
partitions. The number of samples per cycle used
to store the data is user selectable. The number • Source 1 and Source 2 breaker status
of samples per cycle that can be selected is 16 or (Closed or Open)
32 (50 or 60 Hz). The number of samples selected • Trip and close commands to the Source 1
effects the length of the data that can be saved and breaker
its resolution. The lower the number of samples, the • Trip and close commands to the Source 2
longer the record length that can be stored (but at a breaker
lower resolution).
• Source 1 voltage waveforms, single-phase
The oscillographic recorder is triggered by or three-phase
a designated control/status input (usually a • Source 2 voltage waveforms, single-phase
MBTS initiate input), a trip output, from serial or three-phase
communications, or a change in the breaker position. • Source 1 current waveforms, single-phase
If a 52a breaker status contact input has been if available
selected and it is going to be used to trigger the • Source 2 current waveforms, single-phase
oscillograph, the Trigger Dropout Input section of if available
the Oscillograph Setup must be used. Since the 52a • Bus voltage waveforms, single-phase or
contact is closed when the breaker is closed and three-phase
opens when the breaker is tripped, the oscillograph
• Delta Phase Angle
trigger must be activated when the 52a contact opens
or "drops out". • Delta frequency
• Inputs 1–6
When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores
waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent data • Outputs 1–8
in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-
trigger data, then continues to store data in memory
for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. The
records may be analyzed using ISScom, and are
also available in COMTRADE file format.
Path: System / Oscillograph / Setup
Figure 3-41 Setup Oscillograph Recorder
3–27
The Oscillograph submenu includes the Setup, System/Oscillograph/Retrieve

Retrieve, Trigger and Clear selections. The The Retrieve feature allows the user select the
Oscillograph recorder settings are not considered Oscillograph records to be retrieved (downloaded)
to be part of the Setpoint Profile. Recorder settings and to determine the save location on the PC.
are common to all profiles.
To Retrieve Oscillograph recorders perform the
System/Oscillograph/Setup following:
The Setup selection displays the Oscillograph Setup
screen (Figure 3-41) which allows the user to set the 1. From the ISScom ® Main Screen
number of records and triggering designations to menu select System/Oscillograph/
be made. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed Retrieve. ISScom will display the Retrieve
Oscillograph Records screen (Figure
setup instructions.
3-42).
2. Select the Oscillograph record to be
Retrieved (downloaded).
3. Select the destination folder (Browse) and
name the file, then select Save, the path
for the file will be displayed in the "File
Name Destination" window.
4. Select Retrieve, The screen will display a
bar indicating the status of the Retrieval.
When the download is complete ISScom
will display a Oscillograph Record
Retrieval complete message.
Path: System / Oscillograph / Retrieve
Figure 3-42 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Screen
3–28
ISScom – 3
System/Oscillograph/Trigger System/Oscillograph/Clear
The Trigger selection allows the user to manually The Clear feature clears all Oscillograph Records
trigger the Oscillograph. This can be confirmed stored on the MBTS.
by observing the Secondary Metering and Status
screen (Figure 3-17). To Clear all Oscillograph Recorder records perform
the following:
To manually Trigger the Oscillograph Recorder
perform the following: 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
select System/Oscillograph/Clear.
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu ISScom will display the Clear Oscillograph
select System/Oscillograph/Trigger. Record confirmation screen (Figure
ISScom will display the Oscillograph 3-45).
Manual Trigger confirmation screen
(Figure 3-43).
Figure 3-45 Clear Oscillograph Records

Figure 3-43 Oscillograph Manual Trigger
Command Confirmation Screen 2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the
Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command
2. Select YES, ISScom will respond with the Sent Screen (Figure 3-46)
Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command
Sent Screen (Figure 3-44).
Figure 3-46 Oscillograph Records

Cleared Screen
Figure 3-44 Trigger Oscillograph Recorder
Command Sent Screen 3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the
ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5)
3. Select OK, ISScom® will return to the
ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5)
3–29
System/Profile System/Profile/Copy Profile

The system supports four setpoint profiles. This The Copy Profile (Figure 3-48) feature copies the
feature allows multiple setpoint profiles to be defined active profile to one of four profiles (user should allow
for the type of transfer initiated (Automatic, Manual approximately 2 minutes for copying.)
or Hot Parallel) and the direction of the next transfer.
The Profile submenu provides two selections: Active
Profile, and Copy Profile.
System/Profile/Active Profile
Active Profile (Figure 3-47) allows user to designate
active profile. The user can select between four
profiles. If a profile is not saved into a profile the
profile will contain factory default settings.
▲ CAUTION: Switching the active profile when the
MBTS is on-line may cause unexpected operation if Figure 3-48 Copy Profile Dialog Screen
the wrong profile is selected.
System/Write File To System
▲ CAUTION: During Profile Switching, relay The Write File To System command is used to write
operation is disabled for approximately 1 second. a saved data file to the MBTS.
To perform a Write File To System command perform
the following:
1. From the ISScom Main Screen select

System/Write File To System. ISScom®
will display an OPEN dialog screen with
the default file extension of ".dat".
2. Browse to the location of the file to be
written to the MBTS, then select the target
file.
Figure 3-47 Select Active Profile Dialog Screen 3. Select OPEN, ISScom will write the file
contents to the target MBTS. When the
file has been successfully written to the
MBTS ISScom will display a File Written
Confirmation (Figure 3-49)
4. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom
Main Screen (Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-49 ISScom File Written to MBTS

Confirmation
3–30
ISScom – 3
System/Read Data From System Tools/System Access Codes/Comm Access

The Read Data From System command is used to The Comm Access selection displays the
read the data contained in the MBTS settings and Communication Access Code Reset screen (Figure
configuration to the ISScom program running on 3-51) which allows the user to reset the MBTS
the PC. Comm Access Code. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup
for detailed setup instructions.
To perform a Read Data From System command
proceed as follows: If additional link security is desired, a communication
access code can be programmed. Like the user
1. From the ISScom Main Screen select access codes, if the communication access code
System/Read Data From System. is set to 9999 (default), communication security is
ISScom will read the data from the target disabled.
MBTS and when complete display a
confirmation screen (Figure 3-50).
Figure 3-50 ISScom Data Reading Successful

Confirmation Screen
Figure 3-51 Communication Access Code Reset
2. Select OK, ISScom will return the ISScom Dialog Screen
Main Screen (Figure 3-5).
Tools/System Access Codes/User Access
Tools Menu The User Access selection displays the User Access
Codes Reset screen (Figure 3-52) which allows
the user to reset the MBTS User Access Codes.
See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed setup
instructions.
The MBTS includes three levels of access codes.
Depending on their assigned code, users have
varying levels of access to the installed functions.
1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints, monitor
status, view status history.
2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1 privileges,
plus read & change setpoints, target
The Tools menu provides the user with access to history, set time clock.
ISScom® MBTS support features and Functions. 3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges,
plus access to all configuration functions
Tools/System Access Codes and settings.
The System Access Codes menu item includes the
Comm Access and User Access code submenus.
Each access code is a user‑defined one- to four-
digit number. Access codes can only be altered by
a level 3 user.
3–31
If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access User Logo Line
code feature is disabled. When access codes are The user logo is a programmable, two-line by
disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all 24‑character string, which can be used to identify the
users have full access to all the MBTS menus. The MBTS, and which is displayed locally during power
device is shipped from the factory with the access up after Self Test completion. This information is also
code feature disabled. available in ISScom.
User Control Number
The User Control Number is a user-defined value
which can be used for inventory or identification. The
unit does not use this value, but it can be accessed
through the HMI or the communications interface,
and can be read remotely.
System OK LED
The green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the
unit’s microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM OK LED
Figure 3-52 User Access Codes Reset Dialog indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also
Screen be programmed to be continuously illuminated.
Tools/Miscellaneous Setup
The Miscellaneous Setup menu selection displays
the Miscellaneous Setup screen (Figure 3-53) which
provides the user with the ability to edit/input the
User Logo lines of the HMI display, enter/edit the
User Control Number and set the operating mode
of the System OK LED. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup
for detailed setup instructions.
Figure 3-53 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen
3–32
ISScom – 3
Tools/System Outputs Test Tools/System Comm Setup

The System Outputs Test menu selection displays The System Comm Setup menu selection displays
the System Outputs Test screen (Figure 3-54) which the System Communication Setup screen (Figure
provides the user with the ability to test each ouput 3-55) which provides the user with the ability to set
relay. See Section 6, Testing for detailed testing the System’s COM Port communication parameters.
instructions. Also, when selected ISScom® will display a message
identifying which COM Port is currently being
used. See Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed
communication setup instructions.
Figure 3-54 System Outputs Test Dialog Screen
Figure 3-55 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen
3–33
Tools/System Ethernet Setup Tools/System Firmware Update

The System Ethernet Setup menu selection displays The System Firmware Update selection allows the
the Ethernet Setup screen (Figure 3-56) which user to update MBTS firmware version in the field.
provides the user with the ability to set the System’s
Detailed step by step instructions will be provided by
Ethernet Port communication parameters. See
Beckwith Electric regarding Field Firmware Updates.
Section 4.1, Unit Setup for detailed communication
setup instructions.
Tools/Calibrate Unit
The Calibrate Unit menu selection provides the
user with instructions to recalibrate Nominal Voltage,
Current and Frequency. See Section 6, Testing for
detailed MBTS calibration instructions.
Tools/System Error Codes / Counters

The System Error Codes / Counters menu selection
displays the System Error Codes / Output Counters
screen (Figure 3-57) which provides the user with
the ability to view and clear system Error Codes,
Processor Resets, Alarm Counters, Power Loss
Counter and Output Counters. Also, Checksums can
be viewed for Calibration and Setpoints. See Section
2.2, Manual Operation for detailed instructions.
Figure 3-56 Ethernet Settings
Figure 3-57 System Error Codes / Output Counters Dialog Screen
3–34
ISScom – 3
Window Menu/Help Menu The About ISScom® command displays ISScom

version and development information (Figure 3-58).
Also, this screen displays unit information.
The Window menu enables the positioning and

arrangement of all ISScom windows so that there
is better access to available functions. This feature
allows the display of several windows at the same
time. Clicking on an inactive window activates that
window.
The Help menu provides two commands. The

Contents command initiates a link to a PDF
(Portable Document File) version of this instruction Figure 3-58 About ISScom Dialog Box
book for easy reference. An Adobe Acrobat® reader
is required to view this document. The M‑4172
Instruction Book has been Bookmarked. By selecting
the "Navigator pane’ in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the
user can directly access selected topics.
3–35
3.2 ISSplot
ISSplot allows the user to plot and print waveform

data downloaded from a Beckwith Electric MBTS.
The ISSplot feature is also capable of plotting and
printing waveform data files that are in COMTRADE
format.
When the ISSplot menu item is selected, ISSplot
is launched in an independent WindowsTM Window.
The ISSplot Main Screen and menu bar is displayed
(Figure 3-59). The ISSplot Menu Structure and
Submenu Callouts are illustrated in Figure 3-60.
Figure 3-59 ISSplot Main Screen
3–36
ISScom – 3
Figure 3-60 ISSplot Menu Structure and Submenu Callouts
3–37
ISSplot File Menu ISSplot Select New Source for Delta Angle
The ISSplot File menu allows the user to open an Allows the user to select Source 1 or Source 2.
oscillograph file previously downloaded by ISScom®.
ISScom supports COMTRADE format data files (file
extension *.cfg). The File menu also permits the user
to preview and print selected oscillographs. Exit
closes the ISSplot program.
ISSplot View Menu
ISSplot Select Waveforms

Allows the selection of voltages, currents, inputs, and
outputs to be plotted or printed.
Figure 3-61 Select Waveforms Dialog Screen

The View menu allows the user to select Toolbar and ISSplot Change Colors
Status Bar for display.
Allows the user to change waveform colors for
customized plotting.
ISSplot Settings Menu
The Settings menu allows the selection of the new

source (1 or 2) for Delta Angle, waveforms to be
displayed, the formatting of display colors, and the
ability to change the waveform scaling.
Figure 3-62 Change Colors Dialog Screen
3–38
ISScom – 3
 NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow on a bar and dragging
the mouse. Double click the left key to position one cursor bar and Shift‑Double Click or left mouse
down and click the right key to position the other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.
Figure 3-63 Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data
3–39
ISSplot Change Scale ISSplot Window Menu/Help Menu

Allows the individual designation of a magnitude
scale for voltage and current traces.
ISSplot Default
Sets all similar waveforms to the same scale (largest).
ISSplot Auto All The Window menu enables the positioning and
Allows ISSplot to set the scale for each individual arrangement of multiple ISSplot windows at the same
waveform. time. Selecting any displayed window activates that
frame, allowing manipulation of the data.
The Help menu provides information about ISSplot

menus and commands. The About command
provides version information for ISSplot.
ISSplot makes use of shortcut key commands for
many functions, making ISSplot as easy as clicking
your mouse and touching a few keys.
Figure 3-64 Change Scale Dialog Screen
Key Strokes Action

Left‑Mouse button down and drag, or select zoom in
Magnify the selected area in main display
icon on toolbar menu
Left‑mouse double click Move Marker #1 to current position in main display
Shift + Left‑mouse double‑click or left‑mouse down and

Move Marker #2 to current position in main display
right‑mouse click
Align cursor on Marker #1 and drag Drag Marker #1 in main display
Align cursor on Marker #2 and drag Drag Marker #2 in main display
Current and voltage selection menu in main display

Right‑mouse down
Voltage and Current in the Phase diagram
Left key or select left scroll icon in toolbar menu Move left in main display
Right key or select right scroll icon in toolbar menu Move right in main display
Home key or select move to beginning icon in toolbar

Move to the beginning of the record in the main display
menu
End key or select move to end icon in toolbar menu Move to the end of the record in the main display
Table 3-1 ISSplot Shortcut Keys
3–40
ISScom – 3
Figure 3-65 ISSplot Toolbar
Delta value between

Marker #1 and
Marker #2.
MARKER #2
MARKER #1
Value at Marker #1
Value at Marker #2
All analog traces. This view

shows peak values. RMS values
may also be displayed.
Scaling for each analog trace.

This can be set automatically or
manually adjusted.
Time at
Marker #1
Time at
Marker #2
Time difference between Markers
Time at Marker #1
Control status input
and contact output Date and Timestamp Time of Trip
traces (discrete I/O) Time at Marker #2
for record Command
QQ NOTE: Cursor bars may be dragged to any location by positioning the cursor arrow on a bar and dragging
the mouse. Double click the left key to position one cursor bar and Shift-Double Click or double
click the right key to position the other cursor bar at the current cursor arrow time position.
Figure 3-66 ISSplot Screen with Callouts
3–41
3–42
System Setup and Setpoints – 4
4 System Setup and Setpoints

4.1 Unit Setup................................................................................ 4–1
4.2 System Setup ....................................................................... 4–24
4.3 System Diagrams................................................................... 4–29
4.4 System Setpoints................................................................... 4–36
Chapter four is designed for the person or group

responsible for the Unit Setup, System Setup and 4.1 Unit Setup
System Setpoints of the M-4172 Digital Motor Bus
Transfer System (MBTS).  NOTE: Setup Record Forms are contained in
Appendix A. The Setup Record Form
Chapter 4 consists of: tables list the MBTS parameter settings
choices for each feature and function.
• Functional and connection diagrams for a
typical application of the MBTS.
GENERAL UNIT SETUP
• The Unit Setup Section, which consists
of general unit setup information, The General Unit setup consists of the setup of the
Communications setup, Oscillograph following features and functions:
setup and Transfer Event Log setup. • Comm Access Code
• The System Setup Section provides • User Access Codes
the definitions of system quantities and
equipment characteristics required • User Logo Lines
by the MBTS which include CT, VT • User Control Number
configuration selection and Input and • OK LED Flash
Output assignments.
• Time and Date
• A System Setpoints Section which
describes the unit transfer settings,
enabling functions and setpoints, output COMM ACCESS CODE
contact assignments and digital input If additional link security is desired, a communication
assignments. access code can be programmed. Like the user
access codes, if the communication access code
The selection of the MBTS System Setup parameters is set to 9999 (default), communication security is
and Setpoints is performed using the M-3871 disabled.
ISScom® Communications and Oscillographic
Analysis Software. However, some setup information
can also be entered from the unit’s M‑3931 Front
Panel Human Machine Interface (HMI), and will be
included where applicable.
4–1
ISScom® Comm Access Code Setup HMI Comm Access Code Setup
To set the MBTS Comm Access Code perform the 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
following: 2. If Level Access is active, the following is
 NOTE: Communication must be established with displayed:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu 0
select Tools/System Access Code/
Comm Access. ISScom will display the a. Input the required Access Code, then
Communication Access Code Reset press ENTER.
dialog screen(Figure 4-1). b. If the proper Access Code has been
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
c. Go to step 4.

Figure 4-1 Communication Access Code Reset
Dialog Screen I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
2. Enter the desired New Communication
Access Code (1-9999), then re-enter 4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until
(confirmation) the New Access Code. the following is displayed:
3. Select OK, ISScom will display a
Communication Access Code Sent C
OMMUNICATION
Confirmation Screen (Figure 4-2). stat COMM setup


displayed:
C
OM1 SETUP

Figure 4-2 Communication Access Code Sent 6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until
Confirmation Screen the following is displayed:
4. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main COMM ACCESS CODE

Screen. ACCSS eth eth_ip

The new Communication Access Code
will not be in affect until communications 7. Press ENTER, the following will be
have been closed with the MBTS for displayed:
approximately 2.5 minutes.
COMM ACCESS CODE

9999
4–2
8. Input the desired Comm Access Code ISScom User Access Codes Setup
as follows: To set the MBTS User Access Codes perform the
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow following:
pushbuttons select the desired first  NOTE: Communication must be established with
digit. the target MBTS for this procedure.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton
once, then repeat the previous step
as necessary to input the desired 1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu
Comm Access Code digits. select Tools/System Access Code/
User Access. ISScom will display the
c. When the desired Comm Access User Access Code Reset dialog screen
Code has been input, then press (Figure 4-3).
ENTER. The following will be
displayed:
COMM ACCESS CODE

ACCESS eth eth_ip

9. Press EXIT.
USER ACCESS CODES

The MBTS includes three levels of access codes.
Depending on their assigned code, users have
varying levels of access to the installed functions.
Figure 4-3 User Access Codes
Reset Dialog Screen
1. Level 1 Access = Read setpoints,
monitor status, view status history. 2. Enter the desired New User Access Code
2. Level 2 Access = All of level 1 privileges, (1-9999), then re-enter (confirmation) the
plus read & change setpoints, target New User Access Code.
history, set time clock. 3. Select OK, ISScom will display a New
3. Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges, User Access Code Sent Confirmation
plus access to all configuration functions Screen (Figure 4-4).
and settings.
Each access code is a user‑defined one- to four-

digit number. Access codes can only be altered by
a level 3 user.
If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the access
code feature is disabled. When access codes are
disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all Figure 4-4 New User Access Code Sent
users have full access to all the MBTS menus. The Confirmation Screen
device is shipped from the factory with the access
code feature disabled. 4. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main
Screen.
4–3
HMI User Access Codes Setup 7. Press ENTER, the following will be
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton. displayed:
displayed: L
EVEL #1
9999
ENTER ACCESS CODE

8. Input the desired User Access Code as
0 follows:
a. Input the required Access Code, then a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow
press ENTER. pushbuttons select the desired first
digit.
entered, the HMI will return: b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton
as necessary to input the desired
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
Access Code.
A
ccess Granted! c. When the desired Access Code has
been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed:
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
ENTER ACCESS CODE

c. Go to step 4. LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3

3. If Level Access is not active, then the 9. To set User Access Code Level #2
following is displayed: press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton to
select LEVEL #2, then press ENTER the
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
L
EVEL #2
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until 9999
10. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level
#2 User Access Code.
S
ETUP UNIT
11. To set User Access Code Level #3
stat comm SETUP
press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton to
select LEVEL #3, then press ENTER the
5. If User Access Codes are to be set, following will be displayed:
then use the RIGHT arrow pushbutton
to select ALTER ACCESS CODES. The
following will be displayed: L
EVEL #3
9999
ALTER ACCESS CODES

12. Repeat Step 8 to enter the desired Level
vers sn ACCESS number
#3 User Access Code.
6. Press ENTER, the following will be 13. Press the EXIT pushbutton will return to
displayed: the previous selection screen:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

ALTER ACCESS CODES

LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3
vers sn ACCESS number

4–4
USER LOGO LINE 4. If enabling/disabling the System OK

The user logo is a programmable, two-line by LED Flash operation, then select either
24‑character string, which can be used to identify the Enable of Disable.
MBTS, and which is displayed locally when the unit 5. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main
is idle. This information is also available in ISScom®. Screen.
USER CONTROL NUMBER HMI User Logo Line Setup

This is a user-defined value which can be used for 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
inventory or identification. The unit does not use this
value, but it can be accessed through the HMI or the 2. If Level Access is active, the following is
communications interface, and can be read remotely. displayed:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

SYSTEM OK LED
0
The green SYSTEM OK LED is controlled by the
unit’s microprocessor. A flashing SYSTEM OK LED
indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also a. Input the required Access Code, then
be programmed to be continuously illuminated. press ENTER.
ISScom User Logo Line, User control Number
and System OK LED Setup LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

To set the MBTS User Logo Line, User Control
A
ccess Granted!
Number and System OK LED perform the following:
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu c. Go to step 4.
select Tools/Miscellaneous Setup.
ISScom will display the Miscellaneous
Setup dialog screen (Figure 4-5).
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal

S
ETUP UNIT
stat comm SETUP


displayed:
Figure 4-5 Miscellaneous Dialog Screen
S
OFTWARE VERSION
2. If entering/editing the User Logo lines,
then enter the desired User Logo Lines. VERS sn access number

3. If changing the User Control Number, 6. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until
then enter the desired User Control the following is displayed:
Number.
USER LOGO LINE 1

LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm

4–5
7. Press ENTER, the following will be 11. Input the desired User Logo Line 2 as
displayed: follows:
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow
USER LOGO LINE 1
pushbuttons select the desired first
_BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
letter/symbol/digit/blank space.
b. Press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton
8. Input the desired User Logo Line 1 as once, then repeat the previous step
follows: as necessary to input the desired
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow User Logo Line 2.
pushbuttons select the desired first c. When the desired User Logo Line 2
letter/symbol/digit/blank space. has been input, then press ENTER.
b. Press the Right arrow pushbutton The following will be displayed:
as necessary to input the desired USER LOGO LINE 2

User Logo Line 1.
—
WAIT—
c. When the desired User Logo Line 1
has been input, then press ENTER.
The following will be displayed: USER LOGO LINE 2

logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm

USER LOGO LINE 1

12. Press EXIT.
—
WAIT—
HMI User Control Number Setup

USER LOGO LINE 1

LOGO 1 logo 2 alrm

9. To enter a User Logo Line 2 press the displayed:
RIGHT arrow pushbutton once, the
following will be displayed: ENTER ACCESS CODE

0
USER LOGO LINE 2

logo 1 LOGO 2 alrm
press ENTER.
10. Press ENTER, the following will be b. If the proper Access Code has been
displayed: entered, the HMI will return:
USER LOGO LINE 2

LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

_ M-4172 A
ccess Granted!
INIT TRANSFER

INIT rmte_lcal
c. Go to step 4.

I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4–6
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until HMI System OK LED Setup
the following is displayed: 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton.
S
ETUP UNIT 2. If Level Access is active, the following is
displayed:
stat comm SETUP

ENTER ACCESS CODE

displayed: 0
S
OFTWARE VERSION a. Input the required Access Code, then
press ENTER.

the following is displayed: LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

USER CONTROL NUMBER
A
ccess Granted!
vers sn access NUMBER

I
NIT TRANSFER
7. Press ENTER, the following will be INIT rmte_lcal
displayed:
c. Go to step 4.
USER CONTROL NUMBER

1 3. If Level Access is not active, then the
8. Input the desired User Control Number
as follows: I
NIT TRANSFER
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow INIT rmte_lcal
digit. ▲ CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton when protected equipment is in service. Entering
once, then repeat the previous step DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in
as necessary to input the desired service removes all protective functions of the MBTS.
User Control Number. 4. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the
c. When the desired User Control following is displayed:
Number has been input, then
press ENTER. The following will be SETUP UNIT

displayed:

 stat comm SETUP 
USER CONTROL NUMBER

displayed:
vers sn access NUMBER

9. Press Exit. SOFTWARE VERSION

VERS sn access number 

6. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the

DIAGNOSTIC MODE

 time error eth DIAG
4–7
7. Press ENTER, the following warning will SYSTEM CLOCK

be displayed: This feature allows the user to set the MBTS internal
clock. The clock is used to time stamp system events
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!
such as transfers and oscillograph operations.
ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

The clock is disabled when shipped from the
factory (indicated by "80" seconds appearing on
▲ CAUTION: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE
the clock) to preserve battery life. If the MBTS is to
when protected equipment is in service. Entering
be unpowered for an extended length of time, the
DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in
clock should be stopped (from Diagnostic Mode
service removes all protective functions of the MBTS.
or ISScom® Figure 4-6). If the IRIG‑B interface is
used, the hours, minutes, and seconds information
8. Press ENTER, the relay will reset and
in the clock will be synchronized with IRIG‑B time
DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily
information every hour.
displayed followed by:
The MBTS can accept a modulated IRIG‑B
OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)
signal using the rear panel BNC connector, or a
O
UTPUT input led module  demodulated TTL level signal using extra pins on
the rear panel COM2 RS‑232 interface connector
9. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until (see Figure B-4 for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signal
the following is displayed: is to be used, then Jumper 5 will be required to be
positioned (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches
FLASH SYS OK LED
and Jumpers).
com3
clock LED cal 
ISScom Set Date/Time
10. Press ENTER, the following will be To set the MBTS Date/Time perform the following:
displayed:
FLASH SYS OK LED

off
ON 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
select System/Setup/Set Date/Time.
11. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow ISScom will display the Set Date/Time
pushbuttons select either ON or OFF. dialog screen (Figure 4-6).
displayed:
FLASH SYS OK LED

–
DONE–

displayed:
FLASH SYS OK LED

com3
clock LED cal 
Figure 4-6 Set Date/Time Dialog Screen
14. Press EXIT, the following will be
displayed: 2. If setting the Date and Time to the
connected PC Date and Time then:
PRESS EXIT TO
a. Select "PC Time". ISScom will display
EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE
a "write values to unit?" confirmation
screen.
15. Press EXIT, the unit will cycle through b. Select "Yes". The Time and Date
the Power Self Tests. will be set to the PC Time and Date.
ISScom will then return to the main
screen.
4–8
3. If setting the Date and Time manually 5. Press ENTER, then press the RIGHT
then: arrow pushbutton until the following is
displayed:
a. Select "Relay Time".
b. Enter the desired Date and Time. DATE & TIME

c. Select "Save". ISScom will display a  TIME
error eth diag
"write values to unit?" confirmation
screen. 6. Press ENTER, the following will be
d. Select "Yes". The Time and Date will displayed:
be set to the desired Time and Date.
ISScom will then return to the main DATE & TIME

screen.
0
8-Jan-2001 00:00:80
HMI SET DATE and TIME
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton. displayed:
displayed: DATE & TIME

01 Year
ENTER ACCESS CODE

0 8. Input the desired Year as follows:
a. Input the required Access Code, then pushbuttons select the desired first
press ENTER. digit.
b. If the proper Access Code has been b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton
entered, the HMI will return: once, then repeat the previous step
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

Year.
A
ccess Granted! c. When the desired Year has been
input, then press ENTER. The
I
NIT TRANSFER following will be displayed:
INIT rmte_lcal
DATE & TIME

c. Go to step 4. J
AN feb mar apr may 
3. If Level Access is not active, then the 9. Input the desired Month as follows:
a. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow
I
NIT TRANSFER pushbuttons select the desired
Month.
INIT rmte_lcal
b. When the desired Month has been
4. Press the RIGHT arrow pushbutton until selected, then press ENTER. The
the following is displayed: following will be displayed:
S
ETUP UNIT DATE & TIME

stat comm SETUP

8 Date
4–9
10. Input the desired Date as follows: 13. Input the desired Minutes as follows:
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow
pushbuttons select the desired Date pushbuttons select the desired first
first digit. digit.
b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton
once, then repeat the previous step once, then repeat the previous step
as necessary to input the desired as necessary to input the desired
date. Minute(s).
c. When the desired Date has been c. When the desired Minutes have
input, then press ENTER. The been input, then press ENTER. The
following will be displayed: following will be displayed:
DATE & TIME

DATE & TIME

SUN
mon tue wed thu  16 Seconds
11. Input the desired Day as follows: 14. Input the desired Seconds as follows:
a. Utilizing the Right or Left arrow a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow
pushbuttons select the desired Day. pushbuttons select the desired first
b. When the desired Day has been digit.
selected, then press ENTER. The b. Press the Left arrow pushbutton
following will be displayed: once, then repeat the previous step
Seconds.
DATE & TIME

c. When the desired Seconds have
01 Hour been input, then press ENTER. The
12. Input the desired Hour as follows:
a. Utilizing the Up and Down arrow DATE & TIME

digit.  TIME
error eth diag
Hour.
c. When the desired Hour has been
input, then press ENTER. The
DATE & TIME

13 Minutes
4–10
COMMUNICATION SETUP Serial Port (RS-485)

Communication setup can be accomplished utilizing  NOTE: COM3 can be disabled for security
either ISScom® or the HMI. The Communication purposes from the communications
setup consists of the setup of the following features HMI menu. A Level 2 Access Code is
and functions: required.
• COM Port definitions and Device Address COM3 located on the rear terminal block of the
M‑4172 is an RS-485, 2-wire connection. Appendix
• Ethernet Port Settings
B, Figure B-3 illustrates a 2-wire RS-485 network.
• Installing Modems
Individual remote addressing also allows for
communications through a serial multidrop network.
Serial Ports (RS-232)
Up to 32 MBTSs can be connected using the same
 NOTE: COM1 and COM2 can be disabled 2 wire RS-485 communications line.
for secur ity pur poses from the
communications HMI menu. A Level 2
Access Code is required. Direct Connection
In order for ISScom to communicate with the relay
Two serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, are using direct serial connection, a serial "null modem"
standard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P)
The front-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally for the system, and an applicable connector for the
set and interrogate the MBTS using a temporary computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a
connection to a PC or laptop computer. The second null modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,
RS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of the Communications.
unit. COM2 is unavailable for communications when
the optional ethernet port is enabled. However, the An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423)
Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the is available from the factory, for direct connection
COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled. between a PC and the relay’s front panel COM port,
or the rear COM2 port.
Figure 4-7 System Communication Setup Dialog Screen
4–11
When fabricating communication cables, every Device Address

effort should be made to keep cabling as short as Individual MBTS Device Addresses should be
possible. Low capacitance cable is recommended. between 1 and 255. The default Device Address is 1.
The RS‑232 standard specifies a maximum cable
length of 50 feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50
feet of cable length is required, other technologies
should be investigated.
Other communication topologies are possible using
the M-4172 Digital Motor Bus Transfer System.
An Application Note, "Serial Communication with
Beckwith Electric’s Integrated Protection System
Relays" is available from the factory or from our
website at www.beckwithelectric.com.
STATUS

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR 81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR
ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM
r
INPUT 2 INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
r OUTPUTS
STATUS

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR
ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM

r

INPUT 2 INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
r OUTPUTS
STATUS

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR 81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
STATUS
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM

r

INPUT 2 INPUT 5
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. 27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK INPUT 3 INPUT 6
M-4172 FAST TRANS OP DELTA VOLTAGE OK r OUTPUTS

RES V/FIXED– TIME TRANS OP FAST/PARAL TRANS READY OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR
ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM

r

INPUT 2 INPUT 5 STATUS
INPUT 3 INPUT 6 BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. 27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK

r OUTPUTS r PARAL TRANS/AUTO TRIP OP

NEW SOURCE VOLT BLOCK
BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK
EXIT ENTER OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7 M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR 81/81R BUS FREQ/ROCOF
TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR
ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM

r

OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8 INPUT 2 INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
r OUTPUTS
STATUS

BUS VT LOSS BLOCK
INCOMP TRANS BLOCK

TRIP SOURCE 1 BRKR
ALARM OUTPUT BLOCK
TRIP SOURCE 2 BRKR
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM

r

INPUT 2 INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
r OUTPUTS
Figure 4-8 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter
4–12
ISScom COM Port Definitions and System’s 8. When the COM Port settings have been
Communication Address entered, then select Save. ISScom will
To setup the COM Ports and Communication display the COM Port Settings Warning
Addresses perform the following: Screen (Figure 4-9).

1. From the ISScom ® Main Screen

menu select Tools/System Comm
Setup. ISScom will display the System
Communication Setup dialog screen
(Figure 4-7).
The System COM Port that is in use will
be indicated at the top of the display. Figure 4-9 COM Port Settings Warning Screen
2. Select the desired COM Port to be setup
(1, 2 or 3). 9. Select Yes, ISScom® will display the
COM Port Setting Verification screen
3. Enter the desired "Dead Sync Time" (2 (Figure 4-10).
to 3000 msec).
This delay establishes the line idle time
to re-sync packet communication. Dead
sync time should be programmed based
on the channel’s baud rate.
Baud Rate Dead-Sync Time

9600 4 ms
4800 8 ms
2400 16 ms Figure 4-10 COM Port Setting
1200 32 ms Verification Screen
Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time 10. Verify the settings, then select Yes,
ISScom will return to the Main screen.
4. Enter the desired "Baud Rate" (1200
to 9600). COM2 and COM3 share the
same baud rate (see Section 5.5, Circuit
Board Switches and Jumpers).
5. Enter the desired "Stop Bits" value (1 or
2).
6. Enter the desired "Parity" (None, odd or
even).
7. E n t e r t h e d e s i r e d " S y s t e m ’s
Communication Address" (1 to 255).
The individual addressing capability of
ISScom® and the MBTS allows multiple
systems to share a direct or modem
connection when connected through
COM2 using a communications-line
splitter (Figure 4-8). One such device
enables 2 to 6 units to share one
communications line. Appendix B,
Figure B-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232
Fiber Optic network.
4–13
HMI COM Port Enable/Disable, Definitions and 8. Press ENTER, the following will be
Device Address displayed:
COM1 BAUD RATE

displayed: b
aud_4800 BAUD_9600
ENTER ACCESS CODE

as necessary to select the desired baud
0 rate.
a. Input the required Access Code, then 10. Press ENTER, the following will be
press ENTER. displayed:
COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME


50 ms
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted! 11. Input the desired Dead Sync Time as
follows:
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal digit.
c. Go to step 4. once, then repeat the previous step
3. If Level Access is not active, then the Dead Sync Time.
c. When the desired Dead Sync Time
I
NIT TRANSFER has been input, then press ENTER.
The following will be displayed:
INIT rmte_lcal
COM1
PARITY
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until NONE odd even

C
ommunication as necessary to select the desired Parity
stat COMM setup
setting.
5. Press ENTER, the following will be displayed:
displayed:
COM1 STOP BITS

C
OM1 SETUP
1

14. Utilizing the Up or Down arrow
6. Press ENTER, the following will be pushbuttons select the desired Stop Bits.
displayed:
P
ORT ACCESS displayed:
enable
DISABLE C
OM1 SETUP
7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbutton COM1 com2 com3 com_adr

as necessary to enable or disable the
COM port. 16. Selecting COM2 or COM 3 will activate
the same menu choices as displayed
with the selection of COM1. Repeat as
necessary to setup the remaining COM
Ports.
4–14
ETHERNET COMMUNICATION SETTINGS These services allow a user to monitor all metering
The optional RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled values, change settings and also generate
utilizing either ISScom® from the Ethernet Settings unsolicited reports. The metering values are
menu or from the HMI Communication menu. When reported in the metering and measurement nodes
the ethernet port is enabled the COM2 Serial Port data classes (MMTR, MMXU), the setpoints and
is not available for communications. However, the configuration settings are viewed and modified in
Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used through the the protection function nodes and system logical
COM2 Port when ethernet is enabled. nodes data classes (PTOV, PTUV, etc.). These data
classes are defined by the 61850-7-4 document.
The following parameters must be set for proper Furthermore, the M‑4172 is compatible with the
ethernet communication: IEC 61850 substation configuration language (SCL),
making the data set for the report control block highly
DHCP PROTOCOL configurable. In addition to the generation of reports
due to a change in a data value, e.g., a change in
ENABLE: If the network server supports the DHCP
pickup status of a protective function, the M‑4172
protocol the network server will assign the IP
also supports an integrity period, where a report
Address, Net Mask and Gateway Address.
control block is transmitted to the connected SCADA
DISABLE: If the network server does not support system at the expiration of the integrity period.
the DHCP protocol or the user chooses to manually ISScom Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP
input ethernet settings, then obtain the IP Address,
Net Mask and Gateway address from the Network  NOTE: Communication must be established with
Administrator and enter the settings. the target MBTS for this procedure.

ETHERNET PROTOCOLS select Tools/System Ethernet Setup.
The Standard Port Number for the MODBUS over ISScom will display the Ethernet Setup
TCP/IP protocol is 502. The master device may screen (Figure 4-11).
require the entry of the Standard Port Number.
IEC 61850 – The Ethernet option with IEC 61850

protocol has the capability of 4 concurrent sessions
of IEC 61850 communication. When Ethernet
is purchased with IEC 61850 protocol, no other
protocol may be selected. The services provided
by the IEC 61850 protocol include:
DynAssociation – dynamic building of data
association
GetDirectory – service to read the contents of a
server
GetDataObjectDefinition – service to retrieve data
definitions
DataObjectDirectory – service to get data defined Figure 4-11 Ethernet Setup Screen
in a logical node
GetDataSetValue – service to retrieve all data 2. Select Ethernet Enable.
values of a data set 3. Select DHCP Protocol Enable.
SetDataSetValue – service to write data
4. Select Save. The ethernet board is now
DataSetDirectory – service to write data information configured for use and may be accessed
of the members of a data set through a network.
ReadWrite – basic Read and Write to get data, set
data and operate
ConfReportControl – report configuration
GetCBValues – read values of a control block
4–15
ISScom Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP 6. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
 NOTE: Communication must be established with ETH (Upper Case).
E
THERNET SETUP
1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu  access ETH eth_ip

select Tools/System Ethernet Setup.
ISScom will display the Ethernet Setup
displayed:
2. Select Ethernet Enable.
3. Select DHCP Protocol Disable. E
THERNET
D ISABLE enable
4. Enter values for IP Address, Net Mask
and Gateway. 8. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select
5. Select Save. The ethernet board is now ENABLE (Upper Case), then press
configured for use and may be accessed ENTER, the following will be displayed:
through a network.
T
CP/IP SETTINGS
HMI Ethernet Port Setup T CP_SETTINGS
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:
displayed:
D
HCP PROTOCOL
NTER ACCESS CODE
E D ISABLE enable
0
10. If the network does not support the DHCP
a. Input the required Access Code, then protocol, then go to Manual Configuration
press ENTER. of Ethernet Board (following page) to
manually configure the ethernet board.
entered, the HMI will return: 11. If the DHCP Protocol is to be enabled,
then use the Right/Left arrow pushbutton
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)
to select ENABLE (Upper Case), then
A
ccess Granted! press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
I
NIT TRANSFER T
CP/IP SETTINGS
INIT rmte_lcal T CP_SETTINGS
c. Go to step 4. 12. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will

reconfigure and the following will be
3. If Level Access is not active, then the displayed:
I
NIT TRANSFER C
ONFIGURING ETH...
INIT rmte_lcal
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until If the ethernet board successfully obtains
the following is displayed: an IP Address the following will be
displayed for approximately 2 seconds:
C
OMMUNICATION
THERNET IP ADDRESS
E
stat COMM setup

xx.xx.xx.xx
displayed: The ethernet board is now configured
for use and may be accessed through
a network. The display will return to the
C
OM1 SETUP
following:
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr 

4–16
6. Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select

E
THERNET SETUP ETH (Upper Case).
 access ETH eth_ip

E
THERNET SETUP
If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IP
 access ETH eth_ip

Address within 15 seconds the following
will be displayed (for approximately 2
seconds): 7. Press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
C
ONFIGURING ETH...
E
THERNET
ETH BOARD ERROR

D ISABLE enable
Contact the Network Administrator to
determine the cause of the configuration 8. Ensure that ENABLE is selected (Upper
failure. Case).
If ENABLE is not selected (Upper Case),
then use the Left arrow pushbutton to
HMI Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board
select ENABLE.
2. If Level Access is active, the following is displayed:
displayed:
D
HCP PROTOCOL
NTER ACCESS CODE
E
D ISABE enable
0
10. Ensure that DISABLE is selected (upper
a. Input the required Access Code, then case). If DISABLE is not selected, then
press ENTER. use the left arrow pushbutton to select
b. If the proper Access Code has been DISABLE.
entered, the HMI will return: 11. Press ENTER, the following will be
displayed:
EVEL #(1,2 or 3)
L
A
ccess Granted! I
P ADDRESS
X X.XX.XX.XX
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal 12. Enter the desired IP Address, then press
ENTER, the following will be displayed:
c. Go to step 4.
N
ET MASK
3. If Level Access is not active, then the X X.XX.XX.XX
13. Enter the desired Net Mask, then press
I
NIT TRANSFER ENTER, the following will be displayed:
INIT rmte_lcal
G
ATEWAY
4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until X X.XX.XX.XX
14. Enter the desired Gateway, then press
C
OMMUNICATION ENTER, the following will be displayed:
stat COMM setup

T
CP/IP SETTINGS
5. Press ENTER, the following will be T CP_SETTINGS
displayed:
C
OM1 SETUP
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr 

4–17
15. Press EXIT, the ethernet board will 3. Verify that the modem is attached to (if
reconfigure and the following will be external) or assigned to (if internal) the
displayed: same serial port as assigned in ISScom.
While ISScom can use any of the 255
C
ONFIGURING ETH... serial ports (COM1 through COM255),
most computers support only COM1 and
COM2.
If the ethernet board is successfully
4. Connect the modem to a telephone line,
configured, then the entered IP Address
then energize the modem.
will be displayed for approximately 2
seconds:
Initializing the PC Modem
THERNET IP ADDRESS
E 1. Verify that the modem is connected
x
x.xx.xx.xx as described in "Connecting the PC
Modem".
The ethernet board is now configured for use and 2. Open ISScom, then select the COMM
may be accessed through a network. menu item.
3. ISScom will display the Communication
INSTALLING THE MODEMS Dialog screen (Figure 4-12).
Using ISScom® to interrogate, set or monitor the
MBTS using a modem requires both a remote modem 4. Select COMM DEVICE/MODEM, ISScom
connected at the MBTS location and a local modem will display the Expanded Communication
Dialog screen (Figure 4-13) to include
connected to the computer with ISScom installed.
modem setup information.
 NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used; 5. Enter the required information in the
however, the unit only communicates at PC Modem Settings section of the
1200 to 9600 baud. Communication screen
In order to use ISScom to communicate with the 6. Select INITIALIZE from the expanded
MBTS using a modem, the following must be Communications dialog box.
provided with the MBTS:
• An external modem (1200 baud or higher),
capable of understanding standard AT
commands.
• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector
for the MBTS and the applicable connector
for the modem.
Similarly, the computer running ISScom must also

have access to a compatible internal or external
modem.
Connecting the PC Modem

1. If the computer has an external modem,
then use a standard straight-through
RS‑232 modem cable (M-3933) to
connect the computer to the modem.
2. If the computer has an internal modem,
then refer to the modem’s instruction book
to determine which communications port
should be selected. Path: Comm menu
Figure 4-12 Communications Dialog Screen
4–18
COMMAND BUTTONS

Serial COM The Serial COM Port selection allows the
Port user to select the COM Port, Baud Rate,
Parity and Stop Bits.
Open COM Initiates contact with the MBTS, either by
direct serial or modem communication.
Close COM Breaks communication with the protective
system, for both direct serial or modem
communication.
TCP_IP O p e n s t h e e t h e r n e t a p p l i c a bl e
communication screen selections to
allow user to enter a TCP_IP address
(if necessary), and opening and closing
communication with the target relay.
Modem Displays the expanded Communication
dialog box.
Cancel Returns you to the ISScom main window;
any changes to the displayed information
are lost.
Open TCP_IP Initiates contact with the protective system
by ethernet connection.
Close TCP_IP Closes Ethernet Connection
COMMAND BUTTONS
Bring Up When selected, following connection to
Terminal the target modem, allows the user to send
Window commands to the modem.

After Dialing Displays the Add/Edit dialog box,
Add allowing you to type a protective system’s
unit identifier, phone number, and
communication address.
Figure 4-13 Expanded
Edit Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, allowing
Communication Dialog Screen you to review and change the user lines
(unit identifier), phone number, and
communication address of a selected
entry.
Delete Deletes a selected entry.
Save Saves any changes to the displayed
information
Initialize Allows the user to send special setup or
other AT commands directly to the modem.
Dial Dials the entry selected from the directory.
Hang Up Ends modem communication, allowing the
user to dial again.
Figure 4-14 Terminal Window
4–19
Connecting the Local Modem to the MBTS When connected to another terminal device, the
Setup of the modem attached to the MBTS may Terminal Window allows the user to send messages
be slightly complicated. It involves programming or commands. Outgoing communications are
parameters (using the AT command set), and storing displayed in the top pane and incoming messages
this profile in the modem’s nonvolatile memory. are displayed in the bottom two panes, in ASCII text
and HEX format.
After programming, the modem will power up in
the proper state for communicating with the MBTS. There are some variations in the AT commands
Programming may be accomplished by using the supported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the
"Bring Up Terminal Window after dialing" selection hardware user documentation for a list of supported
(Figure 4-13). Refer to your modem manual for AT commands and direction on issuing these
further information. commands.
 NOTE: The MBTS does not issue or understand

any modem commands. It will not adjust
the baud rate and should be considered
a "dumb" peripheral. It communicates
with 1 start, 8 data, and 0, 1 or 2 stop
bits.
Connect the Modem to the MBTS as follows:

1. Connect the unit to an exter nal
modem by attaching a standard RS-232
modem cable to the appropriate serial
communications port on both the unit
and the modem.
2. Connect the modem to a telephone line,
then energize the modem.
The modem attached to the MBTS must have the

following AT command configuration:
E0 No Echo
Q1 Don’t return result code
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hangup and reset
&S0 DSR always on
&C1 DCD ON when detected
S0=2 Answer on second ring
The following commands may also be required at
the modem:
&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE
N0 Answer only at specified speed
W Disable serial data rate adjust
\Q3 Bidirectional RTS/CTS relay
&B1 Fixed serial port rate
S37 Desired line connection speed
4–20
OSCILLOGRAPH SETUP When untriggered, the recorder continuously stores

The oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive waveform data, thereby keeping the most recent
data recording of all monitored waveforms, and data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores
status inputs storing up to 248 cycles of data. The pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in
total record length is user-configurable from 1 to memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period.
16 partitions. The records may be analyzed using ISScom®, and
are also available in COMTRADE file format.
The number of samples per cycle used to store the
data is user selectable. The number of samples per Setup Oscillograph Recorder
cycle that can be selected are 16 or 32 (50 or 60 Hz).
The number of samples selected effects the length  NOTE: Communication must be established
of the data that can be saved and its resolution. The with the target MBTS for this procedure.
When not connected to the MBTS
lower the number of samples, the longer the record
the Send selection does not save the
length that can be stored (but at a lower resolution).
Oscillograph Recorder settings to an
The oscillographic recorder can be triggered by a open file.
designated control/status input (usually a MBTS
To setup the Oscillograph Recorder perform the
initiate input), an automatically initiated signal,
following:
a trip output, a manual transfer signal, serial
communications or manually by the user. 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
select System/Oscillograph/Setup.
ISScom will display the Oscillograph
Setup screen (Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15 Setup Oscillograph Recorder
4–21
2. Select the Number of Records 4. Select the Post Trigger Delay.

(Partitions).
A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95%
The recorder’s memory may be must be specified. After triggering, the
partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions. The recorder will continue to store data for the
MBTS Oscillograph Recorder memory programmed portion of the total record
buffer is fixed and contains room for a before re-arming for the next record. For
finite number of cycles of recorded data. example, a setting of 80% will result in
Consider Table 4-2 when determining a record with 20% pre-trigger data, and
the number of Oscillograph records, The 80% post-trigger data.
number of cycles of recorded data is
5. Select the Oscillograph Samples per
directly related to the number of records
Cycle.
selected.
The number of data samples per cycle
 NOTE: Table 4-2 is based on 32 samples per
can be selected either 16 or 32 samples
cycle. For other sample rates the
per cycle.
number of cycles per partition has to be
scaled accordingly. 6. Select Send, ISScom will display a
Oscillograph Setup Sent Confirmation
Number of Number of Cycles Screen (Figure 4-16).
Partitions per Each Partition
1 124 Cycles
2 80 Cycles
3 60 Cycles
4 48 Cycles
5 40 Cycles
Figure 4-16 Oscillograph Setup Sent
6 32 Cycles
Confirmation Screen
7 28 Cycles
8 24 Cycles 7. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main
Screen.
9 24 Cycles
10 20 Cycles
11 20 Cycles
12 16 Cycles
13 16 Cycles
14 16 Cycles
15 12 Cycles
16 12 Cycles
Table 4-2 Recorder Partitions
3. Select the desired Trigger Inputs and

Trigger Outputs.
The recorder can be triggered remotely
through serial communications using
ISScom ® , or automatically using
programmed status inputs or outputs.
4–22
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER SETUP 2. Select the desired Inputs and Outputs,
Protective function Pickup, Trip, Dropout and/or then select Save. ISScom will display a
Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected to Send Changes to Unit Screen (Figure
trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder. 4-17).
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder

 NOTE: Communication must be established
with the target MBTS for this procedure.
When not connected to the MBTS
the Save selection does not save the
Sequence of Event settings to the open
file.
To setup the Sequence of Events Recorder perform

the following:
1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu
select System/Sequence of Event Figure 4-17 Sequence of Events Send Changes
Recorder/Setup. ISScom will display to Unit Screen
the Sequence of Events Setup screen
(Figure 4-18). 3. Select OK, ISScom will return to the Main
Screen.
Figure 4-18 Sequence Of Events Setup
4–23
MBTS Setup System

4.2 System Setup
The Nominal Frequency of 50 or 60 Hz and the CT
Secondary Rating (1 or 5 Amp) has been configured
 NOTE: Setup Record Forms are contained in
Appendix A. The Setup Record Form at the factory and is indicated (grayed out and can
tables list the MBTS parameter settings not be changed). However, when an ISScom®
choices for each feature and function. "New File" is opened, the Nominal Frequency and
CT Secondary Rating may be selected. Attempting
to write a file to an MBTS that is not configured
The System Setup consists of defining all pertinent the same, will result in ISScom returning an error
information regarding the system quantities. The message.
Setup System dialog screen (Figure 4-19) is
accessed through the System menu (System/  NOTE: Communication must be established with
Setup/Setup System). Regardless of the functions the target MBTS for this procedure.
that are enabled or disabled, all Setup System
values are required to be entered. Several MBTS To setup the MBTS System perform the following:
functions require the proper setting of these values 1. From the ISScom Main Screen menu
for correct operation. select System/Setup/Setup System.
ISScom will display the Setup System
Figure 4-19 Setup System Dialog Screen
4–24
 NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams 5. Select the S1/S2 VT Configuration
for Typical VT Three-Line Connection button. ISScom displays the S1/S2 VT
Diagrams. Configuration selection screen (Figure
4-20).
2. Enter the Nominal Voltage.
The S1/S2 VT Configuration allows the
The Nominal Voltage setting (50 to 140 selection of the Source 1 and Source 2
V) is needed for proper normalization of voltage transformer configuration. When
per unit quantities. Nominal Voltage for phase‑ground (three‑phase) is selected,
the following voltage connections is as the phase-to-phase single phase
follows: choices are grayed out and only one
• Line-to-Line VT connections phase to ground choice can be made.
When phase-to-phase (three‑phase)
VNominal = V Bus / VT Ratio is selected, the phase‑to‑ground
single‑phase choices are grayed‑out
• Line-to-Ground VT connections and only one phase‑to‑phase choice can
be made. Both Source 1 and Source 2
VNominal = V Bus / (e3 VT Ratio) must have the same VT Configuration.
3. Enter the Nominal Current. The 6. Select the desired S1 and S2 VT
secondary CT current of the phase CTS. Configuration, then select OK, ISScom
returns to the Setup System screen.
4. Select the Phase Rotation. (ABC or
ACB). 7. Select the Bus VT Configuration
button. ISScom displays the Bus VT
 NOTE: See Section 4.3, System Diagrams Configuration selection screen (Figure
for Typical VT Three-Line Connection 4-21).
Diagrams.
Figure 4-20 S1/S2 VT Configuration Selection Screen
Figure 4-21 Bus VT Configuration Selection Screen
4–25
Some selections are grayed-out 10. Enter the VT and CT ratios (Figure 4-19).
depending on the Source 1/Source 2
The VT and CT ratios are used only
selection. The Bus VT Configuration
for monitoring and displaying system
must have the same phase-to-ground
primary quantities.
or phase-to-phase selection as the
Source 1/Source 2 configuration. If either • Ratio of the Phase VTs
of three-phase selections are chosen Example:
for the Source 1/Source 2, then the
bus must have the same configuration. 13,800 V: 120 V = 13,800/120 = 115: 1
However, if the Source 1/Source 2 single- • Ratio of Phase CTs
phase selection is chosen then the bus Example:
configuration can be either the same
single-phase or the three-phase. 3,000: 5 = 3000/5 = 600: 1
For example, if the Source 1/Source  NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is
2 selection is phase-to-phase (three enabled, then the output contact will
phase), then the bus must use the default to the Normal Mode. Normal
same phase-to-phase (three-phase) Mode maintains the output contact
configuration. If the Source 1/Source energized as long as the condition
2 selection is phase-to-phase (single that caused it to operate exists. After
phase BC), then the bus choices will be the actuating condition is cleared, the
phase-to-phase (single phase BC) or contact will reset after the programmed
phase-to-phase (three phase). seal-in time has elapsed.
8. Select the desired Bus VT Configuration,
then select OK, ISScom® will return to 11. Select Outputs from the LATCHED
the Setup System screen. OUTPUTS section of the System Setup
9. Select the S1/S2 CT Configuration screen. ISScom will display the Latched
button. ISScom displays the S1/S2 CT Outputs Selection Screen (Figure 4-23).
Configuration Selection screen (Figure
4-22).
The S1/S2 CT Confguration Selection
is based on whether the S1 and S2 CTs
are connected to the rear terminals of
the MBTS. The default selection is "Yes"
which includes the current values for
S1 and S2 on the Single Line Diagram
(Figure 3-20). Selecting "No" removes
the S1 and S2 current elements from the
Single Line Diagram.
Figure 4-23 Latched Outputs Selection Screen
Figure 4-22 S1/S2 CT Configuration Selection

Screen
4–26
The Latched Outputs selection screen The Pulsed Outputs selection screen
allows the user to select which outputs allows the user to select which outputs
are latched when they are activated. are pulsed when they are activated. The
Outputs 1 through 4 are the Trip and pulse width is defined in the Output Seal
Close command outputs for the breakers in time section of Figure 4-19, Setup
and cannot be latched (the pulse length System Dialog Screen. If pulse MBTS
of these outputs are set in the Common operation is selected, output will dropout
Settings screen Figure 4-34). These after the seal-in delay expires, even if the
outputs remain latched until reset by an condition which caused the MBTS to pick
ISScom command or by the HMI of the up is still out of band. When selected as
MBTS. When selected as Latched the Pulsed the output will be grayed out in
output will be grayed out in the Pulsed the Latched Output Selection screen.
Output Selection screen.
Outputs 1 through 4 are the trip and close command
12. Select the desired outputs to be Latched, outputs for the breakers, the pulse length of these
then select OK, ISScom will return to the outputs are set in the Common Settings screen
Setup System screen. (Figure 4-34).
 NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is
enabled, then the output contact will 14. Select the desired outputs to be Pulsed,
default to the Normal Mode. Normal then select OK, ISScom will return to the
Mode maintains the output contact Setup System screen.
energized as long as the condition
that caused it to operate exists. After  NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is
the actuating condition is cleared, the enabled, then the output contact will
contact will reset after the programmed default to the Normal Mode. Normal
seal-in time has elapsed. Mode maintains the output contact
energized as long as the condition
that caused it to operate exists. After
13. Select Outputs from the PULSED the actuating condition is cleared, the
OUTPUTS section of the System Setup contact will reset after the programmed
screen. ISScom will display the Pulsed seal-in time has elapsed.
Outputs Selection Screen (Figure 4-24).
15. Select Input Status from the INPUT
ACTIVE STATE section of the System
Setup screen. ISScom will display the
Input Active States Selection Screen
(Figure 4-25).
This Input Active States selection screen
allows the user to select the active input
state for each input. Inputs 1 and 4 are
the breaker status inputs which have
predefined terminals for "a" and "b"
contacts. Checking the inputs for the
Active Input Open parameter designates
the "operated" state established by an
opening rather than closing an external
contact. The Input LED on the Status
Module and Input LED on the ISScom's
Input/Output Status Section in the
Secondary Metering and Status screen
will illuminate according to the input
Figure 4-24 Pulsed Outputs Selection Screen "operated" state.
For example: Checking Input 2 for the
Active Input Close parameter designated
the operated state of the 86P-S1 contact
that is closed when the 86P-S1 lockout
relay is tripped.
4–27
16. Select the desired Active Input State for

each Input, then select OK, ISScom® will
return to the Setup System screen.
17. Select the Output Seal In Time for each
Output (2 to 8160 Cycles).
The Output Seal-in Time provides the
user with the ability to individually enter
the seal-in time of each output. This
setting is only used if the output has not
been selected as a latched output. The
seal-in time defines the time period that
the output is closed even if the condition
no longer exists.
18. When all Setup System parameters have
been entered/selected, then select Save.
Figure 4-25 Input Active States Selection Screen
4–28
4.3 System Diagrams
SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48
CT-S1 Single VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
M-4172
IS1 IS2
M-4172 VA VB VC M-4172 1
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
52S1 56 58 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
1 CT-S1 and CT-S2 are single phase CTs. They both must be connected to the same phase,
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C.
Figure 4-26 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–29

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye

Alternate Connection Alternate Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48
VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye

CT-S1 Single CT-S2 Single
Alternate Connection
Phase CT Phase CT
M-4172
IS1 IS2
M-4172 VA VB VC M-4172 1
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
52S1 56 58 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 4-27 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded

VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–30

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

Phase CT VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection Phase CT
IS1 IS2
M-4172
M-4172 M-4172 1
VAB VBC VCA
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.
Figure 4-28 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–31
SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C
VT-S1 One VT VT-S2 One VT

2 Phase-Ground 2 Phase-Ground
Connection Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48
CT-S1 Single VT-B One VT CT-S2 Single

Phase CT 2 Phase-Ground Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 1
M-4172
VA VB VC
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
2 VT-S1, VT-S2 and VT-B are single phase VTs. They all must be connected to the same
phase, either Phase A-To-Ground, Phase B-To-Ground or Phase C-To -Ground.
Figure 4-29 Single Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–32

A B C A B C

2 Phase-Phase 2 Phase-Phase
M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

2 Phase-Phase Phase CT
Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 1
M-4172
VAB VBC VCA
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
phase, either Phase A-To-Phase B, Phase B-To-Phase C or Phase A-To -Phase C.
Figure 4-30 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–33

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48

Phase CT Phase CT
IS1 VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 M-4172 1
1 57 VA VB VC 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
2 VT-S1 and VT-S2 are single phase VTs. They both must be connected to the same
Figure 4-31 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,

Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–34
SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

Phase CT Phase CT
VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection
IS1 IS2
M-4172 M-4172 M-4172 1
VAB VBC VCA

1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 4-32 Single-Phase Source Side, Phase-Phase,

Three-Phase Bus Side Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram
4–35
The System Setpoints dialog screen contains

4.4 System Setpoints two setting groups, the Transfer Settings and the
Function Settings. The Transfer Settings group
The System Setpoints consist of defining all contains the settings that are necessary for
pertinent information regarding the system setpoints transferring the motor bus load quickly and safely
and transfer logic settings. The M-4172 System from one power source to another power source.
Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 4-33) is accessed
through the System menu (System/Setup/ The Function Settings group contains settings that
Setpoints). can initiate the transfer or are used as logic inputs
to the transfer logic.
 NOTE: Configuration Record For ms are
contained in Appendix A. The At the bottom of the System Setpoints dialog screen
Configuration Record Form tables list there are two additional selections:
the System Setpoint parameters and the
settings choices for each function. Display All — Selecting the Display All
•
button displays the All Setpoints Table
The MBTS System Setpoints consists of entering dialog screen (Figure 3-13). This dialog
the following: screen contains the settings for each
MBTS function within a single window to
• Selecting Transfer Logic and conditions allow scrolling through all MBTS setpoint
including Automatic, Manual Transfer and configuration values.
settings Configure — Selecting the Configure
•
• Enabling the functions and entering the button displays the Configure dialog
desired settings screen (Figure 3-14), which contains a
• Designating the output contacts each chart of programmed input and output
function will operate, and which control/ contacts, in order to allow scrolling through
status inputs will enable or block the all MBTS output and blocking input
transfer. configurations.
The choices include 3 programmable output

contacts (OUT5–OUT7) and two breaker status Both dialog screens (All Setpoints Table and
inputs (IN1 and IN4) for Source 1 and Source 2, Configure), feature Jump Command Buttons which
plus other programmable inputs. A block or fixed allow the user to jump from a scrolling dialog screen
time transfer choice for bus fuse loss logic operation. to an individual MBTS function dialog screen and
return to the scrolling dialog screen. All available
The transfer settings for Automatic Transfers, Manual parameters can be reviewed or changed when
Transfers, Common Settings, control/status inputs jumping to a MBTS configuration dialog screen from
and output contact assignments must be chosen either scrolling dialog screen.
before entering the settings for the individual
functions. The Transfer Settings group includes four menus.
The Common Settings submenu contains settings
Each of the individual submenus are described in that are used by the Automatic Transfer, Manual
the following pages. Settings for disabled functions Transfer and Automatic Trip Logic. For example,
do not apply. Some menu and setting screens do some of the common settings are the Breaker
not appear for functions that are disabled. The Closing Time, Trip and Close Pulse Lengths and
System Setpoints can only be entered using the New Source Voltage Limits. These and other settings
M‑3871 software. See Section 1.2, M-4172 Motor are used whether an Automatic or Manual Transfer
Bus Transfer System for a listing of those Settings, is performed. Therefore, the settings in the Common
Functions and Status values that are available from Settings submenu must be entered for a transfer to
the front panel display and HMI. operate correctly.
4–36
TRANSFER SETTINGS
COMMON SETTINGS (CS)
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings
The Common Settings selection from the Transfer

Settings group (Figure 4-33) opens the Common
Function Settings Dialog screen (Figure 4-34), which
includes the Common Function Settings, Inputs and
Outputs tabs.
Figure 4-33 System Setpoints Dialog Screen
4–37
COMMON SETTINGS/COMMON FUNCTION

SETTINGS TAB
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings
Figure 4-34, illustrates the MBTS Common Function

Settings found under the Common Function Settings
Tab on the Common Function Settings dialog
screen.
Figure 4-34 Common Function Settings Dialog Screen
4–38
Common Settings/Transfer Mode transfer to the new source at the same time. Since
Transfer Mode can be selected as either Simultaneous the existing power is being tripped (due to some
or Sequential: abnormality) and the new source is outside of the
setting range, a transfer will not occur and the motor
Simultaneous — With a transfer initiated,
• bus will lose power.
within 10 ms of transfer initiate, all three
methods of transfer, Fast, In-Phase and Common Settings/Breaker Closing Time
Residual Voltage Transfer are immediately
enabled to supervise closure of the new The Breaker Closing Time setting defines the
source breaker without waiting for the breaker closing time (the time period from when the
breaker status contact confirmation that close command is issued to when the new source
the old source breaker has opened. At breaker status contact closes) of the Source 1 and
the same instant, the commands for Source 2 breakers that the MBTS is controlling. The
the old source breaker and the new breaker closing time is used during an In-phase
source breaker to trip and close are sent transfer. The in‑phase transfer sends the close
simultaneously if and only if the phase command in advance of the phase coinsidence
angle between the motor bus and the new based on this breaker time and the rate of change
source is within the delta phase angle limit of the frequency of the decaying motor bus.
for the Fast Transfer Method immediately The purpose of using the breaker closing time is
upon transfer initiation. However only the to have the breaker actually close just at the time
Fixed Time Transfer is enabled 30 cycles of the phase coinsidence setting is in cycles, so
after the old source breaker has opened. time changes based on frequency. The Adaptation
Refer to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time feature, when selected calculates the S1 and S2
Sequence for Timing Sequence of Transfer breaker closing times based on the average time
Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode. of the Last 8 breaker operations. When initially
• Sequential — With a transfer initiated, the selected, the selected breaker closing time will
command to trip the old source breaker be used until eight breaker operations have been
is sent within 10 ms. Upon confirmation averaged. If ISScom is connected to the M-4172
from the old source breaker status contact and the Common Function Settings screen is active
that the old source breaker is open. Within during a transfer, the Common Function Settings
4ms of receipt of this confirmation, all screen needs to be closed and then reopened in
three transfer methods, Fast, In-Phase order to refresh the breaker closing time value in
Transfer and Residual Voltage Transfer Adaptation Enable mode. Breaker Closing Time
are enabled to supervise closure of the setpoints cannot be changed while this feature is
new source breaker and the Fixed Time enabled.
Transfer is enabled 30 cycles later. Refer
to Appendix F, Transfer Logic Time Common Settings/S1(S2) Breaker Closing
Sequence for Timing Sequence of Transfer Time Deviation
Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode.
The S1(S2) Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting
establishes when the breaker has exceeded the
Common Settings/Upper-Lower Voltage Limit normal expected variations, plus or minus from the
New Source programmed closing time.
This setting defines the upper and lower voltage
limits of the new source. If the new source voltage When the Breaker Closing Time Deviation setting
is not within these limits, then a transfer is blocked. is exceeded a "S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out of
Range" indicator on the System Status section of
If a transfer is blocked and an initiate transfer signal the Secondary Metering and Status screen will be
is received, the transfer is not started (no trip or activated. Activation of this indicator would indicate
close command is sent to the supply breakers). This that the breaker may require maintenance.
prevents a transfer to a new source that does not
meet the voltage requirements established by the
Upper and Lower Voltage Limits. The result is that
the motor bus will lose power when the protective
MBTS trips the supply breaker and initiates a
4–39
Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Common Settings/Remote Manual Initiate

Lockout Time Time Delay
The Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time setting  CAUTION: This feature should NOT be used if
establishes the time period in which an Automatic there is any difference in frequency or fluctuating
Transfer must be completed. The time period is voltage amplitudes.
defined as the time at which the transfer is initiated
until the transfer is complete. The Remote Manual Initiate Time Setting establishes
the time delay before a remotely initiated Manual
If a transfer is not completed within the Incomplete Transfer actuates.
Transfer Lockout Time period the following MBTS
actions will occur: The Remote Manual Transfer can be initiated in
Remote mode of operation. The purpose of this
1. The status of the target breaker will be set time delay is to allow personnel initiating the transfer
by this timer. to move away from the front of the switchgear
2. The MBTS will stop attempting to finish that would be operating during the transfer. This
the present transfer. assumes that the remote manual initiate pushbutton
is physically located on the switchgear. Typically,
3. The MBTS will enter into a lockout manual transfers occur when the motor bus load is
condition. being transferred from one source to another and
4. The Lockout Blocking contact (output 8) the conditions are stable and the time delay would
will change state and any subsequent have no effect if the transfer is successful.
transfer initiate commands will be ignored.
Common Settings/Blocking After Transfer
This feature keeps the unit from operating until the Time
cause of the incomplete transfer is determined. It The Blocking After Transfer Time setting establishes
also prevents the unit from un-expectedly closing at the time delay after a transfer has been completed
a later time when the conditions would allow a close. before another transfer is possible. During this
time period, all initiate commands are ignored. The
Common Settings/Local Manual Initiate Time initiate commands are not stored or remembered,
Delay the initiate command will only be recognized after
this block time. The purpose of this feature is to
The Local Manual Initiate Time Setting establishes
prevent an immediate automatic transfer back to
the time delay before a locally initiated Manual
an unviable source. In addition, the new source
Transfer actuates.
voltage may dip due to the motor bus load being
The manual local transfer can be initiated in either connected. This dip in voltage could cause the 27B
the Remote or Local mode of operation. The Bus Phase Undervoltage (internal or external) to
purpose of this time delay is to allow personnel trigger a transfer.
initiating the transfer to move away from the front of
the switchgear that would be operating during the Common Settings/Trip Command and Close
transfer. This assumes that the M-4172 is physically Command Pulse Length
located on the switchgear. Typically, manual transfers The Trip Command and Close Command Pulse
occur when the motor bus load is being transfered Length settings establish the length of the trip and
from one source to another and the conditions are close outputs.
stable and a time delay would have no effect on if
the transfer is successful. This feature should not
be used if there is any difference in frequency or Common Settings Save/Cancel — The Save
fluctuating voltage amplitudes. selection (Figure 4-34) saves the Common Function
Settings Tab Settings either to an open file or to
the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.
4–40
COMMON FUNCTION SETTINGS INPUTS TAB The 52a or 52b breaker status input contacts need
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Input to be breaker auxiliary contacts that change state
whenever the breaker closes/opens and when the
Figure 4-35, illustrates the MBTS Common Function breaker is in test or fully racked-in (connected)
Settings found under the Inputs Tab on the Common positions. During commissioning, when a bus
Function Settings dialog screen. transfer test is simulated, the M-4172 needs to see
the 52a or 52b contacts change state even when
Common Settings/Breaker Status Inputs the breaker is in test position.
The Breaker Status Inputs section provides the user
with the ability to select the type of 52 breaker status
contact being used for Source 1 and Source 2. One
of the two choices presented must be selected, the
52a or 52b. Only one choice for each breaker can
be selected. The selection must match the physical
connections to the unit for proper operation.
Figure 4-35 Common Function Settings Inputs Dialog Screen
4–41
Common Settings/Service Position Inputs Common Settings/External Status Reset

QQ NOTE: If no inputs are selected for the Service This feature allows the user to select the external
Position, then any In-Service indications input to be used to reset the system status and any
and data points will be set to In-Service. selected latched outputs. When the External Status
Reset button is selected the External Status Reset
The Service Position Inputs opens a dialog screen Input Selection dialog screen is displayed (Figure
similar to Figure 4-36 that allows the user to select 4-37).
an input to be used as the Service Position. The
desired input for Source 1 and Source 2 Service Only one input can be selected. When an input is
Position can be selected. Only one input can be selected it will be grayed out in other dialog boxes
selected. When an input is selected it will be grayed which allow selection of inputs for different functions.
out in other dialog boxes which allow selection of
inputs for different functions. Common Function Inputs Save/Cancel — The
Save selection (Figure 4-35) saves the Common
Common Settings/External Control Inputs
Function Settings Input Tab settings either to an
Configuration
open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the
The External Control Inputs Configuration section user to the previous open screen.
includes four selections:
•
Transfer Block #1
•
Transfer Block #2
•
Transfer Block #3
• External Status Reset
Common Settings/Transfer Block #1 (#2, #3)

The Transfer Block #1, #2 and #3 provide four
possible inputs to be used to block transfers. When
the Transfer Block #1 button is selected the Transfer
Block #1 Inputs dialog screen is displayed (Figure
4-36).
The desired input or inputs for blocking can be
selected. The same is true for Transfer Block #2
and Transfer Block #3 dialog screens. Once an input
has been selected it will be grayed out on the other
dialog screens since it has already been assigned.
Figure 4-37 External Status Input Selection
Dialog Screen
Figure 4-36 Transfer Block #1 Input

Dialog Screen
4–42
COMMON SETTINGS OUTPUTS TAB

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Common Settings/Outputs
Figure 4-39, illustrates the MBTS Common Function

Settings found under the Outputs Tab on the
Common Function Settings dialog screen.
Common Settings/Auto Fast Transfer Ready

Outputs
The Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs feature
(Figure 4-39) allows the user to select one or more
outputs (Figure 4-38) to indicate when the Automatic
Fast transfer is ready.
The conditions that are necessary for a Fast Transfer
to be ready to execute are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist. Figure 4-38 Auto Fast Transfer Ready Output
• The phase angle between the Motor Bus Selection Dialog Screen
and the New Source is within limit setting.
If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/Blocking
• The Delta Voltage between the Motor Bus
conditions or the conditions for an Auto Fast Transfer
are not true, then a Fast transfer would not occur.
• The Delta Frequency between the Motor The trip command would be sent, but the close
Bus and the New Source is within limit command would not occur until conditions would
setting. allow an in-phase, residual or fixed time transfer.
Figure 4-39 Common Function Settings Outputs Dialog Screen
4–43
Common Function Settings/Manual Fast Common Settings/Transfer Ready Outputs

Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready Outputs The Transfer Ready Outputs feature (Figure 4-39)
The Manual Fast Transfer/ Hot Parallel Ready allows the user to select one or more outputs (Figure
Outputs feature (Figure 4-39) allows the user to 4-41) to indicate when the Transfer Ready Outputs
select one or more outputs (Figure 4-40) to indicate are ready.
when the Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel Ready
Outputs are ready.
Figure 4-41 Transfer Ready Output Selection

Dialog Screen
Figure 4-40 Manual Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel
Ready Output Selection Dialog Screen The Transfer ready indication only indicates that
there are no blocking conditions, it does not indicate
The conditions that are necessary for a Manual the Delta Phase Angle, Delta Frequency, or Delta
Fast Transfer/Hot Parallel to be ready to execute Voltage parameters are within the settings of the
are as follows: Automatic or Manual Transfer settings. If a transfer
is initiated when there were any Lockout/Blocking
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist. conditions present, then the transfer will be blocked.
• The Phase Angle between the Motor Bus The trip command would not be sent.
One or more outputs can be selected to indicate
• The Delta Voltage between the Motor Bus when an Automatic or Manual Transfer is ready. A
and the New Source is within limit setting. Transfer Ready indication is given when there are
• The Delta Frequency between the Motor no Lockout/Blocking conditions. Lockout/Blocking
Bus and the New Source is within limit conditions that will prevent a transfer are:
setting.
• Voltage Blocking — If prior to a transfer,
If a transfer is initiated and there are no Lock/ the new source voltage exceeds the Upper
Blocking conditions or any of the conditions for or Lower Voltage Limits, all transfers are
a Manual Fast Transfer are not true, then a Fast blocked as long as the voltage remains
Transfer would not occur. The Manual Transfer trip outside these limits.
command would be sent, but the close command • External Blocking — When any external
would not occur until the conditions would allow an blocking control input contact is closed, all
In-Phase, Residual or Fixed Time Transfer. For the transfers are blocked.
Hot Parallel Transfer, when a Manual Hot Parallel • Incomplete Transfer Lockout — Blocks
Transfer is attempted and one of the parameters any transfer initiated by a protective relay
is outside of the setting, the close command is not initiate, or an automatic initiated transfer
sent if transfer conditions are not met. Manual Hot or a manual transfer if the last transfer
Parallel Transfer does not start. was not completed within the time delay.
A time delay can be set from 50 to 3000
Cycles. The MBTS remains in the lockout
condition until manually reset.
4–44
• Bus VT Fuse Loss Blocking — Transfer

is blocked if the user has selected Bus
VT Fuse Loss to block transfers and the
MBTS detects a Bus VT Fuse Loss (60FL).
• Both Breakers Same State Blocking — If
both breaker status contacts are in the
open state, due to an external operation
that opens the second breaker while
leaving the first one open, and if the Auto
Close feature is not selected, no transfer
sequence is initiated.
Furthermore, any subsequent initiation of
a transfer sequence while the breakers
are in this state is inhibited. If both breaker
status contacts are closed due to an
external operation that closes the second
breaker while leaving the first one closed, Figure 4-42 Transfer Completed Output
and if the auto trip feature is disabled, no Selection Dialog Screen
transfer sequence is initiated.
• Transfer in Process Blocking — When a Common Settings/Fast Transfer Load
transfer is in process, any other transfer Shedding Outputs
initiate inputs will be ignored until the The Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs feature
original transfer is complete. (Figure 4-39) allows the user to select one or more
• Blocking After Transfer — After a transfer outputs (Figure 4-43) to indicate which output is to
has been completed, any additional be used for Fast Transfer Load Shedding.
transfers are blocked for 0 to 8160 cycles,
The Fast Transfer Load Shedding command is sent
as selected by the user.
at the same time as the Trip command for either
Simultaneous or Sequential modes of transfer.
Common Settings/Transfer Completed
Outputs
The Transfer Completed Outputs feature (Figure
4-39) allows the user to select one or more outputs
(Figure 4-42) to indicate which output is to be used
to indicate when a transfer has been completed.
Typically this output would be latched so it would
remain closed like a target to indicate that a transfer
had been completed. This output would remain
closed until manually reset.
Figure 4-43 Fast Transfer Load Shedding

Output Selection Dialog Screen
4–45
Common Settings/In-Phase Transfer Load

Shedding Outputs
The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs
feature (Figure 4-39) allows the user to select one or
more outputs (Figure 4-44) to indicate which output
is to be used for In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding.
Figure 4-44 In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding

Output Selection Dialog Screen
The In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding command is

sent at the same time as the closing command of
In-Phase Transfer. The purpose of this load shedding
output is to disconnect some loads so there will be a
better possibility of completing an In-Phase Transfer.
There may be a load that would cause the motor
bus to decay very quickly if a Fast Transfer was not
successful and it would be better to disconnect that
load so the rest of the motor bus would have a better
chance to complete an In-Phase transfer. Another
purpose could be to disconnect a very sensitive
load, such as synchronous motors, if a Fast Transfer
is not possible.
4–46
Common Settings/Load Shedding Outputs Common Settings/Incomplete Transfer Outputs

The Load Shedding Outputs feature (Figure 4-39) The Incomplete Transfer Outputs feature (Figure
allows the user to select one or more outputs (Figure 4-39) allows user to select one or more outputs
4-46) to indicate which output is to be used for this (Figure 4-45) to indicate which output is to be used
Load Shedding. to indicate when a transfer has been incomplete.
Typically this output would be latched so it would
The Load Shedding Function Selection also remain closed like a target to indicate that a transfer
provides the ability to select one of 5 choices to be has been incomplete. The MBTS remains in the
used to perform this load shedding feature. Typically lockout condition until manually reset.
Load Shedding occurs after the Fast and In-Phase
Transfers have not been successful.
For the F27B#3, F81#1 or F81R#1 functions, when
the settings are satisfied the selected load shedding
output is closed. For Residual Voltage Transfer, the
Load Shedding Output is closed when the motor bus
voltage drops below the Residual Voltage Limit. The
close command for Residual Voltage Transfer is sent
after the programmed load shedding time delay. For
the Fixed Time Transfer, the Load Shedding Output
is closed when the Fixed Time Delay has timed out.
The close command for the Fixed Time Transfer is
sent after the programmed load shedding time delay.
Figure 4-45 Incomplete Transfer Outputs

Selection Dialog Screen
Common Function Outputs Save/Cancel — The

Save selection (Figure 4-39) saves the Common
Function Settings Outputs Tab settings either to an
open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the
user to the previous open screen.
Figure 4-46 Load Shedding Output Selection Dialog Screen
4–47
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS I

NIT TRANSFER
(ATS)
INIT rmte_lcal
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer Settings
The Automatic Transfer Settings selection from the c. Go to Step 4.

Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-33) opens the
Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen (Figure 3. If Level Access is not active, then the
4-47), which includes the following tabs: following is displayed:
• Setup I
NIT TRANSFER
• Fast Transfer INIT rmte_lcal
• In-Phase Transfer
• Residual Voltage Transfer the following is displayed:
• Fixed Time Transfer
A
UTO TRANSFER
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS A
UTO_XFER man_xfer
SETUP TAB
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer 5. Press ENTER, the following will be
Settings/Setup displayed:
Figure 4-47, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer
Settings found under the Setup Tab on the Automatic A
UTO TRANSFER
Transfer Settings dialog screen. d
isable enable
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Auto 6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton
Transfer Mode as necessary to enable or disable Auto
Tranfer (upper case).
The Auto Transfer Mode (Figure 4-47) can be
Disabled or Enabled. If Disable is selected and 7. Press ENTER. The following will be
then Save is selected, then the remaining settings displayed:
in the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen
are grayed out. A
UTO TRANFER
AUTO X_FER
man x_fer
HMI Auto Transfer Mode Enable/Disable
To enable or disable Auto Transfer from the Front 8. The MBTS is now in the selected Auto
Panel perform the following: Tranfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary
to return to the Main Menu.
displayed:
ENTER ACCESS CODE

0

press ENTER.
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
4–48
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Both S1 Before opening the Source 1 normally-closed
& S2 Breakers Open breaker, an external block transfer signal must
Both the S1 and S2 Breakers Open portion of the be applied to an M‑4172 input FIRST in order to
dialog screen (Figure 4-47) provides a selection block a transfer. This input MUST be set to block
for how the MBTS should respond when both the automatic transfers. When the Source 1 breaker is
Source 1 and Source 2 breakers are open. open resulting in two open breakers, the automatic
transfer is blocked by this external signal. While the
In normal operation either the Source 1 or the Source Source 1 breaker and Source 2 breaker are open,
2 break is closed. If the breaker that is closed is DO NOT remove the external block transfer signal
opened by an external operation when the Block until either the Source 1 breaker or the Source 2
Transfer is selected, then no transfer is performed by breaker is closed. Removing the external blocking
the M-4172. While this condition continues to exist signal will stop blocking the Auto Close function and
any transfer initiated externally or internally will be if both breakers open, the automatic transfer by the
blocked and no transfers will occur. Auto Close function will occur. Remove the external
block transfer signal ONLY after either the Source 1
If the Auto Close feature has been selected, then if breaker or Source 2 breaker is closed.
the breaker that was closed is opened by an external
operation, the automatic transfer is initiated. The Similar steps must be taken in case of a motor bus
other breaker will be closed by the Fast Transfer, fault condition.
In-Phase Transfer, Residual Voltage transfer or Fixed
Time Transfer settings of the Automatic Transfer In a motor bus fault condition, the bus protective
feature. The transfer method used will depend on relay or the bus lockout relay that trips the main
how the motor bus voltage decays when the power (Source 1) breaker MUST apply a block transfer
source is disconnected. For example, assume the signal to the M‑4172 input at the same time to block
Source 1 breaker is closed and the Source 2 breaker transferring a faulted motor bus to the new source.
is open. An operator accidentally opens the Source However, this also results in two open breakers.
1 breaker. The MBTS will close the Source 2 breaker Therefore, the automatic transfer by the Auto Close
based on the Automatic Transfer settings. function is blocked by the protective relay/lockout
relay block signal. This input signal must be latched
The Auto Close selection operates an automatic and remain closed as long as both breakers are
transfer in either direction. The purpose is to permit open. This protective relay/lockout relay input MUST
a transfer when the normally-closed breaker is NOT be removed until one of the breakers is closed.
accidentally/inadvertently tripped resulting in two After the bus fault is clear, DO NOT RESET the
open breakers. This operation is very similar to latched block transfer signal of the protective relay
the regular automatic transfer process except that /lockout relay until the following steps are completed
it does not send out the trip command, since the in sequential order to avoid unexpected/accidental
second breaker is already open. automatic transfer operation:
1. Activate an additional separate external
▲ CAUTION: When the Auto Close Function is block transfer signal (block transfer from
SELECTED, the following steps and procedures DCS or from local control switch) to an
must be performed in order to avoid unexpected/ M‑4172 input first in order to block a
accidental automatic transfer operation. transfer.
Assume the Source 1 breaker is closed and the 2. Then, reset the bus protective relay/
Source 2 breaker is open. An operator plans to lockout relay trip signal.
open the Source 1 normally-closed breaker for
3. Close the main (Source 1) breaker which
maintenance purposes, during normal start up will deactivate/reset the Auto Close
or shut down and does NOT want an automatic function.
transfer operation to occur after the Source 1
breaker is open. 4. Finally, remove the external block transfer
signal (block transfer from DCS or from
local control switch).
4–49
Figure 4-47 Automatic Transfer Settings Dialog Screen
4–50
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS SETUP

TAB/EXTERNAL CONTROL INPUTS
CONFIGURATION
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer
Settings/Setup
The External Control Inputs Configuration portion

of the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen
(Figure 4-47) includes the following External Control
Input configuration selections:
•
Auto Transfer Block
• 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)
• 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)
• 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)
• 27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)
Automatic Transfer/Auto Transfer Block Figure 4-48 Automatic Transfer Block Input
The Auto Transfer Block selection opens the Auto Settings Dialog Screen
Transfer Block dialog screen (Figure 4-48) that
allows the user to select an input that is used to Automatic Transfer/86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)
block Automatic Transfers. When an input has been The 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen
selected it will be grayed out in other dialog screens similar to Figure 4-48 that allows the user to select
that provide input selection since it has already been an input that is used to initiate Automatic Transfers
assigned. from an 86P Lockout relay.
▲ CAUTION: When the Automatic Transfer Mode The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer
is selected (using an external Automatic/Manual from Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source 2 breaker
selector switch on the control panel), the Manual is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open, the
Transfer Block SHOULD BE ENABLED to prevent transfer is blocked since the breakers are in the
an inadvertent Manual Transfer. Conversely, when wrong positions for this transfer, the transfer is
Manual Transfer Mode is selected (using an external ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in
Automatic/Manual selector switch on the control either direction, a separate Transfer Initiate Input
panel), the Automatic Transfer Block SHOULD is needed.
NOT BE ENABLED. If an unexpected event occurs,
tripping the present source while the selector switch When an input has been selected it will be grayed
is in the Manual position, and before a Manual out in other dialog screens that provide input
Transfer is initiated, with the only means of transfer selection since it has already been assigned.
blocked, the motor bus will begin to die. The decay is
so rapid that the operator will not be able to respond Automatic Transfer/86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)
quickly enough to initiate a transfer.
The 86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen
similar to Figure 4-48 that allows the user to select
an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic
Transfers from an 86P Lockout relay.
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer
from Source 2 to Source 1. If the Source 1 breaker
is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open, the
transfer is blocked since the breakers are in the
wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer
is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in
either direction, a separate Transfer Initiate Input
is needed.
When an input has been selected it will be grayed
out in other dialog screens that provide input
selection since it has already been assigned.
4–51
Automatic Transfer/27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) Automatic Transfer Initiation

The 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) opens a dialog screen The 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2), 86P-S2 Initiate (S2
similar to Figure 4-48 that allows the user to select to S1), 27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) or 27-S2 Initiate
an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic (S2 to S1) will provide an internal single-shot initiate
Transfers from an external 27 device. signal with a short pulse lasting less than 10ms.
This internal initiate signal will turn off even though
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer the external input contact is still high and latched.
is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open the For example, when the M-4172 receives an external
transfer is blocked since the breakers are in the input command at 86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) and the
wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer transfer is already blocked due to unhealthy voltage
is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in at the new standby source. The Internal Transfer
either direction a separate Transfer Initiate Input is Initiate Signal expires and no transfer was initiated.
needed. When the healthy voltage at the new standby source
is restored later, even though an external input
When an input has been selected it will be grayed command is still high, the M-4172 relay’s internal
out in other dialog screens that provide input single shot 86P-S1 initiating transfer command has
selection since it has already been assigned. already turned off and no transfer is initiated.
Automatic Transfer/27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) For the continuous internal multi-shot automatic
transfer initiation, use the M-4172 ISSlogic® function
The 27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) opens a dialog screen to implement this special automatic transfer logic.
similar to Figure 4-48 that allows the user to select
an input or inputs that are used to initiate Automatic The internal initiate transfer signal in ISSlogic stays
Transfers from an external 27 device. high as long as the Input contact initiating a transfer
is high (closed) and there are no blocking transfer
The selected input will initiate an Automatic Transfer conditions and block transfer signals.
is closed and the Source 2 breaker is open the If the blocking transfer signal (such as unhealthy
transfer is blocked since the breakers are in the voltage at the new standby source or any external
wrong positions for this transfer and the transfer block input signals) occurs before the Input contact
is ignored. Since Automatic Transfers can occur in initiating a transfer is activated, the transfer is
either direction a separate Transfer Initiate Input is blocked and the internal initiate transfer signal
needed. is off. However, when the blocking condition is
released, the internal initiate transfer signal turns
When an input has been selected it will be grayed on immediately to start a transfer process.
out in other dialog screens that provide input
selection since it has already been assigned. The ISSlogic section is described in detail later in
this chapter.
Automatic Transfer Settings Setup Tab/Save/
Cancel — The Save selection (Figure 4-47) saves
the Automatic Transfer settings either to an open file
or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to
the previous open screen.
4–52
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS FAST Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle

TRANSFER TAB Limit
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer The Delta Phase Angle Limit (Figure 4-49) can be
Settings/Fast Transfer
set from 0.0 to 90.0 degrees. The Delta Phase Angle
The Fast Transfer tab (Figure 4-49) displays the is the angle between the voltages of the motor bus
settings for the Automatic Fast Transfer. The top and the new source. This setting cannot be disabled,
right corner of the display includes a command the phase angle is always one of the parameters
button that will disable or enable the automatic fast used to determine if a fast transfer can be executed.
transfer. This selection allows the Automatic Fast
Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit
from the Automatic In-Phase, Residual and Fixed The Delta Voltage Limit (Figure 4-49) can be set
Time transfers. from 0 to 60 volts. The Delta Voltage is the voltage
Since the Fast Transfer is the most desirable type difference between the motor bus and the new
of transfer, this feature is typically used to disable source. This setting can be disabled. If it is disabled
the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix then this parameter is not used as a condition to
F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the execute a Fast Transfer.
timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential
Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time Automatic Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit
with the decay of the motor bus voltage determining The Delta Frequency Limit (Figure 4-49) can be
which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows set from 0.2 to 2.0 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the
the user to disable the individual types of transfers frequency difference between the motor bus and
if desired. the new source. This setting can be disabled. If it
is disabled then this parameter is not used as a
condition to execute a fast transfer.
Figure 4-49 Automatic Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
4–53
Automatic Fast Transfer/Time Window Automatic Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs

The Time Window (Figure 4-49) can be set from 1 Selection
to 10 cycles. The Time Window defines the window The Blocking Inputs Selection button (Figure 4-49)
of opportunity for a Fast Transfer. The Time Window opens the Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen
starts when the transfer is initiated and ends at the (Figure 4-50). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL)
selected time limit. If a Fast Transfer has not been function can be selected to block a Fast Transfer.
completed by the end of this Time Window, then When other functions such as Transfer Block #1 are
the Fast Transfer is disabled and will no longer selected for these inputs it will be identified next to
attempted. An In-Phase, Residual or Fixed Time that input.
Transfer is still possible.
Closing command Time Delay is grayed out when Automatic Fast Transfer Tab Save/Cancel
Common Function Settings/Transfer Mode is set to The Save selection (Figure 4-49) saves the
Sequential. Automatic Fast Transfer settings either to an open
file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user
to the previous open screen.
Automatic Fast Transfer/Closing Command
Time Delay The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fast
The time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This Transfer are:
time delay is only used for Fast Transfer method in
Simultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close • No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
commands are normally issued at the same time • The phase angle between the motor bus
for Fast Transfer method in Simultaneous transfer and the new source is within limit setting.
mode, this time delay allows the flexibility to delay • The Delta Voltage between the motor bus
the closing command to accomplilsh the break- and the new source is within limit setting.
before-make mode of operation (open transition).
• The Delta Frequency between the motor
bus and the new source is within limit
setting.
• A transfer must be completed within the
Fast Transfer time window of 1 to 10
cycles.
Figure 4-50 Automatic Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–54
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/IN-PHASE Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage

TRANSFER TAB Limit
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to120 volts.
Settings/In-Phase Transfer The Delta Voltage is the voltage difference between
Figure 4-51, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer the motor bus and the new source. This setting can
Settings found under the In-Phase Transfer Tab on be disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is not
the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen. The used as a condition to execute an In-Phase Transfer.
top right corner of the display includes a command
button that will disable or enable the automatic In- Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency
Phase Transfer. This selection allows the automatic Limit
In-Phase Transfer to be disabled (or enabled) The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.10 to
independent from the Automatic Fast, Residual and 15.00 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the frequency
Fixed Time Transfers. difference between the motor bus and the new
Typically this feature is used to disable the other source. This setting cannot be disabled. The
types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time frequency is always one of the parameters used to
Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing determine if an In‑Phase Transfer can be executed.
diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential
Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Time Window
and the characteristics of the motor bus voltage The Time Window can be set from 10 to 600 cycles.
decay determines which type of transfer is possible. The Time Window defines the window of opportunity
This feature allows the user to disable the individual for a In-Phase Transfer. The time window starts when
types of transfers if esired. the transfer is initiated and ends at the selected time
limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not been completed
by the end of this time window then the In‑Phase
Transfer is disabled and will no longer be attempted.
A Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still possible.
Figure 4-51 Automatic Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
4–55
Automatic In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs • The Delta Frequency between the motor
Selection bus and the new source is within limit
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the setting.
Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure • The Phase Angle between the motor bus
4-50). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can and the new source is changing and must
be selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When enter the first phase coincidence (first
other functions such as Transfer Block #1 are zero degree crossing) within the In-Phase
selected for these inputs it will be identified next to Transfer time window (adjustable from 10
that input. to 600 cycles).
The In-Phase Transfer feature includes
Automatic In-Phase Transfer Save/Cancel two programmable advanced breaker
The Save selection saves the Automatic In-Phase closing times for Source 1 and Source 2
Transfer Tab settings either to an open file or to breakers (Figure 4-35) to coordinate the
the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the closing of the first phase coincidence.
previous open screen. Programmable breaker closing time is
from 0 to 12 cycles.
The conditions that are necessary to execute an
In‑Phase Transfer are:
•
No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not
been matched.
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus
and the new source is within limit setting.
Figure 4-52 Automatic Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
4–56
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/RESIDUAL Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking

VOLTAGE TRANSFER TAB Inputs Selection
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the
Settings/Residual Voltage Transfer
Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure
Figure 4-52, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer 4-50). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can
Settings found under the Residual Voltage Transfer be selected to block a Residual Voltage Transfer.
Tab on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog When an input is selected, it is not grayed out in the
screen. other types of transfers.
The Residual Voltage Transfer tab (Figure 4-52)

Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer
displays the settings for the Residual Voltage Save/Cancel
Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes
a command button that will disable or enable the The Save selection saves the Automatic Residual
automatic Residual Voltage Transfer. This selection Voltage Transfer Tab settings either to an open file
allows the automatic Residual Voltage Transfer to be or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to
disabled (or enabled) independent from Automatic the previous open screen.
Fast, In-Phase and Fixed Time Transfers.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a
Typically this feature is used to disable the other Residual Voltage Transfer are:
types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time
Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing • No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential • The conditions for a Fast Transfer have not
Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same been matched.
time and the decay characteristic of the motor bus
voltage determines which type of transfer is possible. • The conditions for an In-Phase Transfer
This allows the user to disable the individual types have not been matched.
of transfers if desired. • The motor bus voltage drops below the
Residual Voltage Transfer Limit setting
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual (adjustable from 0 to 60 V) within the
Voltage Limit Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit
setting (50 to 3000 cycles).
The Residual Voltage Limit can be set from 5 to 60
volts. When the motor bus voltage drops below the
Residual Voltage Limit the close command is sent
to the new source breaker. If Load Shedding has
been selected, then the Load Shedding Output is
closed when the motor bus voltage decreases to
less than the Residual Voltage Limit, then after the
Load Shedding Time Delay times out, the close
command is sent to the new source breaker.
This setting cannot be disabled, it is always the
parameter used as the condition to execute a
Residual Voltage Transfer. There is no Time Window
for the Residual Voltage Transfer. However, it must
be completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout
Time Limit setting.
Automatic Residual Voltage Transfer/Load

Shedding Time Delay
The Load Shedding Time Delay can be set from 0 to
100 cycles. The time delay defines the time period
from when the motor bus voltage decreases to
less than the Residual Voltage Limit until the close
command is sent.
4–57
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS/FIXED Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Time Delay

TIME TRANSFER TAB The Time Delay setting can be set from 30 to 1000
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Automatic Transfer cycles. When the conditions are met for a Fixed
Settings/Fixed-Time Transfer
Time Transfer the Time Delay starts timing. When
Figure 4-53, illustrates the MBTS Automatic Transfer the Time Delay times out, a close command is
Settings found under the Fixed Time Transfer Tab sent to the Load Shedding Time Delay. When the
on the Automatic Transfer Settings dialog screen. Load Shedding Time Delay times out the close
command is sent to the new source breaker. No
The Fixed Time Transfer tab (Figure 4-53) displays other parameters are monitored.
the settings for the Automatic Fixed Time Transfer.
The top right corner of the display includes a If Fixed Time Transfer has been selected as a
command button that will disable or enable the Load Shedding Function Selection in the Common
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer. This selection allows Settings (Figure 4-45), then the signal sent to the
the automatic Fixed Time Transfer to be disabled Load Shedding Output will be true when the Fixed
(or enabled) independent from Automatic Fast, Time Transfer, Time Delay times out.
In‑Phase and Residual Voltage transfers.
These settings cannot be disabled, they are the only
Typically this feature is used to disable the other types parameters used as the condition to execute a Fixed
of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time Sequence Time Transfer. There is no Time Window for the Fixed
of Transfer Logic includes the timing diagrams of the Time Transfer. However, it must be completed by
Simultaneous and Sequential Transfers. All transfers the Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit setting.
are enabled at the same time and the decay of the
motor bus voltage determines which type of transfer
is possible. This feature allows the user to disable
the individual types of transfers if desired.
The Fixed Time Transfer is based only on Time Delay
and does not use the Phase Angle, Frequency or
Voltage to supervise the closing of the new source
breaker.
Figure 4-53 Automatic Transfer Settings Fixed Time Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
4–58
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Load Shedding

Time Delay
100 cycles. The Load Shedding Time Delay defines
the time period from when the Fixed Time Transfer,
Time Delay times out and when the close command
is sent to the new source breaker.
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer/Blocking Inputs

Selection
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the
4-50). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can
be selected to block a Fixed Time Transfer. When an
input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types
of transfers.
Automatic Fixed Time Transfer Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Automatic Fixed
Time Transfer Tab settings either to an open file or
to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Fixed
Time Transfer are:
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist.
been matched.
• The conditions for an In-Phase transfer
have not been matched.
• The motor bus voltage drops below the
Residual Voltage Transfer limit setting
(adjustable from 0 to 60 V) within the
incomplete transfer lockout time limit
setting (50 to 3000 cycles).
4–59
MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS (MTS) 4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings
The Manual Transfer Settings selection from the M

ANUAL TRANSFER
Transfer Settings group (Figure 4-33) opens the a
uto_xfer MAN_XFER
Manual Transfer Settings Dialog screen (Figure
4-55), which includes the following tabs: 5. Press ENTER, the following will be
• Setup displayed:
• Fast Transfer M
ANUAL TRANSFER
• In-Phase Transfer
d
isable enable
• Residual Voltage Transfer
• Hot Parallel Transfer 6. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton
as necessary to enable or disable
Manual Transfer (upper case).
HMI Manual Transfer Enable/Disable
(MBTS Front Panel) 7. Press ENTER. The following will be
displayed:
To enable or disable Manual Transfer from the Front
Panel perform the following:
M
ANUAL TRANSFER
1. Press the ENTER pushbutton. a
uto_xfer MAN_XFER
displayed: 8. The MBTS is now in the selected Manual
Transfer Mode. Press EXIT as necessary
ENTER ACCESS CODE
to return to the Main Menu.
0

press ENTER.
LEVEL #(1,2 or 3)

A
ccess Granted!
I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
c. Go to Step 4.

I
NIT TRANSFER
INIT rmte_lcal
4–60
MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS SETUP TAB ▲ CAUTION: When the Manual Transfer Mode
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/ is selected (using an external Automatic/Manual
Setup selector switch on the control panel), the Automatic
Figure 4-55, illustrates the MBTS Manual Transfer Transfer Block SHOULD NOT BE ENABLED. If
Settings found under the Setup Tab on the Manual an unexpected event occurs, tripping the present
Transfer Settings dialog screen. source while the selector switch is in the Manual
position, and before a Manual Transfer is Initiated,
Manual Transfer Settings/Manual Transfer with the only means of transfer blocked, the motor
Mode bus will begin to die. The decay is so rapid that
the operator will not be able to respond quickly
Manual Transfer enough to initiate a transfer. Conversely, when
The Manual Transfer Mode (Figure 4-55) can be the Automatic Transfer Mode is selected (using an
Disabled or Enabled. If Disable is selected and then external Automatic/Manual selector switch on the
Save is selected, then the remaining settings in the control panel), the Manual Transfer Block SHOULD
Manual Transfer Settings dialog screen are grayed BE ENABLED to prevent an inadvertent Manual
out. There are settings in the Common Settings that Transfer.
effect the operation of the Manual Transfer.
Manual Transfer Settings/External Control

Inputs Configuration
The External Control Inputs Configuration portion of
the Manual Transfer Settings dialog screen (Figure
4-55) includes the following External Control Input
configuration selections:
•
Manual Transfer Block
• Manual Transfer Initiate
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Block

The Manual Transfer Block selection opens the
Manual Transfer Block dialog screen (Figure 4-54)
that allows the user to select an input that is used
to block Manual Transfers. When an input has
been selected it will be grayed out in other dialog Figure 4-54 Manual Transfer Block Input
screens that provide input selection since it has
already been assigned. Settings Dialog Screen
Figure 4-55 Manual Transfer Settings Dialog Screen
4–61
Manual Transfer/Manual Transfer Initiate MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/FAST

The Manual Transfer Initiate opens a dialog screen TRANSFER TAB
(Figure 4-56) that allows the user to select an input Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/
Fast Transfer
or inputs that are used to initiate Manual Transfers.
The Fast Transfer tab (Figure 4-57) displays the
The selected input will initiate an Manual Transfer settings for the Manual Fast Transfer. The top right
from Source 1 to Source 2 or from Source 2 to corner of the display includes a command button
Source 1 depending on the breaker positions at that will disable or enable the Manual Fast Transfer.
that time. If the Source 1 breaker is closed and the This selection allows the Manual Fast Transfer to
Source 2 breaker is open then the transfer will be be disabled (or enabled) independent from the In-
from Source 1 to Source 2. If the Source 2 breaker Phase, Residual Voltage and Hot Parallel transfers.
is closed and the Source 1 breaker is open then
the transfer will be from Source 2 to Source 1. The Since the Fast Transfer is the most desirable type
Manual Transfer does not have separate initiate of transfer, this feature is typically used to disable
inputs for transferring in a specific direction; this is the other types of transfers if needed. Appendix
different from the automatic transfer initiate. F, Time Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the
timing diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential
When an input has been selected it will be grayed Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time
out in other dialog screens that provide input with the decay of the motor bus voltage determining
selection since it has already been assigned. which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows
the user to disable the individual types of transfers
if desired.
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Phase Angle Limit

The Delta Phase Angle Limit can be set from 0.0 to
90.0 degrees. The Delta Phase Angle is the angle
between the voltages of the motor bus and the new
source. This setting cannot be disabled, the phase
angle is always one of the parameters used to
determine if a fast transfer can be executed.
Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 60 volts.
The Delta Voltage is the voltage difference between
the motor bus and the new source. This setting can
be disabled. If it is disabled then this parameter is
not used as a condition to execute a Fast Transfer.
Figure 4-56 Manual Transfer Initiate Input Manual Fast Transfer/Delta Frequency Limit
Settings Dialog Screen The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.02
to 2.0 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the frequency
Manual Transfer Save/Cancel difference between the motor bus and the new
source. This setting can be disabled. If disabled,
The Save selection saves the Manual Transfer
then this parameter is not used as a condition to
Settings Tab either to an open file or to the target
execute a fast transfer.
MBTS. Cancel returns the user to the previous open
screen.
4–62
Figure 4-57 Manual Transfer Settings Fast Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
Figure 4-58 Manual Fast Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–63
Manual Fast Transfer/Time Window MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/IN-PHASE

The Time Window can be set from 1 to 10 cycles. TRANSFER TAB
The Time Window defines the window of opportunity Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/
In-Phase Transfer
for a Fast Transfer. The Time Window starts when
the transfer is initiated and ends at the selected time The In-Phase Transfer tab (Figure 4-59) displays
limit. If a Fast Transfer has not been completed by the settings for the In-Phase Transfer. The top right
the end of this Time Window, then the Fast Transfer corner of the display includes a command button
is disabled and will no longer be attempted. An that will disable or enable the automatic In-Phase
In-Phase, Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is still Transfer. This selection allows the manual In-Phase
possible. transfer to be disabled (or enabled) independent
from the Manual Fast, Residual Voltage and Hot
Manual Fast Transfer/Closing Command Time Parallel Transfers.
Delay
Typically this feature is used to disable the other
The time delay can be set from 0 to 10 cycles. This types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time
time delay is only used for Fast Transfer method in Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing
Simultaneous transfer mode. Since the trip and close diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential
command are normally issued at the same time Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time
for Fast Transfer method in Simultaneous transfer and the decay of the motor bus voltage determines
mode, this time delay allows the flexibility to delay which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows
the closing command to accomplilsh the break- the user to disable the individual types of transfers
before-make mode of operation (open transition). if desired.
Manual Fast Transfer/Blocking Inputs Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Voltage Limit

Selection
The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 120
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the volts. The Delta Voltage is the voltage difference
Blocking Inputs Selection dialog screen (Figure between the motor bus and the new source. This
4-58). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can setting can be disabled. If it is disabled then this
be selected to block a Manual Fast Transfer. When parameter is not used as a condition to execute an
an input is selected, it is not grayed out in other In-Phase Transfer.
types of transfers.
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Delta Frequency
Manual Fast Transfer Save/Cancel Limit
The Save selection saves the Manual Fast Transfer The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.10 to
settings to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel 15.00 Hz. The Delta Frequency is the frequency
returns the user to the previous open screen. difference between the motor bus and the new
source.
Manual Fast Transfer are: This setting cannot be disabled. The frequency is
always one of the parameters used to determine if
a In-Phase Transfer can be executed.
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Time Window
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus
The Time Window can be set from 10 to 600 cycles.
The Time Window defines the window of opportunity
• The Delta Frequency between the motor for an In-Phase Transfer. The time window starts
bus and the new source is within limit when the transfer is initiated and ends at the
setting. selected time limit. If an In-Phase Transfer has not
• A transfer must be completed within the been completed by the end of this time window then
Fast Transfer time window of 1 to 10 cycles. the In‑Phase Transfer is disabled and will no longer
be attempted. A Residual or Fixed Time Transfer is
still possible.
4–64
Figure 4-59 Manual Transfer Settings In-Phase Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
Figure 4-60 In-Phase Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–65
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Blocking Inputs MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/RESIDUAL

Selection VOLTAGE TRANSFER TAB
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/
4-60). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can The Residual Voltage Transfer tab (Figure 4-61)
be selected to block an In-Phase Transfer. When an displays the settings for the Residual Voltage
input is selected, it is not grayed out in other types Transfer. The top right corner of the display includes
of tranfers. a command button that will disable or enable the
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer. This selection
Manual In-Phase Transfer/Save/Cancel
allows the Manual Residual Voltage Transfer to be
The Save selection saves the Manual In-Phase disabled (or enabled) independent from Manual
Transfer Tab settings either to an open file or to Fast, In-Phase and Hot Parallel Transfers.
the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the
previous open screen. Typically this feature is used to disable the other
types of transfers if needed. Appendix F, Time
The conditions that are necessary to execute an Sequence of Transfer Logic includes the timing
In-Phase Transfer are: diagrams of the Simultaneous and Sequential
Transfers. All transfers are enabled at the same time
and the decay of the motor bus voltage determines
• The conditions for Fast Transfer have not which type of transfer is possible. This feature allows
been matched. the user to disable the individual types of transfers
• The Delta Voltage between the motor bus if desired.
• The Delta Frequency between the motor Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Residual
bus and the new source is within limit Voltage Limit
setting. The Residual Voltage Limit can be set from 5 to 60
• The Phase Angle between the motor bus volts. When the motor bus voltage drops below the
and the new source is changing and must Residual Voltage Limit the close command is sent
enter the first phase coincidence (first to the new source breaker. If Load Shedding has
zero degree crossing) within the In-Phase been selected, then the Load Shedding Output
Transfer time window (adjustable from 10 is closed when the motor bus voltage decreases
to 600 cycles). to less than the Residual Voltage Limit, then after
the Load Shedding Time Delay times out the close
The In-Phase Transfer feature includes command is sent to the new source breaker.
two programmable advanced breaker
closing times for Source 1 and Source 2 This setting cannot be disabled, it is always the
breakers (Figure 4-33) to coordinate the parameter used as the condition to execute a
closing of the first phase coincidence. Residual Voltage Transfer. There is no Time Window
Programmable breaker closing time is for the Residual Voltage Transfer. However, it must
from 0 to 12 cycles. be completed by the Incomplete Transfer Lockout
Time Limit setting.
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Load

Shedding Time Delay
100 cycles. The time delay defines the time period
from when the motor bus voltage decreases to
less than the Residual Voltage Limit until the close
command is sent.
4–66
Figure 4-61 Manual Transfer Settings Residual Voltage Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
Figure 4-62 Residual Voltage Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–67
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer/Blocking MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS/HOT

Inputs Selection PARALLEL TRANSFER TAB
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Manual Transfer Settings/
Hot Parallel Transfer
4-62). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can The Hot Parallel Transfer tab (Figure 4-63) displays
be selected to block a Residual Voltage Transfer. the settings for the Hot Parallel Transfer. The top
When an input is selected, it is not grayed out in right corner of the display includes a command
other types of transfers. button that will disable or enable the Manual Hot
Parallel Transfer. Whenever the Hot Parallel Transfer
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save/Cancel is enabled the Manual Fast, In-phase and Residual
Transfers are disabled. Only when the Hot Parallel
The Save selection saves the Manual Residual
Transfer is disabled can the Manual Fast, In-phase
Voltage Transfer Tab settings either to an open file
and Residual Transfers be enabled.
or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to
the previous open screen. The Hot Parallel Transfer is typically used to transfer
the motor load back to the original source after
an Automatic Transfer has been completed and
Residual Voltage Transfer are:
the conditions that caused it to occur have been
• No Lockout/Blocking conditions exist. resolved. This transfer operates differently than all
the other transfers, in that it closes the breaker to
the new source first and then opens the breaker to
been matched.
the old source. This allows for a bumpless transfer
• The conditions for an In-Phase Transfer since the motor bus is never disconnected from a
have not been matched. source. The Hot Parallel transfer is only performed
• The motor bus voltage drops below the when the bus and new source conditions are stable.
Residual Voltage Transfer Limit setting
(adjustable from 0 to 60 V) within the Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Phase
Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time Limit Angle Limit
setting (50 to 3000 cycles). The Delta Phase Angle Limit can be set from 0.0 to
90.0 degrees. The delta angle is the angle between
the voltages of the motor bus and the new source.
This setting cannot be disabled. The phase angle
is always one of the parameters used to determine
if a Hot Parallel Transfer can be executed.
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Voltage

Limit
The Delta Voltage Limit can be set from 0 to 60 volts.
The delta voltage is the voltage difference between
the motor bus and the new source. This setting can
be disabled and if it is disabled, then this parameter
is not used as a condition to execute a Hot Parallel
transfer.
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Delta Frequency

Limit
The Delta Frequency Limit can be set from 0.02
to 0.5 hertz. The delta frequency is the frequency
difference between the motor bus and the new
source. This setting can be disabled and if it is
disabled then this parameter is not used as a
condition to execute a Hot Parallel Transfer.
4–68
Figure 4-63 Manual Transfer Settings Hot Parallel Transfer Tab Dialog Screen
Figure 4-64 Hot Parallel Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–69
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Time Window

The Time Window can be set from 1 to 50 cycles.
The Time Window defines the window of opportunity
for a Hot Parallel Transfer. The Time Window starts
when the transfer is initiated and ends at the
selected time limit. If a Hot Parallel Transfer has not
been completed by the end of this Time Window,
then the Hot Parallel Transfer is disabled and will
no longer be attempted and an Incomplete Transfer
alarm will be set.
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Tripping

Command Time Delay
The Tripping Command Time Delay can be set from
0 to 30 cycles. The Tripping Command Time Delay is
the time from when the new source breaker closes
until the old source breaker is tripped. This time
defines how long the two sources are paralleled.
This time setting should be set as short as possible
to limit the amount of time the motor bus would be
exposed to double fault currents.
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Blocking Inputs

Selection
The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the
4-64). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can
be selected to block a Hot Parallel Transfer.
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer/Save/Cancel

The Save selection saves the Manual Hot Parallel
Transfer settings either to an open file or to the target
MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous
open screen.
The conditions that are necessary to execute a Hot
Parallel Transfer are:
• No lockout/blocking conditions exist.
• The delta voltage between the motor bus
• The delta frequency between the motor
bus and the new source is within limit
setting.
• A transfer must be completed within the
Hot Parallel Transfer time window of 1 to
50 cycles.
4–70
AUTO TRIP (AT) Auto Trip/Enable/Disable

Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/Auto Trip In the top right corner of the screen is a command
button that will Disable or Enable the Auto Trip
The Auto Trip selection from the Transfer Settings feature.
group (Figure 4-33) opens the Auto Trip Dialog
Auto Trip/Breaker Trip Option
If an external operation closes the second breaker The Breaker Trip Option allows the selection of which
while leaving the first one closed, and if the Auto Trip breaker to trip when both breakers are closed. The
feature is enabled, the MBTS will trip the breaker selections include the "Just Closed Breaker" or
that was originally closed within an adjustable time "Originally Closed Breaker". Typically the Originally
delay (0 to 50 Cycles in increments of 0.5 Cycle) Closed Breaker is tripped to allow an external Hot
after the second breaker is closed. Parallel Transfer.
The Auto Trip operates in either direction to allow
external parallel transfer but prohibit inadvertent Auto Trip/Tripping Command Time Delay
parallel operation. It must be noted that the external The Tripping Command Time Delay allows the
operation that closes the second breaker must be user to delay (0 to 50 cycles) sending the selected
supervised by means that are external to the motor Breaker Trip Option.
bus transfer system. Auto Trip is not a transfer, the
only command sent is a trip command after the Auto Trip/Blocking Inputs Selection
time delay and no other parameters are used to
supervise this operation. The Blocking Inputs Selection button opens the
For example, in an application where there are 4-60). Any Input or the Fuse Loss (FL) function can
two MBTS units connected in a main-tie-main be selected to block an Auto Trip. When an input
configuration (see Figure 4-66) it is recommended is selected, it is not grayed out in other types of
to disable the Auto Trip feature. In this configuration transfers.
both units can operate a common tie breaker. If
one unit transfers by tripping its main breaker and Auto Trip Save/Cancel
closing the tie breaker, then the other unit would
now see both of its breakers closed. Depending The Save selection saves the Auto Trip settings
on the breaker selected in the Auto Trip feature either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel,
this unit would trip either its main breaker and both returns the user to the previous open screen.
motor buses would be disconnected or it would trip
its tie breaker that was just closed, disconnecting
the motor bus of the unit that originally transferred.
Neither of these situations is desirable!
4–71
Figure 4-65 Automatic Trip Settings Dialog Screen
VS1 VS1
VT-S1 VT-S2
IS1 M-4172 M-4172 IS1
IS2 IS2
VBus VS2 VS2 VBus
CT-S1 CT-S2
52 N.C. N.C. 52
S1 S2
VT-B1 VT-B2
BUS-TIE
52T
CT-B1 N.O. CT-B2
M M M M
Figure 4-66 Main-Tie-Main Application Example
4–72
FUNCTION SETTINGS Pickup — The 27#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage

Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) function Pickup (5 to 120
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints Volts) initiates a transfer from Source 1 to Source 2
The Function Settings Group (Figure 4-33) includes based on an undervoltage condition on the motor
following functions: bus. However, it can be programmed to operate any
available output.
• 27B Bus Phase Undervoltage
Voltage Inhibit — When enabled, the Voltage
• 50BF#1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Inhibit (5 to 120 Volts) is used to block the 27B
• S1BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Function when the motor bus voltage is below this
Status) setting. Voltage Inhibit is needed when the MBTS
• 81 Bus Frequency is initially energized or when the bus phase voltage
• 60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss is temporarily not applied to the unit. The Voltage
Inhibit Function may be disabled or enabled.
• 50BF#2 Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker
Status) The 27B#1 Function settings used to initiate an
• S2BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Automatic Transfer must be coordinated with any
Status) voltage dip that may occur when large motors are
started. The 27B#1 Function should not initiate a
• 81R ROCOF (Bus Voltage)
transfer when a large motor is being started. The voltage
• ISSL ISSlogic dip caused by a large motor starting can be as much
as 10 volts and last from several seconds up to 3 or 4
27B BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE seconds.
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/27B Time Delay — A Time Delay (1 to 8160 cycles) can
be applied to delay the Bus Phase Undervoltage
The 27B Bus Phase Undervoltage selection from
Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) start.
the Function Settings group (Figure 4-33) opens
the Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens
S2) dialog screen (Figure 4-67). The dialog screen the 27B#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate
includes the following tabs: Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure
• 27#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer 4-68) that allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FL)
Initiate (S1 to S2) function to be selected to block the 27B#1 function.
• 27#2 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer The 27B#1 function can also be used to activate a
Initiate (S2 to S1) selected output when it times out.
• 27#3 Bus Phase Undervoltage Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 27
• 27#4 Bus Phase Undervoltage Bus Phase Undervoltage settings either to an open
file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the user
27#1 BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE to the previous open screen.
TRANSFER INITIATE (S1 TO S2)
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/27B/27#1 27#2 BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
TRANSFER INITIATE (S2 TO S1)
Figure 4-68 displays the settings for the 27#1 Bus
Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) The 27B#2 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate
function. (S2 to S1) is used to initiate a transfer from Source
2 to Source 1 based on an undervoltage condition
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the display on the motor bus. In all other respects it is the same
includes a command button that will disable or as the 27B#1.
enable the function. This selection allows the 27#1
Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) 27#3 and 27#4 Bus Phase Undervoltage
to be disabled (or enabled) independent from the
27#2 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S2 The 27B#3 and 27B#4 are general purpose Bus
to S1), 27#3 Bus Phase Undervoltage or the 27#4 Phase Undervoltage functions. They have the same
Bus Phase Undervoltage. settings and I/O selections as 27B#1 and 27B#2
except they are not predefined to initiate transfers.
These functions could be used for load shedding,
tripping or as an alarm.
4–73
Figure 4-67 Function Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate (S1 to S2) Dialog Screen
Figure 4-68 27B#1 Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–74
50BF #1 SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE Time Delay — The time period (1 to 30 cycles) after
the Pickup Current setting is exceeded at which
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#1
point the Breaker Failure Alarm is actuated.
The 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure selection
from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-33)  NOTE: To have 50BF #1 Function working
opens the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure dialog properly, the time delay should not
be set longer than the trip S1 breaker
command’s pulse width/duration.
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the
display includes a command button that will disable I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens
or enable the function. the 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Outputs/
Blocking Inputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure
Pickup Current — A breaker failure condition is 4-71). This screen allows any input or the Fuse Loss
detected by the continued presence of current (FL) function to be selected to block the 50BF #1
after a trip command has been sent to the Source Function. The 50BF #1 Function can also be used
1 breaker. If the current is greater than the Pickup to activate a selected output when it times out.
Current setting for the time period of the Time Delay
setting after the trip command is sent, then the I/O Initiate — The I/O Initiate button opens the 50BF
breaker failure alarm indicated. #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Initiate Inputs/Initiate
Outputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-72). This
If the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected screen allows the selection of outputs or inputs that
(Common Function SettingsFigure 4-33), then can be used to initiate a breaker failure. Any of the
the breaker that was just closed is tripped open outputs can also be selected to initiate a breaker
to prevent the New Source from continuing to be failure. Figure 4-70 illustrates the logic combinations
connected through the failed breaker to the Old that can be implemented.
Source that could have a fault.
Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the 50BF
If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure settings either to an
(Common Function SettingsFigure 4-33), then a open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel, returns the
close command will not be sent since the breaker user to the previous open screen.
status would indicate that the tripped breaker did not
open. Since the transfer could not be completed the
Incomplete Transfer Lockout timer would time out
and generate a lockout condition.
Figure 4-69 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen
4–75
Trip S1 (S2) Breaker

Command
Output Initiate OR
Input Initiate
AND Delay Trip Signal

DFT Current > PU
Figure 4-70 Breaker Failure Logic Diagram
Figure 4-71 50BF #1 Source 1 Breaker Failure Figure 4-72 50BF #1 Source 1
I/O Selection Dialog Screen Breaker Failure Initiate Inputs/Initiate
Outputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–76
50BF #2 SOURCE 2 BREAKER Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the

FAILURE display includes a command button that will disable
or enable the function.
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/50BF#2
Time Delay — (0 to 30 cycles) The Source 1 breaker
The 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure selection
is considered failed when the breaker status has not
from the Function Settings group (Figure 4-33)
changed state within the programmable time after
opens the 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure dialog
a trip command is issued.
screen (Figure 4-73). The 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker
Failure Function includes the same features as 50BF  NOTE: To have S1BF Function working properly,
#1 except that it monitors for a breaker failure of the the time delay should not be set longer
Source 2 breaker and Output 1 for Trip S1 is the than the trip S2 breaker command’s
default output setting. pulse width/duration.
S1 BF SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the
(BREAKER STATUS) S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure Outputs Blocking
Inputs Selection Dialog Screen (Figure 4-75). This
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S1 BF screen allows any input or the Fuse Loss (FL)
The S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker function to be selected to block the S1 BF Function.
Status) selection from the Function Settings group The S1 BF Function can also be used to activate a
(Figure 4-33) opens the S1 BF Source 1 Breaker selected output when it times out.
Failure (Breaker Status) dialog screen (Figure 4-74).
Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the S1 BF
The Source 1 breaker status inputs are monitored for Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) settings
breaker failure. The Source 1 breaker is considered either to an open file or to the target MBTS. Cancel,
failed when the breaker status has not changed state returns the user to the previous open screen.
within the programmable time after a trip command
is issued. S2 BF SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE
When the Simultaneous Transfer mode is selected (BREAKER STATUS)
(Common Function Settings (Figure 4-34), and Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/S2 BF
a breaker failure occurs on Source 1 that should
have tripped, the breaker that was just closed will The S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker
be tripped. This prevents the New Source from Status) selection from the Function Settings group
continuing to be connected through the failed (Figure 4-33) opens the S2 BF Source 2 Breaker
breaker to the old source that may be faulted. Failure (Breaker Status) dialog screen (Figure
4-76). The S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure Function
If the Sequential Transfer mode is selected includes the same features as S1 BF except that
(Common Function Settings (Figure 4-34), then a it monitors for a breaker failure of the Source 2
close command will not be sent since the breaker breaker.
status would indicate that the tripped breaker did not
open. Since the transfer could not be completed, the
Incomplete Transfer Lockout timer would time out
and generate a lockout condition.
Figure 4-73 50BF #2 Source 2 Breaker Failure Dialog Screen
4–77
Figure 4-74 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen
Figure 4-75 S1 BF Source 1 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) I/O Selection Dialog Screen
Figure 4-76 S2 BF Source 2 Breaker Failure (Breaker Status) Dialog Screen
4–78
60FL BUS VT FUSE LOSS I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the
60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss I/O Selection Dialog Screen
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/60FL
(Figure 4-77) that allows any input to be selected
The 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss selection from the to block the 60FL Function. The 60FL Function can
Function Settings group (Figure 4-33) opens the also be used to activate a selected output when it
60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss dialog screen (Figure 4-78). times out.
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the The Fuse-loss (FL) function is activated immediately
display includes a command button that will disable with NO time delay when the Bus VT fuse loss
or enable the function. condition is detected. The FL function is still
operated internally according to the Delta Voltage
 NOTE: When the 60FL function is disabled, it Pickup setting of the 60FL function even though the
will only disable the Block Transfer or 60FL function is DISABLED.
Fixed Time Transfer operation in the Bus
VT Fuse Loss Condition. The status of
the Fuse Loss (FL) Input is still active in
all other functions, such as 27B1, 27B2,
27B3, 27B4, etc.
Delta Voltage Pickup — The 60FL Bus VT Fuse-

Loss condition is detected by comparing either
the Three-Phase voltage of the motor bus to the
Three-Phase voltage of the connected source
(VT’s in Three-Phase connection) or the Single
Phase voltage of the motor bus to the Single Phase
voltages of the connected source (VT’s in single
phase connection):
• Phase A to Phase A
• Phase B to Phase B
• Phase C to Phase C
Time Delay — A Time Delay can be applied to delay Figure 4-77 60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss Function
the 60FL Bus VT Fuse-Loss function output.
Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen
Bus VT Fuse Loss Condition — When the
difference in voltage between the bus and the
connected source (with connected source breaker
in closed position) is present for the time delay,
the MBTS will respond based on the selection to
either Block Transfer or perform an automatic Fixed
Time Transfer when a transfer is initiated. Since the
bus voltage cannot be observed the only possible
transfer that could be performed is the Fixed Time
Transfer.
Figure 4-78 60FL Bus VT Fuse Loss Dialog

Screen
4–79
81 BUS VOLTAGE FREQUENCY Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the

81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Dialog
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81
Screen settings either to an open file or to the target
Figure 4-80 displays the settings for the 81 #1 Bus MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous
Voltage Frequency function. The settings for the open screen.
81 #2 Bus Voltage Frequency are the same as the
81 #1.
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the
display includes a command button that will disable
or enable the function. This selection allows the
81 #1 Bus Voltage Frequency to be disabled (or
enabled) independent from the 81 #2 Bus Voltage
Frequency.
Pickup — The 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency
Function detects a drop in frequency of the motor
bus. If the frequency is less than the Pickup setting
(50.00 to 67.00 Hz) or (40.00 to 57.00 Hz for 50 Hz
unit) for a time period that exceeds the Time Delay
setting, then an 81 #1 or 81 #2 will be indicated and
an output can be activated.
The 81 #1 function can be used for load shedding
(Common Setting Outputs Load Shedding). The 81
Function is automatically disabled when the bus
phase voltage input is less than 5 to 15 V (Positive
Sequence) based on the frequency, or less than 5
V (Single Phase).
Time Delay — A Time Delay (5 to 65500 cycles)
can be applied to delay the Bus Voltage Frequency
output.
Figure 4-79 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency
I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens the Function Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen
81 #1 Bus Voltage Frequency I/O Selection Dialog
Screen (Figure 4-79) that allows any input or the
Fuse Loss (FL) function to be selected to block
the 81 #1(2) Function. The 81 #1(2) Function can
also be used to activate a selected output when it
times out.
Figure 4-80 81 #1(2) Bus Voltage Frequency Function Dialog Screen
4–80
81R (Rate Of Change Of Frequency) Time Delay — A Time Delay can be applied to delay
(BUS VOLTAGE) the 81R ROCOF (Bus Voltage) function output. The
time delay and magnitude settings of the 81R should
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/81R be based on simulation studies.
Figure 4-81 displays the settings for the 81R #1 Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit — The function
ROCOF (Bus Voltage) function. The settings for uses the negative sequence voltage to block the
the 81R #2 ROCOF (Bus Voltage) are the same as 81R.
the 81R #1.
Increasing ROCOF — The Increasing ROCOF
 NOTE: Bus VT configuration must be set to
(Bus Voltage) can be selected as either Enable or
Three-Phase to enable the 81R ROCOF
Disable. When the Increasing ROCOF is selected
Function.
to Disable, the 81R function detects the rate of
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of the change of frequency of the motor bus voltage in the
display includes a command button that will disable decreasing direction only, and the 81R function is
or enable the function. This selection allows the 81R blocked to detect the increasing direction. When the
#1 ROCOF (Bus Voltage) to be disabled (or enabled) Increasing ROCOF is selected to Enable, the 81R
independent from the 81R #2. function detects the rate of change of frequency of
the motor bus voltage in both the increasing and
Pickup — The 81R Rate of Change of Frequency decreasing directions.
(ROCOF) Bus Voltage function is used to detect
the rate of change of the frequency of the motor I/O Selection — The I/O Selection button opens
bus as it decays. When the bus is disconnected the 81R ROCOF (Bus Voltage) I/O Selection Dialog
from the original source the frequency begins to Screen (Figure 4-82) that allows any input or the
decrease and the longer the bus is disconnected Fuse Loss (FL) function to be selected to block the
the faster the frequency changes. This function is 81R #1(2) Function. The 81R #1(2) Function can
used to recognize that the ROCOF has exceeded also be used to activate a selected output when it
the Pickup setting. times out.
 NOTE: Setting the Pickup to a minimum value of Save/Cancel — The Save selection saves the
0.2 Hz/sec is recommended when using 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Function Dialog
nominal frequencies. Screen settings either to an open file or to the target
MBTS. Cancel, returns the user to the previous
This function is typically used for load shedding. If a open screen.
load that is causing the frequency to change quickly
can be disconnected, then a transfer may still be
possible. The 81R Function is automatically disabled
during unbalanced faults and other disturbances.
4–81
Figure 4-81 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Function Dialog Screen
Figure 4-82 81R #1(2) ROCOF (Bus Voltage) Inputs/Outputs Selection Dialog Screen
4–82
ISSL (ISSLOGIC®) The only limitation is that an ISSLogic Function may

not be used to initiate itself.
Path: System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL
Figure 4-83 displays the settings for the ISSL There are three Blocking Input sources:
(ISSLogic) function. The settings for the ISSL #2 • Blocking Inputs
through 6 are the same as the ISSL #1. • Block System Status
The MBTS provides six logic functions and • Blocking using the Communication Point
associated ISSLogic. The logic functions can be
used to allow external devices to trip through the The activation state of the input function selected
MBTS, providing additional target information for the in the Initiating Function can be either Timeout
external device. More importantly, these functions (Trip) or Pickup. The desired Time Delay for security
can be used in conjunction with ISSLogic to expand considerations can be obtained in the ISSLogic
the capability of the MBTS by allowing the user to Function Time Delay setting.
define customized operating logic.
The ISSLogic Function can be programmed to
Enable/Disable — The top right corner of each perform any or all of the following tasks:
ISSlogic tab includes a command button that will • Change the Active Setting Profile
disable or enable the function. This selection allows
the ISSL #1 (ISSlogic) to be disabled (or enabled) • Close an Output Contact
independent from the ISSL #2, #3, #4, #5 and #6. • Be activated for use as an input to another
ISSLogic Function
ISSLogic Settings and Logic Functions
• Initiate a transfer
ISSlogic includes six Initiating Input sources:
• Block a transfer
• Initiating Outputs
• Initiating Function Time Out
• Initiating Function Pickup (including the
ISSLogic Functions themselves)
• Initiating Inputs
• Initiating System Status
• Initiation using the Communication Point
4–83
Figure 4-83 ISSLogic® Function Dialog Screen
4–84
ISSLogic® Function Setup

To setup an ISSLogic Function perform the following:
1. From the ISScom® Main Screen menu
select System/Setup/Setpoints/ISSL.
ISSLogic will display the ISSLogic
Function dialog screen (Figure 4-83).
2. From the top right corner of the screen
select the desired ISSL tab, then select
Enable.
3. If desired select the Initiating Outputs
button. ISSLogic will display the Initiating
Outputs Selection screen (Figure 4-84).
a. Select the desired Initiating Outputs,
then select OK.
b. Select the desired Initiating Output
Logic Function (AND/OR).
Figure 4-85 Selection Screen for Initiating

Function Timeout
Figure 4-84 Selection Screen

for Initiating Outputs
6. If desired select the Initiating Function

Timeout button. ISSLogic will display
the Initiating Function Timeout Selection
7. Select the desired Initiating Function
Timeout, then select OK.
8. If desired select the Initiating Function
Pickup button. ISSLogic will display
the Initiating Function Pickup Selection
9. Select the desired Initiating Function
Pickup, then select OK.
Figure 4-86 Selection Screen for Initiating

Function Pickup
4–85
10. If desired select the Initiating System 12. Select the desired Logic Function (AND/
Status button. ISSLogic® will display the OR/NOR/NAND). The selected Logic
Initiating System Status Selection screen Function (AND/OR/NOR/NAND) will
(Figure 4-87). apply only to the Initiating Function
Timeout Selection(s), Initiating Function
11. Select the desired Initiating System Pickup Selection(s) and Initiating System
Status selection(s), then select OK. Status Selection(s). The selected Logic
Function will ignore the functions and
System Status that are not selected.
Figure 4-87 Selection Screen for Initiating System Status
4–86
13. If desired select the "Initiate via 20. Select the desired Block System
Communication point". Select Check Status(s), then select OK.
Box.
21. Select the desired Blocking Inputs/Block
14. If desired select Initiating Input button. System Status Logic Function (AND/
ISSLogic® will display the Initiating Input OR). The selected Blocking Inputs/
Selection screen (Figure 4-88). Blocking System Status Logic Function
(AND/OR) will apply only to the selected
Blocking Input(s) and Blocking System
Status Selection(s); the selected Logic
Function will ignore the Inputs and
System Status that are not selected.
22. If desired select the "Block via
Communication point". Select Check
Box.
23. Select the desired Time Delay.
 NOTE: The DO/RST Timer is described in detail
in the "Dropout/Reset Timer Feature"
later in this section.
24. Select the desired DO/RST Delay.

for Initiating Inputs 25. Select either Dropout Timer or Reset
Timer.
15. Select the desired Initiating Input(s), then  NOTE: The ISSlogic® Profile Switch feature is
select OK. described in detail in the "Change Active
16. Select the desired Initiating Inputs Logic Profile (ISSLogic)" later in this section.
Function (AND/OR).
17. If desired select Blocking Inputs button. 26. Determine if Profile Switching will be
ISSLogic will display the Blocking Inputs active and proceed as follows:
Selection screen (Figure 4-89). a. If Profile Switching will not be
activated, then select "Not Activated".
b. If Profile Switching will be activated
then select the desire profile.
27. Select the desired Outputs.

28. Determine if a transfer or transfer block
will be initiated and proceed as follows:
a. If a transfer or transfer block will not
be initiated, then select "No Transfer
Initiate".
b. If a transfer or transfer block will
be Initiated then select the desire
function.
29. Select Save, ISSlogic will return to the
for Blocking Inputs System Setpoints Dialog Screen (Figure
4-33).
18. Select the desired Blocking Input(s), then
select OK. ISSL #1 is now setup, the remaining ISSL selections
can be setup as desired.
19. If desired select Block System Status
button. ISSLogic will display the Block
System Status Selection screen (Figure
4-90).
4–87
Change Active Profile (ISSLogic) When an ISSLogic® Function is enabled and the
To change the active profile simply select the logic becomes "true" the ISS# is always activated
desired profile. The "Not activated" selection means so it could be used as an initiating input to any other
the profile will not be changed. If the presently active ISSLogic.
profile is selected as the profile to which to change
Since there are six ISSLogic Functions per setting
there is effectively no change since it would change
profile, depending on the number of different MBTS
to the same profile.
settings defined, the scheme may provide up to 24
different logic schemes.
Figure 4-90 Selection Screen for Block System Status
4–88
DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature Reset Delay Timer

The DO/RST timer can be set as either Dropout or The Reset Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure
Reset mode. The operation of the Dropout Delay 4-92. The Reset Delay Timer feature allows the user
Timer and the Reset Delay Timer are described to delay the reset of the PU Time Delay Timer and
below. hold the accumulated timer value (A) for the duration
of the Reset Time Delay time period (B). The Reset
Dropout Delay Timer Delay Timer starts when the ISSLogic PU Status
drops out (C).
The Dropout Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure
4-91. The Dropout Delay Timer feature allows the If the ISSLogic PU Status remains dropped out
user to affect an output time delay that starts when (D) after the reset delay has timed out, then the
the ISSLogic PU Status drops out (A) and can hold ISSLogic PU timer value will be reset to zero (E).
the Output (D) status true beyond the Output Seal
In Delay value (C). If the ISSLogic PU Status reasserts (F) while the
Reset Delay Timer is still timing, then the PU Timer
However, the Seal In Delay (E) may hold the Output Delay begins timing from the accumulated value (G).
(B) true if the time after ISSLogic PU Status dropout
(A) and Dropout Delay Timer value (D) are less than
the Seal In Delay time (E).
Dropout Delay Timer

25 35
Cycles
ISSLogic Functions (1 - 6)
PU Status
PU Time Delay
Setting (30) Seal in Delay
Seal in Delay E
PU Time Delay Timing Dropout Delay
B
Output
A C D
Figure 4-91 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram
Reset Delay Timer

25 12 25 8 5 10
Cycles
ISSLogic Functions (1 - 6) D
C F
PU Status
Reset Reset
Reset Delay
B Delay Delay
PU Time Delay
10 Cycles
Setting (30)
A G
Seal In
PU Time Delay Timing Timer
E
Output
Figure 4-92 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram
4–89
4–90
ISSLogic Functions
Initiating Outputs This section of ISSLogic
used to activate the desired Output
This section of ISSLogic initiates
the Function Operation
Outputs
Selectable And/Or Block

Transfer
Initiating Function
Programmable
function(s) Initiate
(Incl. ISSLogic Selectable And/Or
Transfer
and System
Status) Programmed
Time Delay
Selectable And/Or/Nor/Nand
Selectable And/Or 0-65,500 cycles Programmed

(1091sec at Outputs 5-8
60Hz)
ISSLogic # N
Activated
Initiating Inputs
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input
Selectable And/Or
Initiate Via
Figure 4-93 ISSLogic Function Diagram

Communication
Point
Blocking Inputs
This section of ISSLogic is used
to Block the Function Operation
Programmable
Inputs and AUX
Input
Selectable And/Or
Block Via
Communication
Point
Installation – 5
5 Installation
5.1 General Information................................................................. 5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions............................................. 5–1
5.3 External Connections............................................................... 5–5
5.4 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers..................................... 5–15
5.5 ISScom® Communications and Analysis

Software Installation............................................................... 5–18
5.6 Activating Initial Local Communications................................. 5–18
5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout................................................ 5–20
5.8 Initial Setup Procedure........................................................... 5–21
Service Conditions and Conformity to CE

5.1 General Information Standard
Stating conformance to CE Standard EN 61010‑1
 NOTE: Prior to the installation of the equipment,
2001, operation of this equipment within the
it is essential to review the contents of
this manual to locate data which may following service conditions does not present any
be of importance during the installation known personnel hazards outside of those stated
procedures. The following is a quick herin:
review of the contents of this chapter. • 5° to 40° Centigrade
• Maximum relative humidity 80% for
The person or group responsible for the installation of temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing in
the MBTS will find herein all mechanical information a linear manner to 50% relative humidity
required for the physical installation, equipment at 40° C.
ratings, and all external connections in this chapter.
For reference, the Three-Line Connection Diagrams This equipment will function properly, and at stated
are repeated from Chapter 4, System Settings accuracies beyond the limits of this CE Standard,
and Setpoints. Further, a commissioning checkout as per the equipment's specifications, stated in this
procedure is outlined using the HMI option to check Instruction Book.
the external CT and VT connections. Additional tests
which may be desirable at the time of installation are It is suggested that the terminal connections
described in Chapter 6, Testing. illustrated here be transferred to station one-line
wiring and three-line connection diagrams, station
panel drawings and station DC wiring schematics.
If during the commissioning of the M-4172 Digital
Motor Bus Transfer System, additional tests are
desired, Chapter 6, Testing, may be consulted.
5–1
5.2 Mechanical/Physical
Dimensions
Figure 5-1 contains the physical dimensions of the

MBTS that may be required for mounting the unit on
a rack. Figure 5-2 provides cutout dimensions. Figure
5-3 provides vertical panel mounting dimensions.
17.50 ± .12
.00
[44.5 +.30 - .00]
9.97
[25.32]
19.00
[48.26]
18.31 0.35
[46.51] [0.89]
2.25 5.21
M-4172 DIGITAL MOTOR [13.23]
BUS TRANSFER SYSTEM [5.72]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1.48
[3.76]
0.40 [1.02] X 0.27
NOTE: Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. [0.68] Slot (4X)
Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis

Figure 5-1 Horizontal Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions
5–2
18.31
[46.51]
0.32
[0.81]
[0.71]
M-4172 (HORIZONTAL)
TOLERANCE: .XX ± .015
Figure 5-2 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions (Horizontal and Vertical)
5–3
Installation – 5
5.65
[14.40]
5.59
[14.20] 0.03
Actual [0.076]
2.25 1.67
0.35 [5.72] [4.24] 2.25 1.67
[0.89] [5.72] [4.24]
0.28 [0.71]
Dia. (4X)
STATUS
19.00
[48.26]
OUTPUTS
18.31
[46.51]
17.5
[44.45]
ACTUAL
17.68
[44.91]
EXIT ENTER
STATU S
R ES ET
PS 2 PS 1
B R KR BRK R
O PE N O PE N
S O URC E SO URC E
1 2
BRKR BRK R
C LO S E D C LO S E D
SY S D IA G /
OK T IM E
SY NC
CO M 1
M-4172 M-4205
DIGITAL MOTOR
BUS
FASTTRANSFER SYSTEM
TRANSFER SYSTEM
RR
Integrated Synchronizing Systems
B EC
EC K W IIT
TH
CO
O.. I NC .
EL
E L EC T R
RIIC
Ma d e in U .S .A .
Recommended cutout when relay is not used as

standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted.
17.50
[44.45]
9.97 10.20
[25.32] [25.91]
19.00
[48.26]
Figure 5-3 Vertical Unit Mechanical/Physical Dimensions
5–4
Installation – 5
Insulation Coordination
5.3 External Connections
Sensing Inputs: 60 V to 140 V, Installation Category
8 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal IV, Transient Voltages not to exceed 5,000 V.
must be connected to an earthed ground
anytime external connections have been made Torque Requirements
to the unit. • Terminals 1–34: 12.0 in-lbs
8 WARNING: ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be Terminals 35–63: 8.0 in-lbs, minimum,
•
connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum
with 11 common because these contact inputs
are internally wetted. Application of external s CAUTION: Over torquing may result in terminal
voltage on these inputs may result in damage damage.
to the units.
8 WARNING: Do not open live CT circuits. MBTS Outputs
Live CT circuits should be shorted prior to All outputs are shown in the de-energized state for
disconnecting CT wiring to the M-4172. Death standard reference. MBTS standard reference is
or severe electrical shock may result. defined as the non-asserted state, or power to the
MBTS is removed.
To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listings,
terminal block connections must be made with No. Output contacts OUTPUT1 through OUTPUT4
22‑12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire inserted in are predefined to Trip and Close the Source 1 and
an AMP #324915 (or equivalent) connector, and wire Source 2 breakers and are closed for a defined pulse
insulation used must be rated at 75° C minimum. length (pulse length can be programmed from 15 to
30 Cycles). The power supply alarm output contact
Power Supply (form 'b') and the self-test alarm output contact (form
'c'), and one output contact for lockout or blocking
If the M-4172 is equipped with the optional second status (form 'c'). These outputs are predefined.
power supply (Figure 5-4), the power source may
be the same or two different sources. The three programmable output contacts OUTPUT5
through OUTPUT7 (two form 'a' and one form 'c'),
the Lockout/Block alarm output contact OUTPUT8
(form 'c'), the power supply alarm output contact
(form 'b') and the self-test alarm output contact (form
58 59 60 61 62 63
'c'), are all rated as per IEEE C37.90 for tripping.
(Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, carry 8 A, break 6 A
@ 120 Vac, break 0.5A @ 48 Vdc; 0.3A @ 125 Vdc;
0.2A @ 250 Vdc with L/R = 40 mSec.)
+ - +- Any of the MBTS functions can be individually

programmed to activate any one or more of the
Figure 5-4 Power Supply Connection programmable output contacts (Outputs 5 to 7).
Any output contact can also be selected as pulsed
Grounding Requirements or latched.
The M-4172 is designed to be mounted in an The power supply MBTS (P/S) is energized when
adequately grounded metal panel, using grounding the power supply is OK. The self-test MBTS is
techniques (metal-to-metal mounting) and hardware energized when the MBTS has performed all self-
that assures a low impedance ground. tests successfully.
Unit Isolation Replacement Fuses

Sensing inputs should be equipped with test F1–F4 replacement fuses must be fast-acting 3
switches and shorting devices where necessary Amp, 250 V (3AB) Beckwith Electric Part Number
to isolate the unit from external potential or current 420‑00885.
sources.
5–5

must be connected to inputs
(terminals 5 through 10 with 11
common) because these contact
inputs are internally wetted with 24
Vdc. Application of external voltage
on these inputs may result in damage
to the units.
2. 3 CAUTION: The 52a or 52b Breaker

Status contact can be connected to
Input 1 52/S1 and Input 4 52/S2. The
M‑4172 must be programmed to agree
with the 52a or 52b contact connections
respectively.
3. 8 WARNING:The protective grounding

terminal must be connected to an
earthed ground any time external
connections have been made to the
unit.

 NOTE: The self-test relay is energized

when the relay has performed all
self-tests successfully.

1&2
energized when any Lockout/

Blocking condition occurs. See
Lockout/Blocking section for details.

energized when the power supply
is functioning properly.
3
Figure 5-5 External Connections

(Horizontal Mount)
5–6
Installation – 5

must be connected to inputs
U.S. PATENT 7,468,593
IRIG - B (terminals 5 through 10 with 11
common) because these contact
3 35 inputs are internally wetted with 24
36
COM 2
E T HE RNE T Vdc. Application of external voltage
COM 2
on these inputs may result in damage
37 RS 2 3 2
to the units.
38
B EC K W IT H E L ECT R IC C O . INC .
VA
6 19 0 118 t h AV E NO .
L A RG O , F L 3 3 7 7 3

VAB S
2. 3 CAUTION: The 52a or 52b Breaker

39
O
U
40
VB C
R
1 Status contact can be connected to
41
VBC E
1 2 Input 1 52/S1 and Input 4 52/S2. The
42
3 M‑4172 must be programmed to agree
with the 52a or 52b contact connections
-
727- 5 4 4 - 23 26
VC RS 4 8 5
COM 3 4
VCA
respectively.
+
43
6 5
R 0 IN6
44
A
-
T 1 IN5 6
8 WARNING:The protective grounding

E 4
D
V
0
V VA
52/S2
a/b IN4
7 3.
O
L 5
VAB
S
O
IN3 8 terminal must be connected to an
T
A
G
0
/
6
U
R IN2 9 earthed ground any time external
E 0
45 C
E 52/S1
a/b IN1
1 connections have been made to the
Danger! Contact avec les terminaux peut causer un choc electrique
10
H
&
unit.
z 2
46
VB 2
(
N
O 47
VBC
INPUTS !
M
I
IN
N
A
48
VC RT N 11  NOTE: All relays are shown in the de-
L
VCA
49
(
12
50
P/S
13
VA
SELF TEST
VAB 14
51
52
BUS 15
 NOTE: The self-test relay is energized
when the relay has performed all
VB
16
VBC
53
L B
OL
17 self-tests successfully.
54 CO
VC KC 8 18
OK
VCA U I
55
TN
19
G
1A S
R
C
U
56
I S1
O
U
R
20
energized when any Lockout/
Blocking condition occurs. See
C
7 21
(
MODEL: M-4172
A RN 57 E
1
T RO
E E M
Lockout/Blocking section for details.
5 0 Hz
22
D
(
N S
58 O
T U
I S2 R 23
C
5A 59 E
2
6
6 0 Hz
24
OUT-
60 PUTS QQ NOTE: The power supply relay (P/S) is
+
25
18- 5 6
85-265 PS 2 5 energized when the power supply
FIRMWARE: D-0229
61 - 26
is functioning properly.
62 27
+
18- 5 6
PS 1 4
S E RIA L NO .
85-265 CLOSE
63 - S2
28
29
3
TRIP
30
S2
F3 F1
31
2
PS 2 CLOSE
32
S1
3 A MP,
F4 33
250V, F2
(3A B) 1
TRIP
34
S1
PS 1
Figure 5-6 Vertical Unit External Connections
5–7

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48
CT-S1 Single VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection CT-S2 Single

Phase CT Phase CT
M-4172
IS1 IS2
M-4172 VA VB VC M-4172 1
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
52S1 56 58 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-7 Three-Phase Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–8
Installation – 5

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Three VT Wye-Wye VT-S2 Three VT Wye-Wye

Alternate Connection Alternate Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48
VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye

Alternate Connection
Phase CT Phase CT
M-4172
IS1 IS2
M-4172 VA VB VC M-4172 1
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
52S1 56 58 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-8 Three-Phase Wye-Primary/Wye Secondary, One Phase Grounded

VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–9

A B C A B C
VT-S1 Two VT Open-Delta Connection VT-S2 Two VT Open-Delta Connection
M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

Phase CT VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection Phase CT
IS1 IS2
M-4172
M-4172 M-4172 1
VAB VBC VCA
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
either Phase A, Phase B or Phase C respectively.
Figure 5-9 Three-Phase Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–10
Installation – 5
SOURCE S1 (S1) SOURCE 2 (S2)

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48

Phase CT 2 Phase-Ground Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 1
M-4172
VA VB VC
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-10 Single-Phase, Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–11

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

2 Phase-Phase Phase CT
Phase CT
IS1 Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 1
M-4172
VAB VBC VCA
1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-11 Single-Phase, Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–12
Installation – 5

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VA VA
39 45
38 44
VB VB
41 47
40 46
VC VC
43 49
42 48

Phase CT Phase CT
IS1 VT-B Three VT Wye-Wye Connection IS2
M-4172 M-4172 M-4172 1
1 57 VA VB VC 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-12 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Ground, Three-Phase Bus Side,

Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–13
SOURCE 1 (S1) SOURCE 2(S2)

A B C A B C

M-4172 M-4172
VAB VAB
39 45
38 44
VBC VBC
41 47
40 46
VCA VCA
43 49
42 48

Phase CT Phase CT
VT-B Two VT Open-Delta Connection
IS1 IS2
M-4172 M-4172 M-4172 1
VAB VBC VCA

1 57 59
51 50 53 52 55 54
56 58
52S1 52S2
STATION BUS SYSTEM

A A
B B
C C
MOTOR MOTOR
Figure 5-13 Single-Phase, Source Side, Phase-Phase, Three-Phase Bus Side,

Open Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram
5–14
Installation – 5
4. Loosen the two circuit board retention

5.4 Circuit Board Switches and screws (captured).
Jumpers
5. Remove the circuit board from the
See Figure 5-14 for Circuit Board Jumper and Switch chassis.
locations. 6. Jumpers J5, J18, J46, J60, and J61 are
now accessible on the board (B‑0970).
See Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 for Circuit Board Jumper See Figure 5-14, M-4172 Circuit Board
and Switch configuration details. (B-0970) for locations.
7. Dipswitch SW1 is now accessible. See
Accessing Switches and Jumpers Figure 5-14 for location.
8 WARNING: Operating personnel must not
8. Insert circuit board into chassis guides
remove the cover or expose the printed circuit
and seat firmly.
board while power is applied. IN NO CASE may
the circuit-based jumpers or switches be moved 9. Tighten circuit board retention screws.
with power applied.
10. Reconnect "J" connectors to correspond‑
8 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal ing plugs.
must be connected to an earthed ground any 11. Reinstall cover plate.
time external connections have been made to
the unit. See Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6, Note #3.
 NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) is
▲ CAUTION: This unit contains MOS circuitry, which incorporated on pins 1 and 9 when used
can be damaged by static discharge. Care should for +/- 15 V.
be taken to avoid static discharge on work surfaces
and service personnel.
1. De-energize the M-4172.
2. Remove the screws that retain the front
cover.
3. Remove the "J" connectors from the
corresponding plugs, P4, 5, 6, 7, 9 and
11 from the circuit board (B-0970).
Jumper Position Description

A to B Demodulated IRIG-B TTL signal on Pin 6 COM2
J5
B to C Modulated IRIG-B signal BNC (Default)
A to B COM3 200 ohm termination resistor inserted
J18
B to C COM3 no termination (Default)
A to B COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM1
J46
B to C COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM2 (Default)
A to B Connects DCD signal to Pin 1 of COM2 (Default)
J60
A to C Connects +15V to Pin 1 of COM2
B to C Connects -15V to Pin 9 of COM2
J61
A to B COM2 Pin 9 float (Default)
▲ CAUTION: A loss of calibration, setpoints, and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized
to default.
Table 5-1 Jumpers
5–15
Dip Switch SW1

1 2 3 4
Open Switches should not be changed
X X X (up) while unit is energized
Closed
X (down)
3 up 4 up Run Mode
3 up 4 down Initialize EEPROM to default* See CAUTION below.
3 down 4 up Initialize Access Codes and Communication*
3 down 4 down Factory Use
2 up Flash Update Disable (Factory Default)
2 down Flash Update Enable
1 up Redundant Power Supply Unit (Optional)
1 down Single Power Supply Unit (Standard M‑4172 PS)
* After power up the OK LED remains extinguished and the Diagnostic LED will illuminate
when operation has been satisfactorily completed.
▲▲ CAUTION: A loss of calibration,setpoints and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized to
default.
Table 5-2 Dip Switch SW-1
5–16
Installation – 5
Dip Switch
J46
J18
J22 J21
J5 J20
J61
J60
Figure 5-14 M-4172 Circuit Board (B-0970)
5–17
5.5 ISScom® Communications and 5.6 Activating Initial Local

Analysis Software Installation Communications
ISScom Installation and Setup The MBTS and ISScom Communications and
ISScom runs with the Microsoft Windows® 98 Analysis Software are shipped from the factory
operating system or later. ISScom only supports with the same default communication parameters.
communication using the MODBUS protocol. Therefore, it may not be necessary to set up
communication parameters.
ISScom is available on CD-ROM, or may
be downloaded from our website at www. In order for ISScom to communicate with the MBTS
beckwithelectric.com using direct serial connection, a serial "null modem"
cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P)
The M-3871 ISScom Communications and Analysis for the MBTS, and an applicable connector for the
Software is not copy-protected. For more information computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a
on your specific rights and responsibilities, see the null modem adapter are provided in Appendix B,
licensing agreement enclosed with your software or Communications.
contact Beckwith Electric.
Activating initial communications using default
Hardware Requirements communication parameters is accomplished as
follows:
ISScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible
computer that provides at least the following: 1. Verify that a direct serial connection
between the PC hosting ISScom and the
• 8 MB of RAM target MBTS COM1 (front) is in place.
• Microsoft Windows 98 or later
2. Select the ISScom icon (Figure 5-15)
• CD-ROM drive from the Becoware folder or Desktop.
• one serial (RS-232) communication port The ISScom Main Screen (Figure 3-5)
is displayed.
• pointing device (mouse)
3. Select the COMM menu item. ISScom
will display the Communication Dialog
Installing ISScom
Screen (Figure 3-7).
1. Insert software CD-ROM into your drive.
4. If the computer is connected through
An Auto-Install program will establish either an RS-232 port or RS-485 port
a program folder (Becoware) and perform the following:
subdirectory (ISScom). After installation,
the ISScom program item icon (see a. Select Serial COM Port from the
Figure 5-15) is located in Becoware. The Comm Device selection.
default location for the application files b. Select the PC Comm Port that is
is on drive C:, in the new subdirectory connected to the MBTS.
"ISScom" (C:\Becoware\ISScom).
c. Select Open Com. This action
attempts to establish communication.
5. If ISScom returns a "COM Opened and

Level #(1, 2 or 3) access granted" then
Figure 5-15 ISScom Program Icon communications have been established.
Enter any valid ISScom command(s) as
2. If the Auto-Install program does not desired. To close the communication
launch when the CD-ROM is inserted channel when connected locally, select
into the drive then proceed as follows: the Close COM button.
a. Select Run from the Start Menu.
b. I n t h e R u n d i a l o g s c r e e n ,
locate the installation file (sfi_
m3871Acom_V__.exe) contained
on the ISScom installation disk.
c. Select Run to start the installation
process.
5–18
Installation – 5
6. If ISScom® returns an error message, g. Press ENTER. The MBTS will

then determine the MBTS COM1 display:
communication parameters as follows:
COM1 STOP BITS
a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMI
press ENTER. The MBTS will X
display:
Record the Stop Bits value that is
INIT TRANSFER displayed: __________
INIT rmte_lcal 
h. Pres EXIT as necessary to exit the
b. Press the right arrow pushbutton until HMI.
the MBTS displays: i. Select the COMM menu item. ISScom
will display the Communication
COMMUNICATION Dialog Screen (Figure 3-7).

 stat COMM setup  j. Verify the ISScom communication
parameters are the same as the
c. Press ENTER. The MBTS will MBTS COM1 parameters.
display: k. Verify that the PC Comm Port that is
connected to the MBTS is selected.
COM1 SETUP
l. Select Open Com. This action will
COM1 com2 com3 com_adr  attempt to establish communication.
m. If ISScom returns a "COM Opened
d. Press ENTER. The MBTS will and Level # (1, 2 or 3) access
display: granted" then communications have
been established. Enter any valid
COM1 BAUD RATE
ISScom command(s) as desired.

 baud_4800 baud_9600
To close the communication channel
Record the Baud Rate that is when connected locally, select the Close
displayed in all Caps: __________ COM button.
e. Press ENTER. The MBTS will

display:
COM1 DEAD SYNC TIME

XX ms
Record the Dead Sync Time that is

displayed: __________
f. Press ENTER. The MBTS will

display:
COM1 PARITY
none odd even
Record the Parity that is displayed

in all Caps: __________
5–19
8. The unit should display either S1 VA, S1

5.7 Pre-Commissioning Checkout VB, S1 VC and S1 VPS (three phase line-
to-ground connections) or S1 VAB, S1
During field commissioning, check the following VBC, S1 VCA and S1 VPS (three phase
parameters to ensure that the CT and VT line-to-line connections). The same
connections are correct for the application as follows. should be true for the S2 (Source 2) and
the Bus.
1. Determine if ISScom® Communication
and Analysis Software is available 9. Compare the voltages with actual
to communicate with the MBTS and measurements using a voltmeter. If
proceed as follows: there is a discrepancy, check for loose
connections at the rear terminal block of
2. If ISScom is available, then go to Step 4. the unit.
3. If ISScom is not available then: 10. The positive sequence voltage should be
S1 VPSy S1 VA y S1 VB y S1 VC or
S1 VAB y S1 VBC y S1 VCA. The same
a. From the MBTS Front Panel HMI
press ENTER. The MBTS will
display: should be true for S2 and the bus
11. If the positive sequence voltage is close
INIT TRANSFER to zero, then the phase sequence is
INIT rmte_lcal  incorrect and the proper phases must
be reversed to obtain correct phase
b. Press the right arrow pushbutton until sequence. If the phase sequence is
the MBTS displays: incorrect, frequency related functions will
not operate properly and the Frequency
STATUS Status menu will display DISABLED.

 STAT comm setup  12. Compare currents with the measured
values using a meter. If there is a
c. Press ENTER. The MBTS will discrepancy, check the CT connections
display: at the rear terminal block of the unit.
13. Compare the indicated frequency value
VOLTAGE STATUS to the actual frequency of the bus.
VOLT curr freq phang  14. Verify Inputs and outputs agree with
inputs and outputs.
From this menu the user can access
status data that includes Voltage,
Current, Frequency, Phase Angle,  NOTE: The CT and VT polarities can be easily
Inputs, Outputs, Alarm Counter, Time of verified by looking at the oscillographic
Last Power Up and Error Codes. waveforms, using M-3871 ISSplotTM
Analysis Software.
d. Go to Step 6.
4. Star t the ISScom, then establish

communication with the MBTS.
5. From the ISScom menu select System/
Setup/Setup System to open the Setup
System dialog screen.
6. Verify that the S1/S2 VT Configuration
and the Bus VT Configuration are
configured for the MBTS application.
7. Select System/Monitor/Secondary
Metering and Status to open the
Secondary Metering and Status screen.
The Voltage, Positive Sequence and
Status information is also available from
the MBTS Front Panel HMI.
5–20
Installation – 5
5.8 Initial Setup Procedure
The M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System (MTBS) is

shipped from the factory with all functions disabled.
The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggested
setup procedure for initially entering settings into
the device.
Setup Procedure
 NOTE: Setup Record forms are available in
Appendix A, Setup Record Forms, to
record settings for future reference.
1. Enter the Unit Setup data. This is

general information required including
altering access codes, setting date and
time, defining user logos, and other
adjustments. See Section 4.1, Unit
Setup.
2. Configure the System Setup data. This
is the general system and equipment
information required for operation,
including such items as CT and VT ratios,
VT configuration, and Nominal values.
See Section 4.2, System Setup.
3. Enter the System Setpoints data. This is
the function specific settings for transfers
and initiating functions. See Section 4.4,
System Setpoints.
5–21
5–22
Testing – 6
6 Testing
6.1 Power On Self Test ................................................................. 6–1
6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures .................................................... 6–3
6.3 Metering Tests........................................................................ 6–12
6.4 Auto Calibration..................................................................... 6–13
Testing Overview
6.1 Power On Self Test
For the purposes of site acceptance and verifying
the MBTS hardware is operating properly and is
Equipment Required
connected correctly, Beckwith Electric recommends
the following tests: • If the MBTS permanent power supply
source is not available, then a portable
• Power on Self Tests power supply (>50 W) matched to the
• Diagnostic Tests installed MBTS power supply (indicated
by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1)
• Metering Tests will be required.
The M‑4172 has an available redundant
PS2 Power Supply. To determine if the
PS2 Power Supply is present inspect the
two squares in the box on the rear of the
box under the PS2 connections. If neither
of these two boxes is checked then the
PS2 supply is not installed and only PS1
needs to be connected. If PS2 is present
then please note that PS1 and PS2 can
have different voltage inputs.
• Digital Multi Meter
58 59 60 61 62 63
+ - +-
Figure 6-1 Power Supply Connection
6–1
QQ NOTE: The following test is written assuming 5. The following sequence of actions will
both power supplies are present. If the take place:
PS2 Power Supply is not present then
connections to it are not required and the a. Power supply, PS1 and PS2 (optional
PS2 LED will not light during the tests. PS), LED(s) will illuminate.
b. The power supply contact will
energize (open) (Terminals 12 and
To perform the Power On Self Test proceed as 13)
follows:
c. The internal hardware test executes.
1. Verify the power supply contact is in the d. All LEDs will illuminate for
normal state. (Closed) approximately 1 second.
2. Determine if the permanent power supply e. As each Power On Self Test routine
source is connected and available. is completed satisfactorily the HMI
8 WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS will display an "X".
may cause equipment connected to the MBTS
6. Upon successful completion of all Power
to operate.
On Self Tests:
3. If the permanent power supply source is a. The PS1 and PS2 (optional PS)
connected and available, then energize LEDs will remain illuminated.
the power supply (The Power On Self
Test will automatically begin) and go to b. All other LEDs will extinguish.
Step 5. c. The diagnostic contact will energize.
4. If the permanent power supply source d. The SYS OK LED will flash (or
is not connected or is unavailable, then remain illuminated as programed in
proceed as follows: the diagnostic menu).
a. Ensure that the permanent power e. The unit will display the Model
supply source breaker is open Number, Firmware Version, Current
and applicable safety tagging is CT Rating, Nominal Frequency
complete. Rating and the Serial Number.
b. Disconnect and tag/identify the f. The BREAKER CLOSED and
permanent power supply source BREAKER OPEN LEDs will be
connections (Figure 6-1) from illuminated for Source 1 based on
the MBTS (60/62 HOT and 61/63 the position of the breaker position
NEUTRAL). contacts (52a and/or 52b) connected
to the Status Inputs 1 and 4.
c. Connect the portable power supply to
terminals (62 Hot and 63 Neutral for 6. Verify the power supply contact is
PS1; 60 Hot and 61 Neutral for PS2 energized (open).
optional redundant power supply).
7. Restore any connections that may have
8 WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS been disconnected in Step 4.
to operate. Torque Requirements
d. Energize the por table power • Terminals 1– 34: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and
supply. The Power On Self Test will 8.0 in-lbs, maximum
automatically begin. Terminals 35 – 63: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum,
•
and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum
QQ NOTE: A Power On Self Test failure is indicated
by no display or SYSTEM HALT ERROR
CODE XX. If a failure occurs, then stop
any further testing and contact the
factory.
6–2
Testing – 6
Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode

6.2 Diagnostic Test Procedures
8 WARNING: Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE
disables all transfer, protection and control
Overview
functionality and, during the output test, any
The diagnostic test procedures perform basic connected equipment will operate
functional MBTS tests to verify the operation
of the front-panel controls, inputs, outputs, and 1. Press ENTER to access the main menu.
communication ports. 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the
The diagnostic menu includes the following tests: following is displayed:
• OUTPUT (Output Test Relay) S

ETUP UNIT
• INPUT (Input Test Status)  SETUP exit

• LED (Status LED Test)
• TARGET (Target LED Test) displayed:
• BUTTON (Button Test)
• DISP (Display Test) S
OFTWARE VERSION
• COM1 (COM1 Loopback Test) VERS sn access number

• COM2 (COM2 Loopback Test)
4. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the
• COM3 (COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire) following is displayed:
Each test is described individually in this section. D

IAGNOSTIC MODE

 time error eth DIAG
The diagnostic menu also provides access to the
following MBTS feature settings:
5. Press ENTER, the following warning will
• CLOCK (Clock On/Off) be displayed:
• LED (MBTS OK LED Flash/Solid)
PROCESSOR WILL RESET!

• CAL (Auto Calibration)
ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

• FACTORY (Factory Use Only)
8 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC
Auto Calibration is described in detail in Section 6.5, MODE when protected equipment is in service.
Auto Calibration. Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected
equipment is in service disables all Transfer,
protective, and control functions of the relay.
Equipment Required
• If the MBTS permanent power supply 6. Press ENTER, the MBTS will reset and
displayed followed by:
power supply (>50 W) matched to the
installed MBTS power supply (indicated OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)

by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1)
will be required to power the unit. OUTPUT input led module 
• Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
 button disp 
 com1 com2 com3 clock


 led cal factory

This marks the beginning of the diagnostic menu.

The left arrow and right arrow pushbuttons are used
to navigate within the diagnostic menu. Exiting the
diagnostic menu is accomplished by pressing EXIT,
PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is
displayed, then pressing EXIT a second time.
6–3
Output Relay Test 7. Press ENTER. The following will be

(Output Relays 1–8 and Self Test) displayed for the selected relay:
QQ NOTE: This test does not include testing of
Power Supply Relay. RELAY NUMBER 1

O
FF on
8 WARNING: Performing this test will cause
output contacts to change state. Proper steps Relay Output Normally Normally Closed
should be taken to avoid unintended operation Number Open Contact Contact*
of connected equipment.
1 33-34 --
1. Ensure the affected equipment is in a 2 31-32 --
configuration/state that can support
MBTS output testing. 3 29-30 --
2. Confirm the positions of the outputs in 4 27-28 --
the normal or OFF position. This can be 5 25-26 --
accomplished by connecting the Digital
6 23-24 --
Multimeter (DMM) in continuity test
mode across the appropriate contacts 7 20-21 21-23
and confirming open or closed. The de- 8 17-18 18-19
energized or OFF position for outputs 1
through 9 are listed in Table 6-1. Self Test 14-15 15-16
* "Normal" position of the contact corresponds to the OFF
3. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic (de-energized) state of the relay.
Mode, then go to Step 4.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic
Table 6-1 Output Contacts
Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic
mode by performing the steps described 8. Select ON (Upper Case) utilizing the Right
in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode arrow pushbutton, then press ENTER.
section of this chapter, then go to Step 4. The MBTS will respond as follows:
4. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is • Output relay energizes (On position)
selected to OUTPUT (Upper Case). • Appropriate RED OUTPUT LED
illuminates.
OUTPUT TEST (RELAY)

If testing all output relays, then press EXIT to return
OUTPUT input led module  to the output relay selection menu, then repeat Steps
 button disp  6, 7 and 8 for each output relay.
 com1 com2 com3 clock 
 led cal factory
9. The DMM can now be used to verify that
the output relay contact is in the operated
If OUTPUT is not selected (Upper or ON position. The readings should
Case), then use the Right/Left arrow be the opposite of the initial reading
pushbuttons to select OUTPUT. determined in Step 2.
5. Press ENTER, the MBTS will display the 10. When output relay testing is complete,
following: then restore all output relays to their
de-energized or OFF positions listed in
R
ELAY NUMBER Table 6-1 and press EXIT to return to the
Diagnostic Menu.
1
11. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete,
6. Select the Output Relay (from Table 6-1) then exit the diagnostic menu by
to be tested, utilizing the Up/Down arrow pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT
pushbuttons. DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then
press EXIT a second time.
6–4
Testing – 6
Input Test (Control/Status) Inputs 1– 6 7. If no external control/status inputs are

The INPUT TEST menu enables the user to connected to the MBTS, then place a
determine the status of the individual control/status jumper between the IN RTN terminal
inputs . Individual inputs can be selected by number (Terminal #11 for Inputs 1–6). See Table
using the up and down arrow pushbuttons. The 6-2 for terminals for inputs.
status of the input will then be displayed. Alternatively, if this specific input is being
used in this application and the external
1. Ensure the protected equipment is in wiring is complete, the actual external
a configuration/state that can support control/status input contact can be
MBTS input testing. manually closed. This will test the input
2. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic contact operation and the external wiring
Mode, then go to Step 3. to the input contacts.
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic The corresponding Input LED will
Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic illuminate and the following wiil be
mode by performing the steps described immediately displayed:
in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode
section of this chapter, then go to Step INPUT NUMBER 1

3. C
IRCUIT CLOSED
3. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is
selected to INPUT (Upper Case). 8. Remove the jumper between the IN RTN
terminal (Terminal #11).
INPUT TEST (RELAY)
The input LED will extinguish and the
output INPUT led module  following will be immediately displayed:
 button disp 
 com1 com2 com3 clock  INPUT NUMBER 1

 led cal factory
C
IRCUIT OPEN
If INPUT is not selected (Upper 9. If testing all inputs, press EXIT to return
Case), then use the Right/Left arrow to the input selection menu, then repeat
pushbuttons to select INPUT. Steps 5, 6, 7 and 8 for each input.
4. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
Input Number Common Terminal Terminal
I
NPUT NUMBER 1 (52/S1 a/b) 11 10
1 2 11 9
3 11 8
5. Select the MBTS Input (from Table 6-2)
to be tested utilizing the Up/Down arrow 4 (52/S2 a/b) 11 7
pushbuttons. 5 11 6
6. Press ENTER. The following is displayed 6 11 5
for the selected input:
Table 6-2 Input Contacts
INPUT NUMBER 1

C
IRCUIT OPEN
6–5
Front Panel Status LED Test 5. When Status LED testing is complete
The Front Panel STATUS LED TEST menu enables press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic
the user to check the front-panel Status LED Menu.
individually. 6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete,
then exit the diagnostic menu by
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT
Mode, then go to Step 2. DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic press EXIT a second time.
mode by performing the steps described
Module LED Test
section of this chapter, then go to Step 2. The MODULE LED TEST menu allows the user to
check each M-3976 Module LED individually.
selected to LED (Upper Case). 1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic
STATUS LED TEST
If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic
output input LED module  Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic
 button disp  mode by performing the steps described
 com1 com2 com3 clock  in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode
 led cal factory
section of this chapter, then go to Step
2.
If LED is not selected (Upper Case), then 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is
use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to selected to MODULE (Upper Case).
select LED.
3. Press ENTER. LED #1 (RELAY OK) MODULE LED TEST

illuminates and the following is displayed: output input led MODULE 
 button disp 
STATUS LED TEST
LED NUMBER 1 = ON
 led cal factory

4. If testing all Status LEDs, press the right If MODULE is not selected (Upper
arrow pushbutton to toggle through the Case), then use the Right/Left arrow
remaining LEDs illustrated in Figure 6-2. pushbuttons to select MODULE.
The PS1 and PS2 LEDs are tested in the 3. Press ENTER. MODULE LED #1 lights
System Power On Tests. and the following is displayed:
MODULE LED TEST

LED NUMBER 1 = ON

4. If testing all MODULE LEDs, press the
right arrow pushbutton to toggle through
the remaining MODULE LEDs illustrated
in Figure 6-3.

5. When Module LED testing is complete
press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic
Menu.
Figure 6-2 Status LED Panel
6–6
Testing – 6
6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, 3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:

pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT B
UTTON TEST
DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then
press EXIT a second time. 0
 NOTE: Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will exit

STATUS from this test, and therefore should be
27B BUS UNDERVOLTAGE DELTA PHASE ANGLE OK the last pushbutton tested. If it is pushed
FAST TRANS OP DELTA VOLTAGE OK before this test sequence is completed,
the test may be restarted by pressing
ENTER. Notice that the word EXIT is
50BF–1/SOURCE 1 BRKR FAIL BUS VT LOSS BLOCK displayed temporarily before the test
50BF–2/SOURCE 2 BRKR FAIL INCOMP TRANS BLOCK sequence is exited.
4. Press each pushbutton for test (Figure
INPUT 2 INPUT 5
INPUT 3 INPUT 6
6-4). As each pushbutton is pressed,
the display will briefly show the name
for each key ("RIGHT ARROW", "UP
OUTPUTS ARROW", etc).
Figure 6-3 M-3976 Status Module

BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO.
M-4172
Button Test
The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the user
to check the M-3931 HMI Module buttons and the 
STATUS RESET pushbutton on the front panel. As
each pushbutton is pressed, its name is displayed.


1. If the relay is already in the Diagnostic
If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, 
then enter the relay diagnostic mode by
performing the steps described in the EXIT ENTER
Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section

of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is Figure 6-4 M‑3931 Human‑Machine
selected to BUTTON (Upper Case).
Interface Module
B
UTTON TEST 5. When pushbutton testing is complete
output input led module  press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic
 BUTTON disp  Menu.
 com1 com2 com3 clock  6. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete,
 led cal factory
pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT
If BUTTON is not selected (Upper DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then
Case), then use the Right/Left arrow press EXIT a second time.
pushbuttons to select BUTTON.
6–7
Display Test COM1/COM2 Loopback Test

The DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables the The COM1 LOOPBACK TEST menu allows the
user to check the display. This test cycles through user to test the front-panel RS‑232 port. COM2
varying test patterns until EXIT is pressed. LOOPBACK TEST menu tests the rear panel
RS‑232 port.
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic
Mode, then go to Step 2. A loopback plug is required for this test. The required
If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic loopback plug consists of a DB9P connector
Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic (male) with pin 2 (RX) connected to pin 3 (TX) and
mode by performing the steps described pin 7 (RTS) connected to pin 8 (CTS). No other
in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode connections are necessary.
section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is M-4172
selected to DISPLAY TEST (Upper
Case).
D
ISPLAY TEST
output input led module 
 button DISP 
 led cal factory

If DISP is not selected (Upper Case), then

use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select DISP.
3. Press ENTER, the unit will display a
sequence of test characters until EXIT
is pushed. Figure 6-5 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug
4. After the test has cycled through
completely, press EXIT to return to the 1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic
Diagnostic Menu. Mode, then go to Step 2.
5. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic
then exit the diagnostic menu by Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic
pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT mode by performing the steps described
DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode
press EXIT a second time. section of this chapter, then go to Step
2.
2 Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is
selected to COM1 LOOPBACK TEST
(Upper Case).
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

 button disp 
 COM1 com2 com3 clock 
 led cal factory

If COM1 is not selected (Upper

Case), then use the Right/Left arrow
pushbuttons to select COM1.
6–8
Testing – 6
3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed: COM3 Test (2‑Wire)

The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to test
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST
the RS‑485 rear terminal connections for proper
CONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG
operation.
 NOTE: This test requires a PC with an RS‑485
4. Connect the loop‑back plug to COM1, converter and terminal emulator software
the front-panel RS‑232 connector. installed.
5. Press ENTER, the relay will initiate the
loopback test. 1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic
If the COM Port passes the loopback test
the following will be displayed: If the MBTS is NOT in the Diagnostic
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST
-
DONE- section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
If the COM Port fails the loopback test 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is
the following will be displayed: selected to COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE
(Upper Case).
COM1 LOOPBACK TEST

COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE

R
X–TX FAIL
6. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  button disp 
Menu.  com1 com2 COM3 clock 
 led cal factory

If COM3 is not selected (Upper
3. Press ENTER. The following is displayed:
selected to COM2 LOOPBACK TEST
(Upper Case). COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE

IDLING...9600, N, 8, 1

COM2 LOOPBACK TEST

output input led module  4. From the rear of the unit, connect a PC
to the MBTS at terminals 3 (-) and 4 (+)
 button disp 
using an RS‑485 converter set for 2‑wire
 com1 COM2 com3 clock  operation. See Figure 6-6 for diagram.
 led cal factory

5. Set the following PC communications
If COM2 is not selected (Upper parameters:
Case), then use the Right/Left arrow Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
9. Press ENTER, then repeat Steps 3 Data Bits 8
through 6 for COM2.
Stop Bits 1
Duplex Half
6. Open the terminal emulator program on

the PC, then open the COM port for the
RS‑485 converter.
6–9
Clock ON/OFF
3 4
This feature provides the user with the ability to
either start or stop the clock.
section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
selected to CLOCK TEST (Upper Case).
C
LOCK TEST
Figure 6-6 RS‑485 2‑Wire Testing
7. Press a key on the PC keyboard, then  button disp 
verify the following:  com1 com2 com3 CLOCK 
 led cal factory

a. The character pressed is displayed
temporarily on the relay display.
If CLOCK is not selected (Upper
b. The character pressed is displayed Case), then use the Right/Left arrow
on the PC monitor. pushbuttons to select CLOCK.
8. When communication has been verified,  NOTE: ‘80’ will be displayed in the seconds place
press EXIT, the following is displayed: when the clock is stopped.
COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE

3. Press ENTER, the following is displayed:
-
DONE-
a. If the clock is already running the
9. Press EXIT to return to the DIAGNOSTIC following will be displayed and will
Menu. continue to update.
10. Close the COM port on the PC, and exit C
LOCK TEST
the terminal program.
0
1-Jan-2003 01:01:01
then exit the diagnostic menu by b. If the clock was NOT running the
pressing EXIT, PRESS EXIT TO EXIT following will be displayed:
press EXIT a second time. C
LOCK TEST
0
1-Jan-2003 01:01:80
4. To start or stop the clock press ENTER,

a. If the clock is already running the
C
LOCK TEST
C
LOCK STOP
C
LOCK TEST
0
1-Jan-2003 01:01:80
6–10
Testing – 6
b. If the clock was NOT running the SYS OK LED Flash/Illuminated

following will be displayed: This feature provides the user with the ability to set
the SYS OK LED to either Flash or be Illuminated
C
LOCK TEST when the MBTS is working properly.
C
LOCK START
C
LOCK TEST
0
1-Jan-2003 01:01:01 Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic
 NOTE: To preserve battery life the clock should in the Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode
be OFF if the unit is to be left de- section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.
energized for a long period of time.
selected to FLASH SYS OK LED (Upper
5. The clock can be toggled ON or OFF Case).
by pressing any arrow pushbutton or
ENTER. FLASH SYS OK LED

To exit the Clock ON/OFF mode press output input led module 
EXIT, the following will be displayed:  button disp 
C
LOCK TEST  LED cal factory

-
DONE-
If LED (to the left of cal) is not selected
6. To exit the CLOCK ON/OFF Diagnostic (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left
Menu press EXIT. arrow pushbuttons to select LED.
7. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, 3. Press ENTER, the following will be

then exit the diagnostic menu by displayed:
DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then FLASH SYS OK LED

press EXIT a second time. O
FF on
4. Select (upper case) either ON (to flash)

or OFF (to Illuminate) by pressing the
right/left arrow pushbutton once.
displayed:
FLASH SYS OK LED

-
DONE-
6. To exit the FLASH SYS OK LED

Diagnostic Menu press EXIT.
6–11
4. Determine if the permanent MBTS

6.3 Metering Tests power supply source is connected and
available.
Equipment Required
8 WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS
• If the MBTS permanent power supply
to operate.
power supply (>50 W) matched to the
installed MBTS power supply (indicated 5. If the permanent power supply source is
by check box on rear of unit Figure 6-1) connected and available, then energize
will be required. the power supply (The Power On Self
• One synchronized voltage source with Test will automatically begin).
variable amplitude (0-120 % PT secondary 6. If the permanent power supply source
voltage). is not connected or is unavailable, then
• If current inputs to the MBTS are to be proceed as follows:
used, two single-phase independent a. Ensure that the permanent power
current sources (0 to 5 A) to simulate CT supply source breaker is open
inputs are required. and applicable safety tagging is
• A PC with an RS‑232 port, ISScom complete.
Software installed. b. Disconnect and tag/identify the
• A null modem cable. permanent power supply source
connections (Figure 6-1) from
the MBTS (60/62 HOT and 61/63
Metering Test Setup NEUTRAL).
1. Connect a null modem cable between the c. Connect the portable power supply
PC RS-232 port and the MBTS COM1
to terminals (60/62 HOT and 61/63
port.
NEUTRAL).
2. Connect the temporary voltage source
as follows: 8 WARNING: Applying power to the MBTS
a. I f p e r m a n e n t vo l t a g e i n p u t may cause equipment connected to the MBTS
connections are present, then to operate.
disconnect and tag/identify the d. Energize the por table power
permanent voltage input connections supply. The Power On Self Test will
(Figure 6-7). automatically begin.
b. Connect the temporary voltage
source to the Source 1, Source 2 Voltage/Current Verification
and Bus voltage inputs in parallel as 1. Apply nominal voltage and current
indicated in Figure 6-7.
2. Using ISScom, open the monitoring
3. Connect the temporary current source screen and verify the following:
as follows: • Verify that the displayed voltages are
8 WARNING: Do not remove current transformer ± 0.5 V of the applied voltage
loads without shorting the current inputs to the • Verify that the displayed currents are
MBTS. Death or severe electrical shock can occur. ± 0.1 A of the applied current
a. I f p e r m a n e n t c u r r e n t i n p u t
3. Remove the applied voltage and currents.
connections are present, temporarily
place a shorting device across each 4. Remove all test equipment from voltage
CT secondary, then disconnect and and current inputs.
tag/identify the permanent current 5. Reconnect the permanent voltage and
input connections (Figure 6-8). current input wiring.
b. Connect the temporary current
source in series to Source 1 and
Source 2 current inputs as indicated
in Figure 6-8.
6–12
Testing – 6
Torque Requirements 5. Press ENTER, the following will be

• Terminals 1– 34: 7.5 in-lbs, minimum, and displayed:
8.0 in-lbs, maximum
CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTS

Terminals 35– 63: 8.5 in-lbs, minimum,
•
and 9.0 in-lbs, maximum PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE

6. Connect VA = VB = VC = 120.0 (±0.01) V

6.4 Auto Calibration at 0° phase (see Figure 6-7).
7. Connect IS1= IS2= 5.00* Amps at 0° (see
 NOTE: The M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System Figure 6-8).
has been fully calibrated at the factory.
There is no need to recalibrate the unit * For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A
prior to initial installation. The calibration can be verified by exiting from the
Diagnostic menu and reading status:
1. If the MBTS is already in the Diagnostic VA = VB = VC = 120 V
If the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic IS1 = IS2 = 5 A*
Mode, then enter the MBTS diagnostic * For a 1 A CT rating, use 1.00 A
section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.  NOTE: The phase angle difference between
voltage and current input source should
2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Menu is be 0°, ±0.05°, and an accurate low-
selected to CAL (upper case). distortion source should be used. (THD
less than 1%).
A
UTO CALIBRATION
output input led module  8. Press ENTER, the following will be
 button disp  displayed while the relay is being
 com1 com2 com3 clock  calibrated:
 led CAL factory

C
ALIBRATING
If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then WAIT
use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to
select CAL. When the calibration is complete, the
3. Press ENTER, the following will be following will be displayed:
displayed depending on the frequency
rating of the unit: C
ALIBRATING
DONE
60 HZ CALIBRATION

60_HZ 9. Remove the calibration source inputs.
50 HZ CALIBRATION

50_HZ
4. Ensure that the 60 (50) HZ Calibration

Menu is selected to 60_HZ, Upper Case
(50_Hz).
If 60_HZ (50_Hz) is not selected (Upper
pushbuttons to select 60_HZ (50_Hz).
6–13
39
38
41
40
43
42
45
44
47
46
49
48
51
50
53
52
55
54
Figure 6-7 Metering Voltage Input Configuration
57
56
59
58
Figure 6-8 Metering Current Input Configuration
6–14
Appendix – A
A Configuration Record Forms
Communication Settings Record Form......................................... A–2
Setup System Settings Record Form........................................ A–3,4
System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form............... A–5 to 12
Function 27B Setpoints......................................................... A–13,14
Function 50BF Setpoints............................................................ A–15
Function 60FL Setpoints............................................................ A–16
Function 81 Setpoints................................................................ A–17
Function 81R Setpoints.............................................................. A–18
Function ISSLogic Setpoints............................................. A–19 to 22
Sequence of Events Setup......................................................... A–23
Oscillograph Setup..................................................................... A–24
Table A-1 M-4271 MBTS Configuration Table................. A–25 to 28
This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms The Setup System Settings Record Form (page
for recording the configuration and settings of the A–3) reproduces the Setup System menus. For each
M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS). The function or setpoint, refer to the configuration you
forms can be supplied to field service personnel have defined using the MBTS Configuration Table,
for configuring the MBTS, and kept on file for future and check whether it should be enabled or disabled,
reference. the output contacts it will activate, and the inputs that
will block its operation.
A copy of the MBTS Configuration Table (Table A‑1)
is provided to define and record the blocking inputs The System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record
and output configuration. For each function, check Form (page A–5) allows recording of the specific
the Enabled or Disabled checkbox. If the function values entered for each transfer. The form follows
is Enabled, then check the output contacts to be the Transfer Settings section of the System Setpoints
operated by the function, and the inputs designated dialog screen.
to block the function operation.
The System Setpoints Function Settings Record
The Communication Settings Record Form (page Forms, beginning on page A–13, allow recording
A–2) reproduces the System Communication Setup of the specific values entered for each function.
menus. This form records definition of the parameters The forms follow the Function Settings section of
necessary for communication with the MBTS. the System Setpoints dialog screen. If a function is
disabled, the input/output screens for that function
will not be displayed.
A–1
M‑4172 Communication Settings

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT CUSTOMER SETTING
COM 1
Dead Sync Time 2 to 3000 (ms) 50
1200/ 2400
Baud Rate 9600
4800/ 9600
Parity None/ Even/ Odd None
Stop Bit 1 or 2 1
System's Comm. Address – 1
COM 2
1200/ 2400
Baud Rate 9600
4800/ 9600
Stop Bit 1 or 2 1
COM 3 / RS485
Stop Bit 1 or 2 1
ETHERNET SETTINGS
Ethernet Enable/Disable Disable
DHCP Protocol Enable/Disable Disable
IP Address (DHCP Disabled) N/A 192.168.1.43
Net Mask (DHCP Disabled) N/A 255.255.0.0
Gateway (DHCP Disabled) N/A 192.168.1.1
Remote/Local Control
Remote/Local Control Mode Local/Remote Remote
Communication Settings Record Form
A–2
Appendix – A
M‑4172 Setup System Settings

SYSTEM TYPE – FACTORY SETTINGS
Firmware Version – –
Nominal Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz –
CT Secondary Rating 1A/5A –
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Nominal Voltage 50.0 to 140.0 (V) 69.3

Nominal Current 0.50 to 6.00 (A) 5
Phase Rotation ABC / ACB ABC
S1 / S2 VT Configuration (Select ONE)
PHASE TO GROUND SETTING PHASE TO PHASE SETTING
Phase to Ground (Three Phase) Phase to Phase (Three Phase)

Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) Phase to Phase (Single Phase AB)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) Phase to Phase (Single Phase BC)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) Phase to Phase (Single Phase CA)
Bus VT Configuration (Select ONE based on selection above)
PHASE TO GROUND SETTING PHASE TO PHASE SETTING
Phase to Ground (Three Phase) Phase to Phase (Three Phase)

Phase to Ground (Single Phase A) Phase to Phase (Single Phase AB)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase B) Phase to Phase (Single Phase BC)
Phase to Ground (Single Phase C) Phase to Phase (Single Phase CA)
S1/S2 CT Configuration
S1 and S2 CT Connected to
Yes or No No
Rear Terminals
Setup System Settings Record Form (1 of 2)
A–3
M‑4172 Setup System Settings

VT and CT Ratios
S1 VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1

S2 VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1
Bus VT Ratio 1.0 to 6550.0 :1 1
S1 CT Ratio 1 to 65500 :1 1
S2 CT Ratio 1 to 65500 :1 1
Latched Outputs
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Pulsed Outputs
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Input Active States
Input 1 Open Close
Input 2 Open Close
Input 3 Open Close
Input 4 Open Close
Input 5 Open Close
Input 6 Open Close
Output Seal-in Time
OUT 5 2 to 8160 Cycles 30

Setup System Settings Record Form (2 of 2)
A–4
Appendix – A
Profile
M‑4172 System Setpoints – Transfer Settings

SETPOINT PROFILE
Setpoint Profile 1 to 4 1 Profile
TRANSFER SETTINGS – COMMON SETTINGS
Common Function Settings
Simultaneous/
Transfer Mode Sequential
Sequential
Upper Voltage Limit New Source 5 to 180 (V) 76
Lower Voltage Limit New Source 5 to 180 (V) 59

S1 Breaker Closing Time 0 to 12 Cycles 3.5
S2 Breaker Closing Time 0 to 12 Cycles 3.5
Adaptation Disable/Enable Enable/Disable Disable
S1 Breaker Closing Time Deviation 0 to 6 Cycles 1
S2 Breaker Closing Time Deviation 0 to 6 Cycles 1
Incomplete Transfer Lockout Time 50 to 3000 Cycles 600
Local Manual Initiate Time Delay 0 to 8160 Cycles 0
Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay 0 to 8160 Cycles 0
Blocking After Transfer Time 0 to 8160 Cycles 600
Trip Command Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 18
Close Command Pulse Length 15 to 30 Cycles 18
System Setpoints Transfer Settings Record Form (1 of 8)
A–5
Profile

Common Function Settings – Inputs
S1 52a (Input 1) or
Breaker Status Inputs: S1 52a (Input 1)
S1 52b (Input 1)
S2 52a (Input 4) or
S2 52a (Input 4)
S2 52b (Input 4)
Service Position Inputs:

S1 52 Service Position
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
S2 52 Service Position
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
External Control Inputs Configuration:

Transfer Block #1
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
Transfer Block #2
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
Transfer Block #3
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
External Status Reset

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
A–6
Appendix – A
Profile

Common Function Settings – Outputs
Auto Fast Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Transfer Ready Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Transfer Completed Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Fast Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
In-Phase Transfer Load Shedding Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Load Shedding Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
Load Shedding Function Selection

F27B #3 F81 #1 F81R #1
Residual Voltage Transfer Fixed Time Transfer
Incomplete Transfer Outputs

Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – – –
A–7
Profile

TRANSFER SETTINGS – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SETTINGS
Automatic Transfer Settings – Setup
Auto Transfer Enable/Disable Enable
Block Transfer/
Both S1 and S2 Breakers Open Block Transfer
Auto Close

Auto Transfer Block
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – –
86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2)

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1)

Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – –
A–8
Appendix – A
Profile

Automatic Transfer Settings – Fast Transfer
Fast Transfer Enable/Disable Enable
Delta Phase Angle Limit 0.0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 20.0
Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Disable
Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 60 (V) 12
Delta Frequency Limit Enable/Disable Enable
Delta Frequency Limit 0.02 to 2.00 (Hz) 2.00
Time Window 1 to 10 Cycles 10
Closing Command Time Delay 0 to 10 Cycles 0
Blocking 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
Inputs – –
Automatic Transfer Settings – In-Phase Transfer
In-Phase Transfer Enable/Disable Enable
Inputs – –
Automatic Transfer Settings – Residual Voltage Transfer
Residual Voltage Transfer Enable/Disable Enable
Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 60 (V) 23
Load Shedding Time Delay 2 to 100 Cycles 2
Inputs – –
A–9
Profile

Automatic Transfer Settings – Fixed-Time Transfer
Fixed-Time Transfer Enable/Disable Disable
Time Delay 30 to 1000 Cycles 150
Inputs – –
A–10
Appendix – A
Profile

TRANSFER SETTINGS – MANUAL TRANSFER SETTINGS
Manual Transfer Settings – Setup
Manual Transfer Enable/Disable Enable

Manual Transfer Block Manual Transfer Initiate
Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
– – – – – – –
Manual Transfer Settings – Fast Transfer
Fast Transfer Enable/Disable Disable
Delta Phase Angle Limit 0.0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 20.0
Closing Command Time Delay 0 to 10 Cycles 0
Inputs – –
Manual Transfer Settings – In-Phase Transfer
In-Phase Transfer Enable/Disable Disable
Inputs – –
A–11
Profile

Manual Transfer Settings – Residual Voltage Transfer
Residual Voltage Transfer Enable/Disable Disable
Residual Voltage Limit 5 to 60 (V) 23
Inputs – –
Manual Transfer Settings – Hot Parallel Transfer
Hot Parallel Transfer Enable/Disable Enable
Delta Phase Angle Limit 0 to 90.0 (Degrees) 10.0
Delta Voltage Limit Enable/Disable Enable
Tripping Command Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 0
Inputs – –
TRANSFER SETTINGS – AUTO TRIP SETTINGS
Auto Trip Enable/Disable Disable
Breaker Trip Option: Trip Originally Closed Breaker Trip Originally

or Trip Breaker Just Closed Closed Breaker
Tripping Command Time Delay 0 to 50 Cycles 3
Inputs – –
A–12
Appendix – A
Profile
27B – Bus Phase Undervoltage

SETTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTING
27B – BUS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE TRANSFER INITIATE (S1 TO S2) (#1 TO #4 STEPS)
27B #1
Function 27B #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 5 to 120 (V) 55
Voltage Inhibit Enable/Disable Disable
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Blocking 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
– – – – – Inputs
27B #2

– – – – – Inputs
27B #3

– – – – – Inputs
Function 27B Setpoints (1 of 2)
A–13
Profile

27B #4

– – – – – Inputs
Function 27B Setpoints (2 of 2)
A–14
Appendix – A
Profile
50BF – Breaker Failure

50BF #1 – SOURCE 1 BREAKER FAILURE

50BF #1
Function 50BF #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 (A) 1.25
– – – – Inputs
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
Initiate – – – – – Initiate
S1 BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)
S1 BF Enable/Disable Enable
50BF #2 – SOURCE 2 BREAKER FAILURE

50BF #2
Function 50BF #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 (A) 1.25
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6
Initiate – – – – – Initiate
S2 BF – Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)
S1 BF Enable/Disable Enable
Function 50BF Setpoints
A–15
Profile
60FL – Bus VT Fuse Loss

60FL
Function 60FL Enable/Disable Enable

Delta Voltage Pickup 5 to 25 (V) 20
Blocking Drop Out Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 3
Fixed Time Transfer/
Bus VT Fuse Loss Condition Block Transfer
Block Transfer
– – – – – Inputs
Function 60FL Setpoints
A–16
Appendix – A
Profile
81 – Bus Voltage Frequency

81 – BUS VOLTAGE FREQUENCY (#1 TO #2 STEPS)
81 #1
Function 81 #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 50.00 to 67.00 (Hz) 57.5
– – – – – Inputs
81 #2
Function 81 #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 50.00 to 67.00 (Hz) 57
– – – – – Inputs
Function 81 Setpoints
A–17
Profile
81R – ROCOF (Bus Voltage)

81R – ROCOF – BUS VOLTAGE (#1 TO #2 STEPS)
81R #1
Function 81R #1 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 0.1 to 20.00 (Hz/Sec) 0.1
Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99 (%) 20
Increasing ROCOF Enable/Disable Disable
– – – – – Inputs
81R #2
Function 81R #2 Enable/Disable Disable

Pickup 0.1 to 20.00 (Hz/Sec) 1.00
Neg. Sequence Voltage Inhibit 0 to 99 (%) 20
Increasing ROCOF Enable/Disable Disable
– – – – – Inputs
Function 81R Setpoints
A–18
Appendix – A
Profile
ISSL – ISSLogic (#1 to #6)

ISSLogic #
ISSLogic Enable/Disable Disable
Initiating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs
Initiating Function Timeout

27B #1 50BF #2 81R #1 ISSL #3
27B #2 60FL 81R #2 ISSL #4
27B #3 81 #1 ISSL #1 ISSL #5
27B #4 81 #2 ISSL #2 ISSL #6
50BF #1
Initiating Function Pickup

27B #1 50BF #2 81R #1 ISSL #3
27B #2 60FL 81R #2 ISSL #4
27B #3 81 #1 ISSL #1 ISSL #5
27B #4 81 #2 ISSL #2 ISSL #6
50BF #1
Function ISSLogic Setpoints (1 of 4)
A–19
Profile

Initiating System Status
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Auto InPhase Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Auto InPhase Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Auto Fast Transfer Ready Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready
Transfer Ready Auto Close Initiated
Auto Transfer Enabled Manual Transfer Enabled
Auto Transfer Initiated Manual Transfer Initiated
Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FL Condition) Hot Parallel Transfer In Process
27B#1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2) Hot Parallel Transfer Operated
27B#2 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S2 to S1) Auto Trip Enabled
Open Transition Transfer In Process Auto Trip Operated
Transfer Completed New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Operated New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
In-Phase Transfer Operated Bus VT Fuse Loss Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Operated Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Operated Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Load Shedding Incomplete Transfer Blocked
InPhase Transfer Load Shedding Blocking After Transfer Alarm
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range
Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding S2 Breaker Failure
Load Shedding (27B#3, 81#1, 81R#1) S2 Breaker Opened
S1 Breaker Failure S2 Breaker Closed
S1 Breaker Opened Trip S2 Breaker Command
S1 Breaker Closed Close S2 Breaker Command
Trip S1 Breaker Command Source 2 (New Source)
Close S1 Breaker Command Remote Mode
Source 1 (New Source)
A–20
Appendix – A
Profile

Initiate via Communication Point Enable/Disable Disable
Initiating 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL Blocking 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
Inputs Inputs
Block System Status
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Auto InPhase Transfer Delta Voltage OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK
Auto InPhase Transfer Delta Frequency OK Manual In-phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK
Auto Fast Transfer Ready Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready
Transfer Ready Auto Close Initiated
Auto Transfer Enabled Manual Transfer Enabled
Auto Transfer Initiated Manual Transfer Initiated
Fixed Time Transfer Selected (60FL Condition) Hot Parallel Transfer In Process
27B#1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2) Hot Parallel Transfer Operated
27B#2 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S2 to S1) Auto Trip Enabled
Open Transition Transfer In Process Auto Trip Operated
Transfer Completed New Source Upper Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Operated New Source Lower Voltage Limit Transfer Blocked
In-Phase Transfer Operated Bus VT Fuse Loss Transfer Blocked
Residual Voltage Transfer Operated Both Breakers Open Transfer Blocked
Fixed Time Transfer Operated Both Breakers Close Transfer Blocked
Fast Transfer Load Shedding Incomplete Transfer Blocked
InPhase Transfer Load Shedding Blocking After Transfer Alarm
Residual Voltage Transfer Load Shedding S1/S2 Breaker Closing Time Out Of Range
Fixed Time Transfer Load Shedding S2 Breaker Failure
Load Shedding (27B#3, 81#1, 81R#1) S2 Breaker Opened
S1 Breaker Failure S2 Breaker Closed
S1 Breaker Opened Trip S2 Breaker Command
S1 Breaker Closed Close S2 Breaker Command
Trip S1 Breaker Command Source 2 (New Source)
Close S1 Breaker Command Remote Mode
Source 1 (New Source)
A–21
Profile

Block via Communication Point Enable/Disable Disable
Delay 0 to 65500 Cycles 0
DO / RST 0 to 65500 Cycles 0
Dropout Timer/
DO/RST Timer Reset Timer
Reset Timer
Profile Switch
Not Activated #1 #2 #3 #4
Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
– – – –
No Transfer Initiate
Initiate S1 to S2 Transfer
Initiate S2 to S1 Transfer
Transfer Block
A–22
Appendix – A
Profile
Sequence of Events Setup

Functions Setup
Function Pickup
27B #1 27B #4 60FL 81R #1 ISSL #2 ISSL #5
27B #2 50BF #1 81 #1 81R #2 ISSL #3 ISSL #6
27B #3 50BF #2 81 #2 ISSL #1 ISSL #4
Function Timeout
27B #1 27B #4 60FL 81R #1 ISSL #2 ISSL #5
27B #2 50BF #1 81 #1 81R #2 ISSL #3 ISSL #6
27B #3 50BF #2 81 #2 ISSL #1 ISSL #4
Function Dropout
27B #1 27B #4 60FL 81R #1 ISSL #2 ISSL #5
27B #2 50BF #1 81 #1 81R #2 ISSL #3 ISSL #6
27B #3 50BF #2 81 #2 ISSL #1 ISSL #4
Input Status
Input Pickup Status Input Dropout Status
Input 1 (S1 52a) Input 1 (S1 52a)
Input 2 (86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) ) Input 2 (86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) )
Input 3 (Manual Transfer Initiate) Input 3 (Manual Transfer Initiate)
Input 5 Input 5
Input 6 Input 6
FL FL
Output Status
Output Pickup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
Output Dropout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
Sequence of Events Setup
A–23
Profile
Oscillograph Setup
Number of Records 1 to 16 6
Post Trigger Delay (%) 88
Oscillograph Samples per Cycle 16 or 32 Samples 16
Inputs
Trigger Inputs Trigger Dropout Inputs
Input 2 (86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) )
Input 3 (Manual Transfer Initiate)
Input 5
Input 6
FL
Outputs
Trigger 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs
Oscillograph Setup
A–24
Appendix – A
Profile
OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS
Function Enable Disable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
Transfer Settings – Common Settings – Inputs
Breaker Status Inputs
S1 52a (Input 1) S1 52b (Input 1)
S2 52a (Input 4) S2 52b (Input 4)
Service Position Inputs
S1 52 Service Position N/A – – – – N/A
S2 52 Service Position N/A – – – – N/A
External Control Inputs Configuration
Transfer Block #1 N/A – – – – N/A
External Status Reset N/A – – – – N/A
Transfer Settings – Common Settings – Outputs
Auto Fast Transfer Ready – – – – – N/A
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel

– – – – – N/A
Transfer Ready
Transfer Ready – – – – – N/A
Transfer Completed – – – – – N/A
Fast Transfer Load

– – – – – N/A
Shedding
In-Phase Transfer Load
– – – – – N/A
Shedding
Load Shedding – – – – – N/A
Incomplete Transfer – – – – – N/A
Table A-1 M-4271 MBTS Configuration Table (1 of 4)
A–25
Profile
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
Transfer Settings – Automatic Transfer Settings

Auto
Transfer 
Both S1 & S2 Breakers Open Block Transfer Auto Close
Auto Transfer Block N/A – – – – N/A
86P-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) N/A –  – – N/A
86P-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) N/A – – – – N/A
27-S1 Initiate (S1 to S2) N/A – – – – N/A
27-S2 Initiate (S2 to S1) N/A – – – – N/A
Fast Transfer  N/A – –
In-Phase
Transfer  N/A – –
Res. Voltage
Fixed-Time
Transfer Settings – Manual Transfer Settings

Manual
Transfer 
Manual Transfer Block N/A – – – – N/A
Manual Transfer Initiate N/A – –  – N/A
Fast Transfer  N/A – –
In-Phase
Res. Voltage
Hot Parallel
Transfer Settings – Auto Trip Settings
Auto Trip  N/A – –
A–26
Appendix – A
Profile
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL

27B #1  – – – – – 
27B #2  – – – – – 
27B #3  – – – – – 
27B #4  – – – – – 
50BF #1 – Source 1 Breaker Failure

50BF #1  – –  – –
Outputs Initiate Inputs Initiate
– – – – – N/A
S1 50BF – Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)
S1 BF  – –  – –
50BF #2 – Source 2 Breaker Failure

50BF #2   – – – –
Outputs Initiate Inputs Initiate
– – – – – N/A
S2 50BF – Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using Breaker Status)
S2 BF   – – – –
60FL – Bus VT Fuse Loss

60FL  – – – – – N/A
81 – Bus Voltage Frequency

81 #1  – – – – – 
81 #2  – – – – – 
81R – ROCOF (Bus Voltage)

81R #1  – – – – – 
81R #2  – – – – – 
A–27
Profile
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 FL
ISSL – ISSLogic®
INITIATING OUTPUTS BLOCKING INPUTS

ISSL #1 
INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #2 
INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #3 
INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #4 
INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #5 
INITIATING INPUTS

ISSL #6 
INITIATING INPUTS
A–28
Communications: Appendix – B
B Communications
The M‑4172 Motor Bus Transfer System (MBTS) Serial Ports

incorporates three serial ports and an optional RJ45 The MBTS includes both front and rear panel RS‑232
Ethernet port for intelligent, digital communication ports and a rear RS‑485 port. The front and rear
with external devices. Equipment such as RTU's, panel RS‑232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connector
data concentrators, modems, or computers can configured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) per
be interfaced for direct, on-line, real time data the EIA-232D standard. Signals are defined in Table
acquisition and control. Generally, all data available B-1, Communication Port Signals .
to the operator through the front panel of the relay
with the M‑3931 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) The 2-wire RS‑485 port is assigned to the rear panel
module is accessible remotely through the Modbus terminal block pins 3 (–) and 4 (+).
data exchange protocol. The protocol document
and the database‑specific protocol document are Each communication port may be configured to
available from the factory or from our website at www. operate at any of the standard baud rates (1200,
beckwithelectric.com. 2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS‑485 port shares the
same baud rate with COM 2 (for COM1 see Section
The M‑3871 ISScom® Communications Software 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers).
has been supplied for communication to any IBM
compatible computer running under Microsoft® A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1, Null
WindowsTM 98 or higher. Modem Cable: M-0423, if direct connection to a PC
(personal computer) is desired.
The communication protocol implements serial, byte
oriented, asynchronous communication and can be Optional Ethernet Port
used to fulfill the following communications functions:
The M‑4172, when equipped with the optional
• Real time monitoring of line status. Ethernet port can be accessed from a local network.
When the ethernet port is enabled, the COM2 serial
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints.
port (RS‑232) is unavailable for communication.
• Downloading of recorded oscillograph and However, the Demodulated IRIG-B may still be used
transfer event log data. through the COM2 Port when Ethernet is enabled.
• Reconfiguration of MBTS functions. When COM2 Port is enabled the Ethernet Port is not
available. Although the ethernet connection speed is
QQ NOTE: The following restrictions apply for faster than the RS‑232 port (can be up to 10 Mbps),
MODBUS protocol use: the ethernet module connects internally through the
COM2 serial connection and is therefore limited to
1. Parity is supported on COM1, COM2 and connection speeds up to 9600 bps.
COM3; valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1;
8,E,1; 8,N,1; 8,O,2 or 8,E,2. Either port COM2 (Ethernet) or COM3 may be used
2. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only). to remotely set and interrogate the relay using a
local area network, modem or other direct serial
3. Standard baud rates from 1200 to 9600 connection.
are supported.
4. Only the following MODBUS commands
are supported:
a. read holding register (function 03)
b. read input register (function 04)
c. force single coil (function 05)
d. preset single register (function 06)
For detailed information on ISScom communications,
refer to Section 4.1, Unit Setup.
B–1
Signal COM1 COM2

RX Receive Data Pin 2 Pin 2
TX Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3
RTS Request to Send Pin 7 Pin 7
CTS Clear to Send Pin 8
DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4
DCD Data Carrier Detect Pin 1*
GND Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5
+15V Pin 1*
-15V Pin 9*
TTL IRIG-B (+) Pin 6*
*Optional: See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, +15V (+15%)
@100 mA maximum.
Table B-1 Communication Port Signals
 NOTE: Also see Table 5-1, Table 5-2 and Figure 5-14.
Figure B-1 Null Modem Cable: M-0423
B–2
Communications: Appendix – B
PC Master
Echo Cancel On
25 pin or
9‑25 pin Straight‑Through Cable
DYMEC Fiber Optic

Link / Repeater
DCE
DTE
REP
OFF
T R
FOC FOC
FOC FOC
R T R T R T
DCE DCE DCE

DTE DTE DTE
REP REP REP

OFF OFF OFF
Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3

Address 1 Address 2 Address 3
RS-232 RS-232 RS-232
9‑25 pin "Straight‑Through" Cables
Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network
B–3
RS‑485 2‑Wire Network

Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #3
Address 6 Address 8 Address 1
‑ + ‑ +
PC Master
B(‑) 200 Ω*
A(+)
Twisted
RS‑232 to RS‑485 2‑wire
converter or RS‑485 PC Card
▲ CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all units should be mounted
in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriate converters should be used for isolation.
 NOTE: Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network should
have the termination resistor installed. This may be completed externally or using a jumper internal
to the unit. See Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers.
Figure B-3 RS-485 Network

Figure B-4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal
B–4
Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C
C Self-Test Error Codes
1
2 Battery backed RAM test fail
3 EEPROM write power-up fail
4 EEPROM read back power-up fail
5 Dual port RAM test fail
6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail
7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of power
8 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail loss of battery backed RAM
9 DMA checksum/physical block fail
10 Oscillograph Memory Test fail
11 DSP external program RAM fail
12 DSP A/D convert fail
13 DSP ground channel fail
14 DSP reference channel fail
15 DSP PGA gain fail
16 DSP DSP<-> HOST interrupt 1 fail
17 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 set fail
18 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 reset fail
19 DSP program load fail
20 DSP not running run mode code
21 DSP not running primary boot code
22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail
23 EEPROM write verify error
26 WARNING calibration checksum mismatch warning
27* WARNING setpoint checksum mismatch warning
28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning
29 Supply/mux PGA running test fail
*If a system Setpoint has been changed and power is removed from the MBTS within 5 minutes, an Error Code 27 will be
displayed when power is applied to the MBTS. This condition is normal and the Error Code 27 should be reset.
Table C-1 Self-Test Error Codes (1 of 2)
C–1
30 External DSP RAM test fail

31 Unrecognized INT1 code
32 Values update watchdog fail
34 Restart Error
35 Interrupt Error
36 Trap Error
37 Calibration running check fail
38 Ethernet Board not running (Warning)
40 Interrupt noise INT2
44 Oscillograph buffer overflow

45 Oscillograph buffer underflow
46 Failure of DSP to calculate calibration phasors
50 Stack Overflow
51 Setpoint Write Overflow
Table C‑1 Self-Test Error Codes (2 of 2)
C–2
Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C
Error Code Description

An incorrect communication password supplied to the
Comm Channel Locked
system will result in this message.
This message indicates that the system is being
HMI Active operated locally and serial communication is
suspended.
This error results if there are problems with the serial
Echo Timeout optical fiber communication link or if the echo cancel
function is used incorrectly.
This error results if incorrect or out of range data is
Illegal Data Value
entered.
This error results if incorrect function is performed on
Illegal Function
modbus protocol.
This error results if an incompatible version of
ISScom software is used. This is a communication
Illegal Data Address
protocol error. Contact a Beckwith Electric Co. factory
representative.
This error results if there are problems with the
Invalid CRC communication link or if the echo cancel function is
used incorrectly.
This error results when there is a mismatch in PC Com
Failed to open Comm Port
Port settings.
This error results when communication with the system
Failed to write to Comm Port
is lost while attempting to write data to the system.
This error results when communication with the system
Read Timeout
is lost while attempting to read data from the system.
Table C‑2 ISScom® Error Messages
C–3
C–4
Appendix – D
D Transfer Event Log Samples

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print‑ready screens provided by the ISScom® Transfer Event Log
Print Summary and Print Detail features.
D–1
Transfer Event Log Recorder

System: M4172
Date: 08/27/2015, 08:58:37
No. Date & Time Event Information
1 08/26/2015, 10:07:51.737 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Trip S1 Breaker Command
Close S2 Breaker Command
Input Pickup: 4
Output Pickup: 1 4 7
2 08/26/2015, 10:07:51.741 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Transfer : 1
3 08/26/2015, 10:35:18.070 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
4 08/26/2015, 10:35:18.082 S1 Breaker Closed

S2 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup: 1 4
Transfer : 2
5 08/26/2015, 10:35:18.087 S2 Breaker Opened

S1 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup: 1 4
Transfer : 3
6 08/26/2015, 11:02:02.012 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
7 08/26/2015, 11:02:02.028 S2 Breaker Opened

S1 Breaker Closed
Page 1
Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 1 of 2)
D–2
Appendix – D
Input Pickup: 1 4
Transfer : 4
8 08/26/2015, 11:02:18.078 S2 Breaker Opened

S1 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup: 1 4
9 08/26/2015, 11:02:18.091 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Transfer : 5
10 08/26/2015, 13:24:12.270 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Output Pickup: 3 7
11 08/26/2015, 13:24:12.287 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Input Pickup: 4
12 08/26/2015, 13:24:12.303 S2 Breaker Opened

S1 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup: 1 4
Transfer : 6
13 08/26/2015, 16:09:07.920 S2 Breaker Opened

S1 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup: 1 4
Output Pickup: 1 7
14 08/26/2015, 16:09:07.932 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Input Pickup: 4
Page 2
Figure D-1 Transfer Event Log Summary Printout (page 2 of 2)
D–3
Transfer Event Log Recorder

System: M4172
Date: 08/27/2015, 10:25:46
1 08/26/2015, 10:07:51.737 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Opened
Input Pickup: 4
System Status: Auto Fast Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK,
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Voltage OK,
Auto Fast Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK,
Auto In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Transfer Ready,
Auto Transfer Enabled,
Auto Transfer Initiated,
27B #1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2),
Open Transition Transfer In Process,
Fast Transfer Operated,
S1 Breaker Opened,
Trip S1 Breaker Command,
Device ON,
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Phase Angle OK,
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Voltage OK,
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK ,
Manual In-Phase Transfer Delta Frequency OK,
Manual Transfer Enabled,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Close S2 Breaker Command,
Source 2 (New Source),
Remote Mode,
Transfer Start Signal: Internal 27B1

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 119.9 (V) VB: 120.1 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VPS(S2): 119.9 (V) VA: 119.9 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 119.9 (V)
VPS(Bus): 120.0 (V) VA: 119.9 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 0.4 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
Bus V/Hz: 100.20 % Bus Frequency: 59.93 (Hz)
Delta Voltage: 0.1 (V)
Delta Phase Angle: 0.0 (°)
Delta Frequency: -0.07 (Hz)
Breaker Opening Time : 0.5 (Cycle)
2 08/26/2015, 10:07:51.741 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Page 1
Figure D-2 Transfer Event Log Detail Printout (page 1 of 3)
D–4
Appendix – D

Transfer : 1
Input Pickup:
Auto Transfer Initiated,
27B #1 Bus Phase UV Transfer Initiated (S1 to S2),
Transfer Completed,
S1 Breaker Opened,
Device ON,
Blocking After Transfer Alarm ,
S2 Breaker Closed,
Remote Mode,
Transfer Start Signal: Internal 27B1

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 119.9 (V) VB: 120.1 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 119.9 (V)
VNS(Bus): 0.4 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.002 (A)
Breaker Closing Time: 0.5 (Cycles)
Resultant V/Hz at breaker close: 0.03%
Open Transition Time(S1 to S2): 0.2 (Cycle)
3 08/26/2015, 10:35:18.070 S1 Breaker Opened

S2 Breaker Closed
Input Pickup:
Page 2
D–5

Auto Fast Transfer Ready,
Transfer Ready,
S1 Breaker Opened,
Device ON,
Manual Fast/Hot Parallel Transfer Ready,
Manual Transfer Initiated,
S2 Breaker Closed,
Remote Mode,
Transfer Start Signal: Local Manual

VPS(S1): 120.1 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 0.0 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
Delta Frequency: 0.00 (Hz)
Page 3
D–6
Appendix – E
E Sequence of Events Sample Printout
This Appendix contains Illustrations of the print‑ready screens provided by the ISScom® Sequence of Events
Recorder Print Summary and Print Detail features.
E–1
Sequence of Event Recorder

System: M4172
Date: 06/24/2015, 13:47:04
1 06/22/2015, 13:01:49.523 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
2 06/22/2015, 13:05:03.548 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
3 06/22/2015, 13:06:55.715 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
4 06/22/2015, 13:07:58.548 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
5 06/22/2015, 13:08:41.336 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
6 06/22/2015, 13:09:19.182 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
7 06/22/2015, 13:10:24.986 Input Pickup: 1

Output Pickup: 1
Page 1
Figure E-1 Sequence of Events Recorder Summary Printout
E–2
Appendix – E
Sequence of Event Recorder

System: M4172
Date: 06/24/2015, 13:47:37
1 06/22/2015, 13:01:49.523
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
System Status: Transfer Ready,
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
Delayed In-Phase Transfer Delta Voltage OK ,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,
System Start Signal: Local Manual

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.1 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 1.5 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
2 06/22/2015, 13:05:03.548
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
Page 1
Figure E-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Detail Printout (page 1 of 5)
E–3

S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.1 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 1.5 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
Delta Phase Angle: -120.4 (°)
3 06/22/2015, 13:06:55.715
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.1 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 1.5 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
4 06/22/2015, 13:07:58.548
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Page 2
E–4
Appendix – E
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.1 (V) VB: 120.2 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 2.0 (V)
I(S1): 0.002 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
5 06/22/2015, 13:08:41.336
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.2 (V) VB: 120.2 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
Page 3
E–5
VNS(Bus): 2.0 (V)

I(S1): 0.002 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
6 06/22/2015, 13:09:19.182
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.2 (V) VB: 120.2 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 2.0 (V)
I(S1): 0.000 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
7 06/22/2015, 13:10:24.986
Current Profile: 1
Input Pickup: 1
Output Pickup: 1
Input Drop:
Output Drop:
S1 Breaker Closed,
Device ON,
Page 4
E–6
Appendix – E

S2 Breaker Opened,
Local Mode,

VPS(S1): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.2 (V) VB: 120.2 (V) VC: 120.1 (V)
VPS(S2): 120.0 (V) VA: 120.0 (V) VB: 120.0 (V) VC: 120.0 (V)
VNS(Bus): 2.0 (V)
I(S1): 0.002 (A) I(S2): 0.000 (A)
Page 5
E–7
E–8
Appendix – F
F Transfer Logic Time Sequence

This Appendix contains Illustrations of the Transfer Logic Time Sequence for the Sequential Transfer Mode
and the Simultaneous Transfer Mode.
F–1
Figure F-1 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode
F–2
Appendix – F
IN-PHASE TRANSFER TIME WINDOW*
IN-PHASE TRANSFER
ENABLE
Figure F-2 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Simultaneous Transfer Mode
F–3
F–4
Appendix G
G Layup and Storage
Appendix G includes the recommended storage Layup of the M-4172 requires verifying that the
parameters, periodic surveillance activities and system clock is stopped. The steps necessary to
layup configuration for the M‑4172 Motor Bus verify system clock status are as follows:
Transfer System.
▲▲ CAUTION: Do not use the diagnostic mode in
relays that are installed in an active protection
Storage Requirements (Environment) scheme.
The recommended storage environment parameters
for the M-4172 are: For units with the optional HMI panel:
• The ambient temperature where the 1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses
M‑4172 is stored is within a range of 5° are installed.
C to 40° C 2. Determine the unit power supply rating
• The maximum relative humidity is less by observing the check box below the
than or equal to 80% for temperatures up PS terminals on the rear of the unit.
to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 3. Apply power to the unit consistant with
50% for relative humidity at 40° C. the rating determined in Step 2 (see
• The storage area environment is free Section 5.3 , External Connections). The
of dust, corrosive gases, flammable unit will enter the selftest mode.
materials, dew, percolating water, rain and 4. When the selftests are complete, then
solar radiation. press ENTER to begin main menu.
5. Press the right arrow pushbutton until
Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance SETUP UNIT is displayed.
During Storage)
6. Press ENTER to access the SETUP
The M-4172 power supply contains electrolytic
UNIT menu.
capacitors. It is recommended that power be applied
to the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant power 7. Press the right arrow pushbutton until
supply when installed) every three to five years for DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed.
a period of not less than one hour to help prevent 8. Press ENTER. A reset warning will be
the electrolytic capacitors from drying out. displayed:
Layup Configuration PROCESSOR WILL RESET!

The M-4172 includes a removable lithium battery ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE

backed TIMEKEEPER® module (Beckwith Electric
component U25, Figure 5-14). The TIMEKEEPER 88 WARNING: All relay functions and protection
module is the M-4172 real-time clock and also will be inoperative while the relay is in diagnostic
provides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memory mode.
when power is not applied to the unit.
9. Press ENTER. Unit will now reset and
displayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST
(RELAY). This is the beginning of the
diagnostic menu.
G–1
10. Press the right arrow pushbutton until 4. Install M-3871 ISScom® Communications
the following is displayed: and Oscillograph Analysis Software (see
Section 5.5, ISScom Communications
C
LOCK TEST and Analysis Software Installation) on
a PC that includes the following:
 CLOCK led cal factory

• Microsoft WindowsTM 98 Operating
11. Press ENTER. The following is displayed: System or above
• Equipped with a serial port
C
LOCK TEST
0
3-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000 5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1
of the relay to the PC serial port.
12. If the clock is running, press ENTER to 6. Open communications with the relay
stop the clock. The following is displayed: utilizing Section 5.6, Activating Initial
Local Communications.
C
LOCK TEST
7. Select System/Setup/Set Date/Time
-
CLOCK STOP- from the menu bar. ISScom will display
the "Set Date/Time" dialog screen Figure
QQ NOTE: When the relay clock is stopped, the 3-15.
seconds will be displayed as 80.
8. Verify that "Start Real-Time Clock" is
13. Press ENTER and verify the relay clock displayed, then proceed as follows:
is stopped. A display similar to the a. If "Star t Real-Time Clock" is
following is shown with the seconds displayed, then select "Save" and
stopped: go to Step 9.
b. If "Stop Real-Time Clock" is
C
LOCK TEST displayed, then select "Stop Real-
0
3-JAN-09:01:80.000 Time Clock" and then select "Save".
14. When the clock has been verified to 9. Close communications with the unit by
be stopped, then press EXIT until the selecting "Comm" from the menu bar
following message appears: and then select "Exit".
10. Disconnect the null modem cable and
PRESS EXIT TO
then remove power from the unit. The
EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE
unit can now be placed in storage.
15. Press EXIT again to exit DIAGNOSTIC

Storage of the M-4172 greater than five years may
MODE. The relay will reset and normal
running mode will resume. require replacement of the lithium battery prior to
placing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith Electric
QQ NOTE: Pressing any button other than EXIT will Customer Service for replacement procedure.
return the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
16. Remove power from the unit. The unit Maintenance Requirements
can now be placed in storage. The M-4172 Motor Bus Transfer System does not
require any maintenance over the length of its
service life. However, the unit includes diagnostic
For units without the optional HMI panel: features that provide the means to functionally test
1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses each element of the Motor Bus Transfer System. The
are installed. M-4172 also includes the capability to test inputs,
outputs and metering quantities of the interfacing
2. Determine the unit power supply rating system application. Chapter 6, Testing contains the
by observing the check box below the individual tests and procedures that are available to
PS terminals on the rear of the unit. be integrated into the user’s periodic Surveillance/
3. Apply power to the unit consistent with Testing program.
the rating determined in Step 2 (see
Section 5.3 , External Connections). The
unit will enter the selftest mode.
G–2
Appendix – H
H Index
A B
Accessing Switches, 5-15 B-0970, 5-15, 5-17
Activating Initial Local Communications, 3-1, 5-1, Blanking, 2-1
5-18, G-2 Block System Status, 4-83, 4-87:4-88
Active Profile, 2-14, 3-30, 4-87:4-88 Blocking
Alphanumeric Display, SP-15, 1-2, 2-1 After Transfer Time, SP-9, 4-40
Application, SP-4, SP-23:SP-24, 1-1:1-2, 1-5, 1-7, Inputs Selection, 4-54, 4-56:4-57, 4-59, 4-63:4-
4-1, 4-12, 4-71:4-72, 5-5:5-7, 5-18, 5-20, 6-5, G-2 71, 4-75, 4-77, 4-87
Arrow Pushbuttons, 2-1, 4-3:4-4, 4-6:4-10, 4-14,
Breaker
6-3:6-11, 6-13
Closing Time Deviation, SP-9, SP-14, 4-39
ATS, 3-8, 4-48
Failure
Auto Calibration, 1-3, 2-4, 6-1, 6-3, 6-13
I, 4-76
Auto Fast Transfer Ready
Initiate Inputs, 4-75:4-76
Output Selection, 4-43
Logic Diagran, 4-76
Outputs, 4-43
Status
Auto Transfer
Inputs, SP-10, SP-14, 4-27, 4-36, 4-41, 4-77
Block, 4-51
LED Input Configurations, 2-2
Mode, 4-48
LEDs, 2-2
Auto Trip Save, 4-71
Trip Option, SP-5, 4-71
Automatic
Bus
Fixed Time Transfer Save, 4-59
Phase Undervoltage Transfer Initiate Inputs,
In-Phase Transfer Save, 4-56
4-73:4-74
Residual Voltage Transfer Save, 4-57
Voltage Frequency Function Inputs, 4-80
Automatic Transfer VT
Block Input Settings, 4-51 Configuration Selection, 4-25
Initiation, 4-52 Fuse Loss, SP-4, SP-6, 4-45, 4-79
Settings Fast Transfer, 4-53 Fuse-Loss Function Inputs, 4-79
Settings Fixed Time Transfer, 4-58
Settings In-Phase Transfer, 4-55
Settings Residual Voltage Transfer, 4-56:4-57
Settings Setup, 4-48:4-52
Trip Settings, 4-72
H–1
C Common Function Settings

Inputs, 4-37, 4-41
Calibrate Unit, 3-34 Outputs, 4-43, 4-47
Callouts, 3-36:3-37, 3-41
Common Function Settings Outputs, 4-43
Change
Communication
Active Profile, 4-87:4-88
Access Code Reset, 3-31, 4-2
Colors, 3-38
Access Code Sent, 4-2
Scale, 3-40
Address, 2-4, 4-13, 4-19
Circuit Board Switches, 4-8, 4-13, 5-1, 5-15, B-1, Ports, SP-15, 1-3, 6-3
B-4
Setup, 3-33:3-34, 4-11, 4-13, A-1
Clear
Communications, SP-3:SP-4, SP-12, SP-15, 1-1:1-
Alarm Counters, 2-12
4, 2-6, 2-14:2-15, 2-17:2-18, 3-1, 3-3, 3-13:3-14,
Error Codes, 1-3, 2-4, 2-13:2-14 3-17, 3-22, 3-27, 3-32, 4-1:4-2, 4-5, 4-11, 4-13,
History, 2-17, 3-17, 3-21 4-15, 4-18, 4-20:4-22, 5-1, 5-18:5-19, 6-9, B-1,
Oscillograph Records Command, 3-29 G-2
Sequence of Events Record Command, 3-25 Configuration Record Forms, 1-2, 4-36, A-1
Status, 2-1, 2-17, 3-17, 3-21 Configure, 3-7, 3-10, 4-16, 4-36, 5-21
Transfer Event Log Status Command, 3-21 Connecting, 1-10, 4-18, 4-20, 6-4
Copy Profile, 3-30
Clock ON, 6-3, 6-10:6-11
Counters, 2-1, 2-12, 3-34
Close Command Pulse Length, SP-9, 4-40
Current Verification, 6-12
Closing Command Time Delay, SP-7:SP-8, 4-54,
4-64
Coastdown of
D
High Inertia Load On, 1-8 Date, SP-12, SP-17, 1-2:1-3, 2-4, 2-17:2-18, 3-6,
Low Inertia Load On, 1-8 3-11, 3-17, 3-22, 4-1, 4-8:4-10, 5-21, G-2
COM Port Dead-Sync Time, 4-13
Security, 2-5 Declaration of Conformity, 1-2, I-1
Setting Verification, 4-13 Definitions, 1-2, 4-1, 4-11, 4-13:4-14
Settings Warning, 4-13 Delta
Angle, 3-38, 4-68
COM1, SP-9, 1-3:1-4, 2-4:2-5, 2-9:2-10, 3-3, 4-2,
4-11, 4-14, 4-16:4-18, 5-18:5-19, 6-3:6-13, B-1, Frequency Limit, SP-2, SP-7:SP-8, 4-53, 4-55,
G-2 4-62, 4-64, 4-68
COM2 Loopback Phase Angle Limit, SP-4:SP-5, SP-7:SP-8, 2-6,
4-39, 4-53, 4-62, 4-68
Plug, 6-8
Voltage Limit, SP-2, SP-7:SP-8, 4-53, 4-55, 4-62,
Test, 2-4, 6-3, 6-8:6-9
4-64, 4-68
COM3 Test, 6-9
Details, SP-13, SP-23:SP-24, 3-18:3-19, 3-23:3-24,
Comm 5-6:5-7, 5-15
Access Code Setup, 4-2 Device
Menu, 3-4, 4-18, 5-18:5-19 Address, 4-11:4-12, 4-14
Functions, 1-3
ON, SP-3, SP-15, 2-1, 2-4, 2-10:2-11, 3-3, 3-14
H–2
Appendix – H
DHCP Protocol, 1-3, 4-15:4-17 F

Diagnostic Test Procedures, 6-1, 6-3
Dip Switch SW-1, 5-16 Fast
Direct Connection, 1-4, 3-4, 4-11, B-1 Sequential Transfer, 1-10
Disabling COM Ports, 2-5 Simultaneous Transfer, 1-10
Display Transfer
All, 3-7, 3-9, 4-36 Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-54, 4-63:4-64
Test, 2-4, 6-3, 6-8 Load Shedding Output Selection, 4-45
Load Shedding Outputs, 4-45
Download, 2-17:2-18, 3-17:3-18, 3-22:3-23, 3-28
Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram, 4-89 File Menu, 3-4, 3-38
Fixed Time Transfer Methods, SP-4, 1-9
E Front Panel Controls, 1-1, 1-4, 2-1
Function Settings Bus Phase Undervoltage Transfer
ENTER Pushbutton, 2-2, 2-5, 2-8, 2-10:2-13, 2-17, Initiate, 4-74
4-2, 4-4:4-7, 4-9, 4-14:4-15, 4-17, 4-48, 4-60
Entering MBTS Diagnostic Mode, 6-3:6-6, 6-8:6-11, G
6-13
Equipment Required, 1-2, 6-2:6-3, 6-12 General
Ethernet Information, 5-1, 5-21
Communication Settings, 4-15 Unit Setup, 4-1
Protocols, 4-15 Grounding Requirements, 5-5
Settings, 3-34, 4-15
Setup, 2-4, 3-34, 4-15:4-17 H
Example of ISSplot Oscillographic Data, 3-39
Hardware Requirements, 5-18
Exit
Help Menu, 3-35, 3-40
Command, 3-4
HMI
Pushbutton, 2-1, 2-17, 4-4, 6-7
Auto Transfer Mode Enable, 4-48
Expanded Communication, 3-4:3-5, 4-18:4-19 COM Port Enable, 4-14
External Comm Access Code Setup, 4-2
Connections, SP-17, SP-23:SP-24, 1-1, 5-1, Ethernet Port Setup, 4-15
5-5:5-7, 5-15, G-1:G-2
Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board, 4-17
Control Inputs Configuration, 4-42, 4-51, 4-61
Manual Transfer Enable, 4-60
Status Input Selection, 4-42
Set Date, 4-9
Status Reset, 4-42
System OK LED Setup, 4-7
User Access Codes Setup, 4-4
User Control Number Setup, 4-6
User Logo Line Setup, 4-5
Horizontal
Mount, SP-23, 5-6
Unit Mechanical, 5-2
H–3
Hot Parallel Installing ISScom, 5-18

Ready Output Selection, 4-44 Insulation Coordination, 5-5
Ready Outputs, 4-44 Introduction, 1-1
Transfer, SP-2, SP-4, SP-8, 1-9, 2-6:2-7, 3-14, IP Ethernet Communication, 3-5
3-17, 4-44, 4-60, 4-68:4-71 ISScom
Human-Machine Interface, SP-3:SP-4, SP-15, 1-4, COM Port Definitions, 4-13
B-1 Communications, SP-3, SP-12, SP-15, 1-1,
Hz Resultant Between ES, 1-9 1-3:1-4, 2-14, 3-1, 3-17, 3-22, 4-1, 5-1, 5-18, B-1,
G-2
I Data Reading Successful, 3-31
Dialog Box, 3-35
Illuminated, SP-14, 2-2, 2-8:2-9, 3-14, 3-32, 4-5,
Ethernet Port Setup, 4-15
6-2, 6-11
File Written, 3-30
In-Phase Transfer
Functional Description, 2-1, 3-1
Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-56, 4-65:4-66
Installation, 3-1, 5-18
Load Shedding Output Selection, 4-46
Main Menu Structure, 3-2
Load Shedding Outputs, 4-46
Modem Expanded Communication, 3-5
Incomplete Transfer
Program Icon, 3-1, 5-18
Lockout Time, SP-9, 2-7, 4-40, 4-57:4-59, 4-66,
Serial Communication, 3-5
4-68
Set Date, 4-8
Outputs Selection, 4-47
User Access Codes Setup, 4-3
Indicators, SP-14:SP-15, 1-1, 2-1, 2-8:2-10, 2-15,
User Logo Line, 4-5
3-1, 3-13:3-14
Industrial Processing Plant Bus Transfer One-line, ISSLogic
1-7 Function Diagram, SP-15, SP-18, 4-90
Initial Setup Procedure, 5-1, 5-21 Function Setup, 4-85
Initializing, 4-18 Settings, 4-83
Initiate ISSplot
Manual Transfer Command Sent, 2-8 Auto All, 3-40
Outputs Selection, 4-75:4-76 Change Colors, 3-38
Initiating Change Scale, 3-40
Function Pickup, 4-83, 4-85:4-86 Default, 3-40
Function Timeout, 4-85:4-86 File Menu, 3-38
Inputs, 4-83, 4-87 Main, 3-36
Outputs, 4-83, 4-85 Menu Structure, 3-36:3-37
System Status, 4-83, 4-86 Select New Source, 3-38
Input Select Waveforms, 3-38
Active States Selection, 4-27:4-28 Settings Menu, 3-38
Contacts, 4-41, 6-5 Shortcut Keys, 3-40
Dialog, 4-42 Toolbar, 3-41
Test, 2-4, 6-3, 6-5 View Menu, 3-38
Window Menu, 3-40
Installation, 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, 5-5, 5-18, 6-13, G-2
H–4
Appendix – H
J Manual Transfer
Block Input Settings, 4-61
Jumpers, 4-8, 4-13, 5-1, 5-15, B-1, B-4 Initiate Input Settings, 4-62
Mode, 4-60:4-61
L Save, 4-62
Large Induction Motor, 1-8 Settings Fast Transfer, 4-62:4-63
Latched Outputs Selection, 4-26:4-27 Settings Hot Parallel Transfer, 4-68:4-69
Layup, SP-17, 1-2, G-1 Settings In-Phase Transfer, 4-64:4-65
LED, SP-13:SP-14, 2-2, 2-4, 2-9:2-10, 3-11, 3-32, Settings Residual Voltage Transfer, 4-66:4-67
4-1, 4-5, 4-7:4-8, 4-27, 5-16, 6-2:6-11, 6-13, G-2 Settings Setup, 4-61
Load Shedding MBTS
Output Selection, 4-45:4-47 Front Panel, 1-4, 2-8, 2-10:2-13, 2-15, 2-17, 3-13,
Outputs, 4-45:4-47 4-60, 5-19:5-20
Time Delay, SP-7:SP-8, 4-47, 4-57:4-59, 4-66 Outputs, 5-5
Local Setpoints, 3-8
Button, 3-1 Setup System, 4-24
Control, SP-3, SP-15, 2-1, 2-4, 2-9:2-10, 3-1, 3-3, Mechanical, SP-17, 1-1, 2-7, 5-1:5-2, 5-4
3-14 Message Menu Flow, 2-3
Manual Initiate Time Delay, 4-40 Metering
Mode, 2-4, 2-8:2-10, 3-1, 4-40 Current Input Configuration, 6-14
Modem, 4-18, 4-20 Test Setup, 6-12
Logic Functions, 4-83 Tests, 6-1, 6-12
Voltage Input Configuration, 6-14
M Miscellaneous Setup, 3-32, 4-5
M-3976 Status Module, SP-3, SP-15, 2-2, 6-7 Modems, 4-11, 4-18, B-1
M-4172 Module LED Test, 2-4, 6-6
Circuit Board, 5-15, 5-17 Monitor Status, 2-17, 3-11, 3-31, 4-3
Horizontal Front Panel, 2-3 Motor Bus Transfer System, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4,
1-1:1-2, 1-5, 2-1, 4-1, 4-12, 4-36, 4-71, 5-1, 5-21,
Machine Interface Module, 2-1, 6-7 6-13, A-1, B-1, G-1:G-2
Main Menu Flow, 2-4 MTS, 4-60
Main-Tie-Main Application Example, 4-72 Multiple Systems Addressing Using
Manual Fast Transfer Communications-Line Splitter, 4-12
Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-63:4-64
Save, 4-64 N
Manual Hot Parallel Transfer, 3-14, 4-44, 4-68, 4-70 New
Manual In-Phase Transfer, 4-64, 4-66 Command, 3-4
Manual Operation, 1-1, 2-1, 2-6, 3-34 System, 3-4
Manual Residual Voltage Transfer Save, 4-68 User Access Code Sent, 4-3
H–5
O R
Off Dialog Box, 2-11, 3-3 Rate Of Change Of Frequency, SP-3, SP-11, 1-10,
One Phase Grounded VT Three-Line Connection 3-17, 4-81
Diagram, 4-30, 5-9 Read Data From System, 3-4, 3-6, 3-31
Open Recorder Partitions, 4-22
Command, 3-4 References, 1-11
Delta Three-Line Connection Diagram, 4-35, 5-14 Remote Manual Initiate Time Delay, 4-40
Order of Possible Open Transition Transfer MBTS, Replacement Fuses, 5-5
1-11 Reset
Oscillograph Buttons, 3-1
Analysis Software, SP-15, 1-3:1-4, 3-17, G-2 Delay Timer Logic Diagram, 4-89
Manual Trigger Command, 3-29
Residual Voltage
Records Cleared, 3-29
Limit, SP-2, SP-7:SP-8, 4-47, 4-57, 4-66
Setup Sent, 4-22
Transfer Blocking Inputs Selection, 4-57, 4-67:4-
Output 69
Contacts, SP-3, SP-10, SP-13, SP-15:SP-16,
Retrieve Oscillograph Record, 3-28
2-17, 3-7, 4-36, 5-5, 6-4, A-1
ROCOF, SP-11, 4-73, 4-81:4-82
Counters, 2-12, 3-34
RS-232, SP-3, SP-15, 3-1, 3-3, 4-11:4-13, 4-20,
Relay Test, 6-4
5-18, 6-12, B-3
Relays, 2-10, 6-4
RS-485, SP-3, SP-15, 4-11, 5-18, B-4
Outputs Selection, 4-26:4-27, 4-47, 4-73:4-76,
4-79:4-80, 4-82, 4-85
S
Overview of Manual Transfer Methods, 2-6
S1 BF Source, 4-77:4-78
P S2
BF Source, 4-77:4-78
Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions, SP-27, 5-3
Breakers Open, 4-49
PC Modem, 4-18
CT Configuration Selection, 4-26
Phase-Ground VT Three-Line Connection Diagram,
4-32, 5-11 VT Configuration Selection, 4-25
Phase-Phase VT Three-Line Connection Diagram, Save As Command, 3-4
4-33, 5-12 Secondary Metering, 2-8, 2-10:2-11, 2-15:2-16,
Phasor Diagram, 2-17, 3-11, 3-14:3-15 3-11:3-13, 3-16:3-17, 3-22, 3-29, 4-27, 4-39, 5-20
Physical Dimensions, 5-1:5-2, 5-4 Select
Power On Self Test, 6-1:6-2, 6-12 Active Profile, 2-14, 3-30
Power Supply Connection, 5-5, 6-2 Waveforms, 3-38
Pre-Commissioning Checkout, 5-1, 5-20 Self Test, SP-14, 1-2, 3-32, 6-1:6-2, 6-4, 6-12
Primary Metering, 2-15, 3-11:3-12, 3-16 Sequence of Events
Print Setup Command, 3-4 Dropout I, 3-25
Printed, SP-28, 3-38, 5-15 File Summary, 3-24
Profile, 2-14, 2-18, 3-6, 3-28, 3-30, 4-20, 4-83, Pickup I, 3-25
4-87:4-88, A-5:A-26
Record Cleared, 3-25
Pulsed Outputs Selection, 4-27
Recorder Download, 2-18, 3-22:3-23
H–6
Appendix – H
Sequence of Events (Cont.'d) SYS OK LED Flash, 6-11

Recorder Setup, 3-22, 4-23 System
Sample Printout, E-1, 1-2, E-1 Access Codes, 3-31
Send Changes, 4-23 Clock, 3-11, 4-8, G-1
Setup, 3-22, 4-23 Communication Setup, 3-33, 4-11, 4-13, A-1
Summary, 3-23:3-24 Diagrams, 4-1, 4-25, 4-29
System Status, 3-26 Error Codes, 2-12, 3-34
Viewer, 3-23 Firmware Update, 3-34
Events Recorder, 3-22 Menu, 3-4, 3-6, 3-9, 4-24, 4-36
Sequential Transfer Mode, SP-4, SP-21, 2-6, 4-39, OK LED Setup, 4-5, 4-7
4-75, 4-77, F-1:F-2 Outputs Test, 3-33
Serial Setpoints, 1-10, 3-1, 3-6:3-8, 4-1, 4-36:4-37,
Communication Cables, 1-4 4-87, 5-21, A-1, A-5:A-12
Port, 3-1, 4-11, 4-15, 4-18, 4-20, B-1, G-2 Setup, 1-1, 2-15:2-16, 3-4, 3-6:3-8, 3-10:3-11,
4-1, 4-8, 4-24, 4-26:4-27, 4-36:4-38, 4-41, 4-43,
Ports, 4-11, 4-18, B-1
4-48, 4-51, 4-53, 4-55, 4-57:4-58, 4-60:4-62,
Service Position Inputs, 4-42 4-64, 4-66, 4-68, 4-71, 4-73, 4-75, 4-77, 4-79:4-
Set Date, 1-2, 3-6, 3-11, 4-8:4-9, G-2 81, 4-83, 4-85, 5-20:5-21, G-2
Setup Status, SP-11, SP-15, 2-8, 2-10:2-11, 2-15, 3-1,
3-11:3-12, 3-18, 3-20, 3-25:3-26, 4-39, 4-42,
Oscillograph Recorder, 3-27, 4-21
4-83, 4-86:4-88
Procedure, 5-1, 5-21
Sequence of Events Recorder, 4-23 T
System, 3-1, 3-6:3-8, 3-22, 4-1, 4-24:4-28, 5-20,
A-1, A-3:A-4 Terminal Window, 3-4, 4-19:4-20
Shortcut Command Buttons, 3-1 Test Error Codes, 1-2
Simultaneous Transfer Mode, SP-3, SP-5, SP-14, Testing Overview, 6-1
SP-22, 2-6, 4-39, 4-54, 4-64, 4-75, 4-77, F-1, F-3 Three-Phase
Single Line Diagram, 3-14, 3-16, 4-26 Bus Side Open Delta Three-Line Connection
Single Phase, SP-5, SP-7:SP-8, SP-11, 2-15, 3-12, Diagram, 4-35, 5-14
3-14, 4-25:4-26, 4-32, 4-79:4-80 Open Delta VT Three-Line Connection Diagram,
Single-Phase Source Side, 4-34:4-35, 5-13:5-14 4-31, 5-10
Small Induction Motor, 1-8 Wye-Primary, 4-30, 5-9
Source Side, 4-34:4-35, 5-13:5-14 Wye-Wye VT Three-Line Connection Diagram,
4-29, 5-8
Status
LED Panel, 6-6 Time
Module, SP-3, SP-14:SP-15, 1-1, 1-3:1-4, 2-1:2- Command, 3-11
2, 2-5, 2-9, 4-27, 6-7 Delay, SP-2, SP-4:SP-11, 1-11, 2-2, 2-6:2-7,
Monitoring, 2-1, 2-15 4-40, 4-44, 4-47, 4-54, 4-57:4-59, 4-64, 4-66,
4-70:4-71, 4-73, 4-75, 4-77, 4-79:4-81, 4-83,
RESET Pushbutton, SP-14:SP-15, 2-2, 2-5,
4-87, 4-89
2-8:2-9, 6-7
Sequence of Transfer Logic, SP-21:SP-22, 4-53,
Storage, SP-17, 1-2, G-1:G-2 4-55, 4-57:4-58, 4-62, 4-64, 4-66, F-2:F-3
Submenu Callouts, 3-36:3-37 Sync LED, SP-14, 2-2, 3-11
Switching The Active Setpoint Profile, 2-14 Window, SP-4:SP-5, SP-7:SP-8, 2-6:2-7, 4-54:4-
Sync Scope, 2-17, 3-11, 3-14:3-15 58, 4-64, 4-66, 4-70
H–7
Timer Feature, 4-87, 4-89 U

Tools Menu, 3-31
Torque Requirements, 5-5, 6-3, 6-13 Unit
Transfer Block, 4-42, 4-51, 4-54, 4-56, 4-61, 4-83, Isolation, 5-5
4-87 Setup, 3-22, 3-28, 3-31:3-34, 4-1, 5-21, 6-3, B-1
Transfer Completed Unit-Connected Generator Motor Bus Transfer One-
Output Selection, 4-45 line, 1-6
Outputs, 4-45 Upper-Lower Voltage Limit New Source, 4-39
Transfer Event Log User
Clear History Command, 3-21 Access Codes Reset, 3-31:3-32, 4-3
File Summary, 3-19 Control Number, 1-2, 2-4, 3-32, 4-1, 4-5:4-7
History Cleared, 3-21 Logo Line, 2-4, 3-32, 4-5:4-6
Pickup I, 3-21
Record Download, 3-18
V
Sample Printout, 1-2 Vertical Unit
Status Cleared, 3-21 External Connections, 5-7
Viewer, 3-18 Mechanical, 5-4
Transfer Functions, 1-2 View System Error Codes, 2-12
Transfer Logic Time Sequence, 1-2, 2-6, 4-39, F-1
Transfer Methods, SP-4:SP-5, SP-20, 1-9, 2-6, 4-39 W
Transfer Mode, SP-3:SP-5, SP-14, SP-21:SP-22,
2-6, 4-39, 4-48, 4-54, 4-60:4-61, 4-64, 4-75, 4-77, Window Menu, 3-35, 3-40
F-1:F-3 Wire Testing, 6-10
Transfer Modes, SP-4, 1-2, 2-6 Write File To System, 3-6, 3-30
Transfer Ready Wye Secondary, 4-30, 5-9
Output Selection, 4-43:4-44 Wye-Wye Three-Line Connection Diagram, 4-34,
Outputs, 4-43:4-44 5-13
Transfer Settings, SP-7:SP-9, 2-6, 2-15, 3-13,

4-1, 4-36:4-37, 4-44, 4-48:4-58, 4-60:4-71, A-1,
A-5:A-12
Transfer Start Signal Status, 3-18, 3-20, 3-25:3-26
Trigger Oscillograph Recorder Command Sent, 3-29
Trip Command, SP-4:SP-5, SP-9:SP-10, SP-14,
1-5, 1-10, 2-6:2-7, 3-17, 4-40, 4-43:4-45, 4-49,
4-71, 4-75, 4-77
Tripping Command Time Delay, SP-8:SP-9, 2-7,
4-70:4-71
Typical Two Breaker Configuration, 1-6
H–8
Declaration of Conformity Appendix – I
I Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
( in accordance to ISO/IEC 17050-1:2004 )
No. M-4172 Manufacturer’s Name: Beckwith Electric CO, INC.

Manufacturer’s Address: 6190 118th Avenue North
Largo, FL 33773-3724
The manufacturer hereby declares under our sole responsibility that the M-4172 product conforms to the following product standard
as of July 25th, 2006 in accordance to Directive 2004/108/EC for equipment incorporated into stationary installations:
BS EN 60255-26:2005
Electromagnetic compatibility ( EMC )
Requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment
Electromagnetic Emissions: EN 60255-25:2000
Conducted 150 kHz to 30MHz

Radiated 30MHz to 1000MHz
Class A Limits
Electromagnetic Immunity
1 MHz Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1:2005
Electrostatic Discharge 8kV Contact; 15kV Air

EN 60255-22-2:1997
Radiated RF 80MHz to 1000MHz 10V/m, 80% AM ( 1kHz )

EN 60255-22-3:2001
Fast Transients 5ns/50ns Bursts @ 5kHz for 15ms 300ms for 1 min.
2kV power supply lines and earth 2kV signal data and control lines
EN 60255-22-4:2002
Surge 1Kv Line to Line coupling, 2Kv Line to Earth coupling power supply lines
IEC 60255-22-5:2002
Conducted RF 150KHz to 80MHz 10V emf

EN 60255-22-6:2001
Power frequency immunity test

Class A 300 Vrms common mode – 150 Vrms differential mode
Class B 300 Vrms common mode – 100 Vrms differential mode
IEC 60255-22-7:2003
DC voltage interruptions
IEC 60255-11:1979
EN 61010-1: 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and
laboratory use Part 1. General requirements European Safety Directive
Manufacturers Contact:
Manager of Engineering
6190 118th Ave North
Largo, FL 33773-3724
Tel ( 727 ) 544-2326
I–1
Legal Information
Patent Indemnification
The Seller shall not be liable for any property
The units described in this manual are covered by damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage
U.S. Patents, with other patents pending. arising out of, connected with, or resulting from
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller, this contract, or from the performance or breach
its directors, officers, agents, and employees from thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished
any and all costs and expense, damage or loss, under this contract.
resulting from any alleged infringementof United In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,
States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,
trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law, including but not limited to, loss of profits or
arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any
designs, specifications, or instructions. associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of
purchased power, cost of substitute equipment,
facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or
Warranty damages of customers or employees of the Buyer

for such damages, regardless of whether said claim
or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort
Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the including negligence, or otherwise.
subject matter of this contract will be manufactured
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable
in a good workmanlike manner and all materials
for any personal injury whatsoever.
used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for
the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a It is agreed that when the equipment furnished
period of ten years from date of shipment of the hereunder are to be used or performed in connec-
equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or
by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in activity, Seller shall have no liability for any
accordance with Seller’s specifications of the nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,
product, Seller shall at his expense correct the or nuclear contamination to any property located at
same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees
equipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’s to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against
responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace- any and all liability associated therewith whatso-
ment value of the equipment furnished under this ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.
contract. Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear
reactor and includes the site on which any of the
Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied
foregoing is located, all operations conducted on
other than those set out above. Seller specifically
such site, and all premises used for such opera-
excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility
tions.
and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the description
contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for
consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of
Notice:
whatever nature. Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith
Any equipment returned for repair must be sent Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of
with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment identification.
must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore- The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein
mentioned warranties are void if the value of the are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric
unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return. Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;
therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-
tion of the apparatus described therein without
written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained herein
shall be construed as an express warranty of
affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and
any and all such express warranties are specifically
excluded nor shall such illustration or description
imply a warranty that the product is merchantable
or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no
warranties which extend beyond those contained in
the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.
All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval
of the Company.
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121
marketing@beckwithelectric.com
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2015
© 2015 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800‑4172‑IB‑02 01/19

Printed in USA

M 4172 Ib PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

M 4172 Ib PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Instruction Book

M‑4172 Digital Motor

Digital Motor Bus

• Provides Automatic and Manual transfers of motor bus systems on

Industry Leader Since 1969

Additional Standard Features Optional Features

Sequential Transfer Mode

Simultaneous Transfer Mode

Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection (60FL)

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 2%

Residual Voltage Transfer

Fixed Time Transfer

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Delta Voltage Limit 0 to 120 V 1 V 0.5 V or 2%

Residual Voltage Transfer

Hot Parallel Transfer

TRANSFER SETTINGS (cont.)

Trip Originally Closed Enable/Disable – –

Common Function Settings

Upper Voltage Limit 5 to 180 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%

considered a complete transfer, and resets this timer.

Com3 Port or Ethernet Port.

27B Bus Undervoltage

Pickup #1, #2, #3, #4 5 to 120 V 1 V ±0.5 V or ±2%

50BF-1 Breaker Failure (Source 1)

50 Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

50BF-2 Breaker Failure (Source 2)

50 Pickup Current 0.10 to 10.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or 2%

Source 1 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)

Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

Source 2 Breaker Failure (Using breaker status)

Time Delay 0 to 30 Cycles 1 Cycle 1 Cycle

Pickup #1, #2 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz ±0.02 Hz (±1.0 Hz)**

81R Bus Rate of Change of Frequency

Bus VT Fuse-Loss Detection

Delta Pickup* 5 to 25 V 1 V ±.05 V or ±2%

Transfer Event Log

Sequence of Events Recording

Power Input Options

Breaker Closing Time and Breaker Failure Monitoring

Power up Self-Test and Continuous On-Line Testing

Target/Status Indicators and Controls

Optional Ethernet Port

Tests and Standards

Voltage Interruptions Immunity

Electrostatic Discharge Test

Fast Transient Disturbance Test

Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth

UL 508 8 A carry at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz

Recommended Storage Parameters

Disposal and Recycling

Patent & Warranty

Selectable And/Or Block

Selectable And/Or 0-65,500 cycles Programmed

Figure 1 ISSLogic® Function Diagram

MAIN SOURCE STARTUP SOURCE

UNIT AUXILIARY STATION SERVICE

STATION BUS SYSTEM

Source 1 (S1) Source 2 (S2)

Figure 2 Typical Applications of Motor Bus Transfer Systems

Figure 4 Time Sequence of Transfer Logic in Sequential Transfer Mode

IN-PHASE TRANSFER TIME WINDOW*